JP2019024725A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To prevent gambling properties from getting excessively high.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: control means (a game control device 100) for executing control of a game; and setup means (the game control device 100) capable of selecting a probability value for use in a lottery of a special result from a plurality of types of probability values by an operation of a setup switch. Further, the control means is configured to select length of a specific period to be set in the game according to probability values and to differentiate probabilities of selecting a long specific period between a case where a first probability value is set as the probability value, and a case where a second probability value lower than the first probability is set.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 118

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special gaming state advantageous to a player when the result of the game is a special result.

Conventionally, a winning opening called a starting winning opening is provided in the gaming area on the gaming board, random numbers are acquired based on the winning of the hitting ball to the starting winning opening, and a determination is made based on the winning result. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine that provides a player with a predetermined benefit (for example, a special gaming state) is widely spread (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2007-89978

By the way, in the conventional game machine, there was a case where the shootability became too high.
An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine which can prevent the irritability from becoming too high.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is:
A gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state for giving a player a gaming value when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result.
Control means for controlling the game;
Setting means for making it possible to select the probability value to be used for the drawing of the special result from a plurality of kinds of probability values by operating the setting switch,
The control means
The length of the specific period set in the game can be selected according to the probability value,
The case where the first probability value is set as the probability value and the case where the second probability value lower than the first probability is set are characterized in that the probability of selecting the long specific period is different. .

  According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent the prosperity from becoming too high.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining a 1st special change winning a prize device. It is an expansion explanatory view showing the details of a collective display. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a figure explaining the operation mode in special gaming state. It is a figure explaining the operation mode in special gaming state. It is a flowchart explaining main processing. It is a flowchart explaining main processing. It is a figure explaining a model designation command. It is a flowchart explaining a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart explaining an initial value random number update process. It is a flow chart explaining timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining input processing. It is a flow chart explaining switch reading processing. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining a payment command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 2. It is a flowchart explaining a winning a prize mouth switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a fraud & prize monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a winning number counter update process. It is a flow chart explaining game machine state check processing. It is a flowchart explaining a payment busy signal check process. It is a flow chart explaining V abnormal passage monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a remaining ball monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining discharge ball monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart explaining hard random number acquisition processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure starting opening switch common processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure reservation information determination processing. It is a flow chart explaining pre-reading big hit decision processing. It is a flowchart explaining upper large winning a prize mouth switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining lower large winning a prize mouth switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a probability change operation area | region switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a remaining ball processing timer update process. It is a flowchart explaining special processing usual processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 change start processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 change start processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit judging processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining special drawing information setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining change pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining 2 byte distribution processing. It is a flow chart explaining change start information setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining processing during a special figure change. It is a flowchart explaining a process during special figure display. It is a flowchart explaining the time reduction change frequency update process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure game information check processing. FIG. 18 is a flowchart for describing a process transfer setting process 1 during fan fare / interval. FIG. It is a flow chart explaining processing during fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining the processing shift setting processing 1 during the special winning opening open. FIG. 20 is a flowchart for describing a process shift setting process 2 during the special winning opening open process. FIG. It is a flow chart explaining processing during big winning a prize opening. It is a flow chart explaining big hit operation shift setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining big winning a prize mouth remaining ball processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process. It is a flow chart explaining big hit end setting processing 1. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit end setting processing 2. It is a flowchart explaining a lever solenoid control process. It is a flowchart explaining a production | presentation command setting process. It is a flowchart explaining symbol change control processing. It is a flow chart explaining common drawing game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a Fuden prize winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a common drawing usual processing. It is a flowchart explaining the processing transfer setting processing during common drawing fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining a process in common drawing fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining a process in common drawing display. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a common drawing. It is a flowchart explaining a power transmission operation shift setting process. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement aspect of a normal fluctuation prize-winning apparatus. It is a flowchart explaining a routine charge residual ball process. It is a flow chart explaining end processing per common drawing. It is a flowchart explaining segment LED edit processing. It is a flowchart explaining abnormal discharge monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining board radio wave fraud monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flow chart explaining main prize ball signal edit processing. It is a flow chart explaining starting opening signal editing processing. It is a figure which shows an example of consecutive villa information production. It is a figure which shows an example of consecutive villa information production. It is a flowchart explaining the main processing in a production control device. It is a flowchart explaining a reception command check process. It is a flowchart explaining a received command analysis process. It is a flow chart explaining big hit system command processing. It is a flow chart explaining consecutive loach information production setting processing and consecutive loin notification production cancellation processing. It is a figure which shows an example of suggestion production. It is a figure explaining the modification of V prize announcement information production. It is a figure explaining a high probability state. It is a figure explaining the modifications 1-3. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit end processing in modification 1-1. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure information setting processing in modification 1-1. It is a figure which shows an example of a change group table in the case where selection is possible in a high probability state and a result is a big hit among the change group tables in modification 1-1. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit end processing in modification 1-2. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure information setting processing in modification 1-2. It is a figure which shows an example of a change group table in the case where selection is possible in a high probability state and a result is a big hit among the change group tables in modification 1-2. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure information setting processing in modification 2-1. It is a figure which shows an example of a change group table in the case where it is possible to select in a high probability state and a result is a release among the change group tables in modification 2-1. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure information setting processing in modification 2-2. It is a figure which shows an example of a change group table in the case where it is possible to select in a high probability state and a result is a release among the change group tables in modification 2-2. It is a figure explaining modification 4. It is a flowchart explaining the process in special figure display in modification 4-1. It is a flowchart explaining the process during a big winning opening opening in modification 4-1. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning a prize opening remaining ball processing in modification 4-1. It is a flowchart explaining the processing in the special figure display in modification 4-2. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during the big winning a prize opening in modification 4-2. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning a prize opening remaining ball processing in modification 4-2. It is a figure explaining each setting time in modification 5-1. It is a figure explaining each setting time in modification 5-2. It is a figure explaining each setting time in modification 5-3. It is a figure explaining each setting time in modification 5-3.

Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be capable of opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a housing portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. In addition, in the front frame (body frame) 12, the game board 3
A glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of 0 is attached.

In addition, lamps and LEDs are internally incorporated on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 for decoration or effect, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a delivery abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. has an abnormality notification color (for example, red , And a speaker (upper speaker) 19a for emitting a sound (for example, a sound effect). Furthermore, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided at the lower part of the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormal content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. Note that a lamp for notifying a dispensing abnormality may be provided on a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

The frame decoration device 18 on the right side seen from the front side of the gaming machine 10 is one of the auxiliary effect devices capable of executing the auxiliary effect which is the effect performed corresponding to the game effect which is the effect corresponding to the progress of the game And a projecting portion 80. The projecting portion 80 is provided so as to project on the right side surface of the front frame 12, and a player who is playing a game on the gaming machine can visually recognize, and a game on which the gaming machine is playing a game It is also visible to people other than the disabled. This protrusion 80
The light emitting device includes a plurality of light emitting regions 81 aligned in the vertical direction. Each light emission area 81 can independently control the light emission mode (light on, light off, blink, light emission color, etc.), and the auxiliary effect is executed by the light emission modes of the plurality of light emission areas 81.

In the game effect that is the effect according to the progress of the game, for example, an error notification notifying that an error has occurred in the gaming machine, a game effect relating to the special view variation display game being executed, and a prior determination about start memory There are pre-played effects for suggesting or informing the result, effect button operation effects for instructing the operation of the operation means, and a firing direction instruction notification for instructing the firing direction of the game ball in the game area. In the projecting portion 80, the light emission mode of the plurality of light emitting areas 81 is changed corresponding to the game effect selected among the game effects according to the current game state, and the auxiliary effect is executed.

In the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (not shown) for supplying game balls to a bat firing device (not shown)
Storage tray), the upper tray ball outlet 22 through which the gaming balls paid out from the payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 flow out, and the gaming balls paid out in a state where the upper tray 21 is full A lower tray (a saucer) 23 to be stored, an operation unit 24 of a hitting and launching apparatus, and the like are provided.
Further, at the upper edge portion of the upper tray 21, a presentation button 25 incorporating a presentation button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player is provided. In addition, production button 25
The touch panel 29 for receiving the touch operation input from the player on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the
Is provided. In addition, the effect button 25 incorporates an LED so that the light emission mode (light on, off, blink, light emission color, etc.) of the upper surface can be changed, whereby notification of the operation timing of the effect button 25 or It is possible to execute an assistance effect. That is, the effect button 25 is also one of the auxiliary effect devices capable of executing the auxiliary effect corresponding to the game effect.

Further, on the lower right side of the front frame 12, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.
Although the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25 in the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25 A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

In addition, to the right of the effect button 25, the ball lending button 27 operated when the player receives a ball loan from the adjacent ball lending machine, the discharge operated to discharge the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine A button 28 and a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card are provided.
In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the game ball is supplied from the upper plate 21 by the ball striking device by the player rotating the operation unit 24 and the game ball 32 on the front of the game board 30 is provided.
Fire toward. In addition, the player operates the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 to perform an operation or the like in which the player operates in the variable display game (the decoration special view variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.
A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 30. The game area 32 is made of resin side cases 3 provided at four corners of the game board 30, respectively.
3 and a guide rail 31 to constitute. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 40 provided with a display device 41 substantially at the center is arranged. Display device 41
Is mounted at a position recessed from the front face of the center case 40 in a recess provided in the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the display area of the display device 41 and to project forward than the display surface of the display device 41 to make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 (variable display device) 7 has seven light emitters (segments) arranged in a figure of eight.
Three segment indicators (variable display areas) are arranged side by side. Each light emitter can independently change the light emission mode (lighting, extinguishing, blinking, light emission color, etc.), and by controlling the light emission mode, identification information (special symbol) can be displayed for each 7-segment display is there. In addition, it is also possible to display information by combining a plurality of 7-segment displays. In the display device 41, a decorative special view variation display game is displayed, in which a plurality of identification information (special symbols) are variably displayed corresponding to the special view variation display game and then stopped. In addition, it is possible to execute the effect concerning the special figure fluctuation indicatory game due to the change of luminous feature.

Further, above the display device 41 in the center case 40, there is provided a board effect device 44 that effects the game by operating. The board effect device 44 is a drum-type device that can rotate around an axis along the left-right direction, and is configured such that only a part of the circumferential surface facing the front can be seen by the player. . Information is displayed on the circumferential surface for each area that becomes visible when facing the front, and multiple types of information are displayed along the circumferential direction,
An effect of the special figure variation display game is performed by the information displayed on the circumferential surface facing the front.
Further, below the display device 41 in the center case 40, a decorative special view start storage display unit 42 is provided which performs decorative special view start storage display corresponding to start storage.

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 36 (a first start winning opening, a start winning area) for giving a start condition of the first special view variation display game is provided. The game ball having won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 5).
Further, below the starting winning opening 36, an out port 30a is provided for collecting gaming balls that did not win a winning opening and the like.

On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (common view start gate) 34 is provided which gives a start condition of the common view variation display game. The game ball which has passed through the drawing start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 5).

In addition, the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32,
A normal fluctuation winning device 37 (a second start winning opening, a start winning area) for giving a start condition of the second special view fluctuation display game is provided below the.
The normal fluctuation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member 37b which can be opened into a state in which the game ball can easily flow in by opening in the direction in which the upper end side falls to the front side.
At all times, a closed state (a disadvantage state for the player) is maintained in a vertically closed state so that the game ball can not flow in. Then, when the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, it is operated so that the upper end side falls to the near side by the common electric solenoid 37c (refer to FIG. 5) as a driving device The game ball can easily change into the open state (a state advantageous to the player) into which the game ball can flow. The game ball that has won the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is detected by the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 5). In addition, it is possible to be able to win even when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the closed state, and in the closed state, it may be harder to win than in the open state.

In addition, on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, three general winning openings 3
5 is disposed, and one general winning opening 35 is disposed on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the normal fluctuation winning device 37. The game balls that have won in these general winning openings 35,
It is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 5).

Furthermore, on the lower right side of the center case 40 in the gaming area 32, a first special variation winning device (lower prize winning opening) that can be converted into a non-accepting state and an easily accepting state according to the result of the special view variation display game. 38 and a second special variation winning device (upper large winning opening) 39 is disposed.

The first special variation winning device 38 has an attacker type opening / closing door 38c which can be opened by turning in the direction in which the upper end falls down to the front, and as a result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game The state of closing the lower large winning opening (unfavorably closed state for the player) is converted to open state (state advantageous for the player). That is, the first special variation winning device 38 includes, for example, a lower winning opening that is opened and closed by the open / close door 38c driven by the lower large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 5) as a drive device. Converts the closed lower winning opening from the closed state to the open state, thereby facilitating the flow of gaming balls into the lower winning opening, and imparting a predetermined gaming value (prize ball) to the player. ing. A lower large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 5) is disposed inside the lower large winning opening (winning area) as a detecting means for detecting the gaming ball having entered the lower large winning opening. There is.

The second special variation winning device 39 has an attacker-type open / close door 39c which can be opened by turning in the direction in which the upper end falls down to the front, and the result of the special view variation display game as an auxiliary game The state of closing the upper big winning opening (convenient closing state for the player) is converted to open state (advantage state for the player). That is, the second special variation winning device 39 includes, for example, an upper winning opening opened and closed by an open / close door 39c driven by an upper winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 5) as a driving device, and is in a special gaming state It is made to facilitate the flow of gaming balls into the upper prize winning opening by converting the upper prize winning opening from the closed state to the opened state, and gives the player a predetermined gaming value (prize ball). ing. In the inside (winning area) of the large winning opening, a large winning opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 5) is disposed as a detecting means for detecting the gaming ball that has entered the large winning opening. There is.

The flow path of the gaming ball in the first special variation winning device 38 is shown in FIG. The lower special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a is disposed inside the first special variation winning device 38 (winning region) as a detecting means for detecting the gaming ball having entered the first special variation winning device 38. ing. The game balls having entered the first special variation winning device 38 are all detected through the lower large winning opening switch 38a and flow into the upper flow passage 38j.

The upper channel 38j is provided with a probability changing operation area 38h into which the game ball can flow, and the lever solenoid 38f (see FIG. 5) so as to change the inflow probability of the game ball to the probability changing operation area 38h. An operating lever member 38i is provided. Lever member 38
i is a plate-like member slidable back and forth, and projects forward as shown in FIG. 3 to cover the positive change operation area 38h, and the backward movement closed area where the game ball can not flow into the positive change operation area 38h; Then, it can be converted into the open state in which the game ball can flow into the positive change operation area 38h.

The probability changing operation area switch 38d is provided in the probability changing operation area 38h and can detect the inflow of gaming balls, and the gaming ball having flowed into the probability changing operation area 38h is detected by the probability changing operation area switch 38d, and then the lower flow path 38k Flow into Based on the detection of the game ball by the probability change operation area switch 38d, the probability state of the special view fluctuation display game is made to be the high probability state after the end of the special game state.

In addition, a passage opening switch 38g capable of detecting passage of gaming balls is provided on the lower stream side on the left side of the probability variation actuation area 38h in the upper flow passage 38j, and the gaming spheres that did not flow into the probability variation actuation area 38h are After being detected by the passage port switch 38g, it flows into the lower flow passage 38k. In the lower flow path 38k, a flow path in which gaming balls having passed through the probability change operation area 38h flow down and a flow path in which gaming balls having passed through the passage port switch 38g flow are joined on the downstream side. And
A discharge confirmation switch 38e for detecting passage of gaming balls is provided at the downstream end of the lower flow passage 38k, and after all the game balls flowing into the lower flow passage 38k are detected by the discharge confirmation switch 38e, It flows into the discharge passage which discharges the game ball to the outside of the gaming machine.

In the first special variation winning device 38 configured in this way, the number of gaming balls detected by the lower large winning opening switch 38a matches the number of gaming balls detected by the probability change operation area switch 38d and the passage opening switch 38g. By doing this, it can be confirmed that all the gaming balls having flowed into the upper flow passage 38j have been discharged. Furthermore, when the number of gaming balls detected by the probability change operation area switch 38d and the passage port switch 38g matches the number of gaming balls detected by the discharge confirmation switch 38e, all the gaming balls flowing into the lower flow path 38k It can confirm that it was discharged. In addition, the game ball that has flowed into the first special variation winning device 38 by matching the number of in-flowing game balls detected by the lower large winning opening switch 38a and the number of game balls detected by the discharge confirmation switch 38e. It can be confirmed that all was discharged.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the gaming area 32 where the gaming balls flow down, the area on the left of the center case 40 is taken as the left gaming area, and the area on the right of the center case 40 is taken as the right gaming area. ing. Then, the player adjusts the power and shoots the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left strike) to aim for winning to the start winning hole 36 or the left general winning hole 35, and the right side game area Launch the game ball (so-called right-handed) by
It is possible to aim for winning in the 4 or the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the first special fluctuation winning device 38, the second special fluctuation winning device 39, or the general winning opening 35 on the right side.

In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, in the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special view change display game or the second special view change display game and the common view start gate 34 that make A collective display device 50 is provided which displays a common drawing variation display game triggered by winning and various information.

As shown in FIG. 4, the collective display device 50 is a special view 1 display for the first special view fluctuation display game configured of a 7-segment display (LED lamp) or the like (a first special view fluctuation display unit ) 51 (D
1) and the second special figure variation display game special figure 2 display (second special figure variation display unit) 52 (D2)
And the special figure 1 suspension indicator 54 (D11, D12) for notifying the starting memory number of the first special figure fluctuation display game configured of the LED lamp and the special information for notifying the starting memory number of the second special drawing fluctuation display game Figure 2
And a hold indicator 55 (D13, D14).

In addition, a round display unit 60 (D3 to D7) for displaying the number of rounds at the big hit (the number of opening and closing times of the first special fluctuation winning apparatus 38 and the second special fluctuation winning apparatus 39) on the collective display device 50;
1st game state indicatory department 7 which reports whether or not it is time saving state (during common power support, during specified game state)
6 (D9), a second game state display unit 77 (D8) is provided to notify the player of a striking manner (a striking manner corresponding to the gaming state) among the left strike (normal strike) and the right strike. . In addition, a third gaming state display unit (third gaming state indicator, probability state display unit) 78 (D17) is provided to display that the jackpot probability state is a high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. It is done.
Furthermore, the batch display device 50 includes a common drawing indicator 74 (D10, D for a common drawing variation display game).
18) and the common drawing reservation display 75 (D15, D1 for start memory number notification of common drawing fluctuation display game)
6) and are provided.

The special view variation display game in the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52 is, for example, the middle of the variation display game, ie, while the decorative special view variation display game is being performed on the display device 41. The segment is driven to blink to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 100 ms. In the case of the present embodiment, in the first special view variable display game in the special view 1 display 51, as shown in FIG. 4B, in addition to the central segment, it is provided on the lower side of 7 segments rightward The eighth segment is also driven to blink to indicate that it is changing, and it is configured to be able to distinguish between Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2. In addition, a plurality of identification information (special figure, special symbol) for displaying the special figure variation display game may be sequentially displayed to indicate that the variation is in progress. And, if the result of the game is "off",
As a result mode of out of position, for example, the middle segment (in addition to the 8th segment on the lower right side in special figure 1) is turned on, and when the result of the game is "hit", the hit result aspect (
As a special result mode), the game result is displayed with the result mode (for example, numbers and symbols) other than the result mode of the disconnection being lit.

The special figure 1 reserve display 54 shows the number of undivided balls (the number of first start memories = the number of reserve) among the number of winning balls to the start winning opening 36 which becomes the variation start condition of the special figure 1 indicator 51. As shown in 4 (c), display is performed by turning off and lighting (flickering) a plurality of LEDs.
The special view 2 reserve display 55 is a normal change winning device 3 serving as a change start condition of the special view 2 display 52.
The number of undivided balls (second starting memory number = holding number) among the number of winning balls to 7 is displayed by turning off / lighting (flashing) the plurality of LEDs as shown in FIG. 4C.
The round display unit 60 is configured of an LED lamp or the like, turns off all the LEDs when not in the special game state, and is selected according to the result during the special game state as shown in FIG. 4 (d). Turn on the LED corresponding to the number of rounds. The round display unit may be configured by a 7-segment display.

As shown in FIG. 4E, the first gaming state display unit 76 turns on the LED when it is in the time saving state, and turns off the LED when it is not in the time saving state.
As shown in FIG. 4 (e), the second game state display unit 77 turns off the LED when the game state in which the left hit is more advantageous to the player than the right hit (normal hit), If the game state in which the player's right strike is more advantageous to the player than the left strike (right strike), the LED is turned on.
As shown in FIG. 4E, the third gaming state display unit 78 turns on the LED when the power is on in the high probability state, and turns off the LED if it is not in the high probability state.

The common drawing fluctuation display game in the common drawing display 74 is performed during the fluctuation display of the common drawing fluctuation display game,
The symbol number for variation shown in FIG. 4 (g) is alternately changed to light up two LEDs alternately to indicate that variation is in progress. When the result is hit, it is turned on in a lighting mode according to the type of the light to indicate that it is hit, and when the result is out, it is turned off to indicate that it is not. .
The common drawing reserve display 75 sets the number of undigested balls (the number of common drawing start memories = the number of reservations) of the passing balls of the common drawing start gate 34 serving as the fluctuation start condition of the common drawing display 74 as shown in FIG. As shown in f), display is performed by turning off and lighting (flickering) a plurality of LEDs.

FIG. 5 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 is provided with a gaming control apparatus 100, and the gaming control apparatus 100 is a main control apparatus (main substrate) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and a gaming microcomputer 111 (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer). And an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver, and a data bus 140 for connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. .

The CPU unit 110 is a gaming microcomputer (called an amusement chip (IC)).
It includes a CPU) 111, an oscillator such as a quartz oscillator, and an oscillation circuit (quartz oscillator) 113 that generates a clock serving as a reference of an operation clock or timer interrupt of the CPU and a random number generation circuit. The game control apparatus 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control apparatus 100 include DC 32 V, DC 12 V, D generated by the power supply apparatus 400.
A DC voltage of a predetermined level, such as C5V, is supplied and enabled.

The power supply device 400 generates an AC-voltage that generates the DC voltage of 32 V from the 24 V AC power supply.
The normal power supply unit 410 having a DC converter or a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V or DC5V from the voltage of DC32V, etc. Backup power supply 420
And a control signal generation unit 430 which generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal notifying the game control apparatus 100 of occurrence and recovery of a power failure.

In this embodiment, the power supply 400 is configured separately from the game control apparatus 100, but the backup power supply 420 and the control signal generator 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control 100, ie, main It may be configured to be provided on a substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control apparatus 100 are subject to replacement at the time of model change, as in the present embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a substrate different from the power supply 400 or the main substrate. Can be removed from the target of replacement and cost reduction can be achieved.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the gaming microcomputer 11 of the gaming control device 100.
The data stored in the RAM 1 is stored in the RAM 1 (especially the built-in RAM) and stored during the power failure or even after the power is shut off. That is, the game control apparatus 100 (RAM 111C) serves as a backup storage means capable of holding stored data even when the power is shut off (the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped). Then, when power is restored, control can be resumed based on the data held by the backup storage means.
The control signal generation unit 430 monitors, for example, the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it falls below 17 V, for example, and changes the power failure monitoring signal. Output Also, at the time of power on or recovery from a power failure, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. This R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the processing for forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 Is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal and causes the entire control system to be reset.
Although the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 may be performed to cancel the error other than when the power is turned on, in this case only the error is canceled and the processing such as the initialization of the RAM 111C is not performed. .

The gaming microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, Read-only ROM (Read Only Memory) 111 B and RA which can be read and written any time
M (random access memory) 111C is provided.

The ROM 111B stores invariable information (program, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a non-volatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a working area of the CPU 111A and storage areas of various signals and random values during game control. It is used as ROM 111 B or RAM 11
As 1C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special view variation display game, the contents of the effect, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine variation patterns by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 and 2 stored as start storage. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a falling fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a falling, a big hit fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, tables for determining a second half fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state A table (a first half fluctuation group table, a first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half fluctuation pattern which is a pattern is included. In addition, a fluctuation pattern table for determining fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation display game is also stored.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device capable of changing the display state, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. A game state (special game state) in which the game state is advantageous to the player when it becomes a special result mode
In the gaming machine 10 that is
This refers to a display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In addition, the reach state is deviated from the display condition which is the special result mode even when reaching the stage before the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. Then, for example, the reach state includes a state (so-called all-rotation reach) in which variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result mode is uniform. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. This refers to the display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition to be the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special view fluctuation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special view fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right fluctuation display areas in the display device. When displaying the result mode by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle and displaying the result mode, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same State that became identification information,
However, the special result mode may be excluded) and the remaining variable display area may be variably displayed from this reach state.

And, this reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result aspect is different (expected values are different). Special 2 Reach (SP2 Reach), Special 3
Reach (SP3 reach) and Premier reach are set. Expected values are: No reach <Normal reach <Special 1 reach <Special 2 reach <Special 3 reach <
It becomes high in order of Premier reach. Further, this reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special view variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special view variable display game (when it is out of alignment). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is a state in which the possibility of a big hit is higher than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices. 10 Take control of the whole. Also, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (
A variation pattern random number for determining the variation display game execution time etc. in various reach and variation displays without reach) Random number generation for generating a hit random number etc for determining hit of the spread map variation display game The circuit includes a clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock giving update timing of the random number generation circuit. ing.

In addition, CPU 111A, in the processing regarding the special figure fluctuation display game, ROM 111B
One of the variation pattern tables is acquired from the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in. Specifically, the CPU 111A is a game result (big hit or break) of the special figure variation display game, a probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure variation display game as the current gaming state, the current game One of the variation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of variation pattern tables based on the operation status (time saving operation status) of the normal variation winning prize apparatus 37 as the status, the number of starting memories, and the like. Here, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize balls. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and performs control for dispensing the ball.

Various switches and sensors are connected to the input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111. Then, the interface chip receives signals of negative logic such as high level 11 V and low level 7 V supplied from these switches and converts them into 0 V-5 V positive logic signals (
Proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b are provided. Proximity I / F 121a and 121b are
By setting the input range to 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch may be shorted improperly, or the sensor or switch may be disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire may be disconnected and become floating. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state and to output an abnormality detection signal.

Proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b include a gate switch 34a in the common start gate 34,
The winning opening switch 35a in the general winning opening 35, the lower large winning opening switch 38a in the first special variation winning device 38, the upper large winning opening switch 39a in the second special variation winning device 39, the first special variation winning device 38 The positive change operation area switch 38d provided in the positive change operation area 38h, the start opening 1 switch 36a in the start winning hole 36, the start opening 2 switch 37 in the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37
a, passage opening switch 38g for detecting gaming balls that have not flowed into the positive variation operation area 38h in the first special variation winning device 38, discharge confirmation switch 38e for detecting gaming balls discharged from the first special variation winning device 38 A board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine is connected.

The outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121 a and 121 b are supplied to the second input port 123 and the third input port 12.
4 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121a and 121b, the gate switch 34a and the winning opening switch 35
a, lower large winning opening switch 38a, upper large winning opening switch 39a, positive variation operation area switch 38
d, the detection signal of the start opening 1 switch 36a and the start opening 2 switch 37a is the second input port 12
It is input to 3.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, detection signals of the passage port switch 38g, the discharge confirmation switch 38e, and the panel radio sensor 62, and abnormality detection signals 1 and 2 output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected. Is input to the third input port 124.
The third input port 124 also includes a detection signal of the magnetic sensor 61 for detecting fraud provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or a frame radio wave fraud signal from the payout control device 200 (the front frame 12
A signal output based on detection of radio waves by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the) and a payout busy signal (signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can receive a command) are also input. ing. Note that a vibration sensor switch that detects vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and a detection signal of the vibration sensor switch may be input to the third input port 124.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121a and 121b, the output to the second input port 123 and the output of the passage port switch 38g of the outputs to the third input port 124 are the main substrate
It is also supplied from the 0 through the relay board 70 to the non-illustrated test shot test apparatus.
Furthermore, among the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the start opening 1 switch 36a and the start opening 2
The detection signal of the switch 37 a is configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b have a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b are supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage such as 5 V necessary for the operation of a normal IC from the power supply device 400. It is supposed to be.

The data held by the second input port 123 is the enable signal CE by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123.
It can be read out by asserting 2 (changing to a valid level). The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a payout abnormal status signal (a status signal indicating a payout abnormal) from the payout control device 200, a shoot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating a shortage of gaming balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (bottom A signal that is output when it is detected that the game balls are stored in the tray 23 at least a predetermined amount (full), a signal based on a touch switch signal (input of a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24) ) To capture the data bus
A first input port 122 is provided to supply the gaming microcomputer 111 via 0. In the first input port 122, a detection signal of a glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided in the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10, a body frame opening detection provided in the front frame (body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10, etc. The detection signal of the switch 64 is also input.

In addition, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like. Has a function to remove noise from the
The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET denoised by the Schmitt buffer 125 is
While being directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111, it is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, by outputting the reset signal RESET directly to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, the test injection test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test injection test apparatus is turned off. Is configured as. In addition, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be able to be output to the test irradiation test apparatus via the relay substrate 70.
The reset signal RESET is not supplied to each port 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. It is necessary to reset the data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input, but it is necessary to reset the data of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed in a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is set as one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal from the side of the effect control device 300 to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data indicating the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a test shot test device of a recognized organization (not shown) via a relay board 70 etc. An output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control apparatus (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as a real machine (mass-produced article for sale) installed in a game arcade. In addition, the proximity I / F 121a, 12
A detection signal of a switch requiring no processing, such as a starting opening switch, output from 1b is supplied to the shot testing device via the relay substrate 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, detection signals that can not be supplied to the test shooting test device as they are like the magnetic sensor 61 and the board radio wave sensor 62 are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. It is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay substrate 70 as an error signal indicating that it can not be done to the trial shot test apparatus. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test shot test device, and a connector that relays and transmits a signal line of a detection signal of a switch that does not pass the buffer. ing. In the port on the relay board 70, the gaming microcomputer 11 is
The chip enable signal CE output from 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the propulsive test apparatus.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and the lower special winning opening solenoid 38b which opens the first special fluctuation winning device 38, the upper special winning opening solenoid 39b which opens the second special fluctuation winning device 39, ordinary Common power solenoid 37c that opens the fluctuation winning device 37, first
A second output port 134 is provided for outputting operation data of the lever solenoid 38f for operating the lever member 38i in the special variation winning device 38. The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 5
A fourth output port 136 is provided to output on / off data of the digit line (common line) to which the cathode terminal of the 0 LED is connected.

In addition, the output unit 130 is provided with the external information terminal board 7 with information regarding the gaming machine 10 such as the big hit information.
A fifth output port 137 for output to 1 is provided. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or a game arcade internal management device (hall computer) etc.) installed in the game arcade. It can be supplied to an external device. The fifth output port 137 also outputs a release permission signal to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Furthermore, the lower large winning opening solenoid 38b, the upper large winning opening solenoid 39b, the common high power solenoid 37c, and the lever solenoid 38 output to the output unit 130 from the second output port 134.
The first driver (drive circuit) 138a that generates a solenoid drive signal by receiving the operation data signal of f and outputs the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135 A second driver 138 b for outputting a signal, a fourth output port 13
The third driver 138c for outputting the on / off driving signal of the digit line on the current lead-in side of the batch display device 50 output from the sixth, and the external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to the external device such as the management device A fourth driver 138 d that outputs data to the information terminal board 71 is provided.

The first driver 138a is supplied with DC 32 V as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 in order to drive a solenoid operating at 32 V. Further, DC 12 V is supplied to the second driver 138 b that drives the segment lines of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line according to the display data, the power supply voltage may be 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system is achieved by flowing a current into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12 V and extracting the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in step S1 and is turned on. The fourth driver 138 d for outputting the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with 12 V DC to give a level of 12 V to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the relay board 70 side, not on the output section 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, the main board.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection apparatus 500. Photocoupler 13
9 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data with the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since such transmission and reception of data are performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, no ports like the input ports 122, 123, 124 are provided.

In addition, although it is not necessarily limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36,
The starting opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, the lower large winning opening switch 38a, the upper large winning opening switch 39a in the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the probability change operation area switch 38d in the first special changing winning device 38, the discharge confirmation switch 38e, a passage opening switch 38g, a noncontact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch and the like) which has a coil for magnetic detection and detects a game ball using a phenomenon that a magnetic field changes when metal approaches the coil. Is used). Also,
A micro switch having a mechanical contact is used for the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the like and the body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 etc. be able to.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described using FIG.
The effect control device 300, like the gaming microcomputer 111, uses an amusement chip (IC
A main control microcomputer (CPU) 311, a display control circuit 312 for controlling the display of the display 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311, and various melodies and sound effects as the speaker 19a, A sound source LSI 314 is provided to control the output of sound for reproduction from 19 b.

The main control microcomputer 311 has a program ROM 321 consisting of a program executed by the CPU and a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing various data, a RAM 322 for providing a work area, and storage contents even when power is not supplied at the time of power failure. A FeRAM 323 which can be held, and an RTC (real time clock) 338 which is a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (date, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the effect contents, and instructs the display control circuit 312 to display contents, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, and turns on the decoration lamp. Execute processing such as drive control of motor and solenoid, management of presentation time, etc. The display control circuit 312 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340.

A voice ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Also, an interrupt signal INT from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311
Is to be input. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The decoration control command signal (rendering command (rendering command, etc.) is transmitted via the command I / F 331 to the decoration special drawing reservation number command, decoration special drawing command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 Receive as). The gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100
Since the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a function of level conversion of signals.

In the effect control device 300, a panel decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a panel decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), the front frame 12, Frame decoration LED control circuit 33 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, frame decoration device 18 etc.) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15
3, a board effect movable to drive and control a board effect device 44 (for example, a movable combination etc. which enhances the effect effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40) A body control circuit 334 is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling the lamp, the motor, the solenoid and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. A frame rendering movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame rendering device is provided with a frame rendering device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for rendering) on the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15. You may have it.

Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, the effect button switch 25a incorporated in the effect button 25 provided in the glass frame 15, the touch panel 29 provided in the effect button 25, the initial position of the motor in the panel effect device 44, etc. To detect the on / off state of the effect combination product switch 47 (rendering motor switch) to detect the detection signal input to the main control microcomputer 311, the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 And a switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 has the effect control device 300 having the configuration as described above.
And DC 32 V for driving a motor or solenoid, DC 12 V for driving a display device 41 or a motor or LED, command I / F 331 in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC5V which becomes the power supply voltage of this, it is comprised so that the voltage of DC15V for driving a motor, LED, and a speaker may be generated.
Furthermore, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC − for generating 3.3 V DC or 1.2 V DC based on 5 V DC. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. DC-D
The C converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in a reset state. The sound source LSI 314 and the amplifier circuit 337 (for driving the speaker) are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
This signal is supplied to the SNDRESET signal), the display device control circuit 312, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling the lamp, the motor and the like, and resets them. Further, a cooling fan 45 for cooling each part of the game machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling fan 45 is driven in a state where the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the gaming ball (not shown) is
A game is played by hitting a pachinko ball). The shot game balls run down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by turning members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the common view starting gate 34 and the general winning opening 35 , Or start winning prize opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, the first special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning device 39, or flows into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the gaming area 32 to play the game area It is discharged from 32. Then, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, the first special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning device 39, the number according to the type of winning opening that has won The prize balls are discharged from the dispensing unit controlled by the dispensing control device 200 (see FIG. 5) to the upper tray 21 or the lower tray 23 of the glass frame 15.

A gate switch 34a (see FIG. 5) including a non-contact switch or the like for detecting gaming balls having passed through the common view start gate 34 is provided in the common view start gate 34,
When the gaming ball driven into the gaming area 32 passes through the common view starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. CPU 11 of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100
In 1A, if the common drawing start memory number is less than the upper limit number (for example, four) based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a provided in the common drawing start gate 34, the common drawing start memory number The addition (+1) is performed to store one common start memory in the ROM 111B. The number of memories of the common drawing start winning combination is displayed on the common drawing reservation display 75 of the batch display device 50. Further, the common drawing start memory stores a random number value (hit random number) for hit determination for determining the result of the common drawing variation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the gaming ball from the gate switch 34a. It is supposed to be

If the common drawing start memory is present and the common drawing fluctuation display game can be started, that is, the common drawing fluctuation display game is not being executed, and the common drawing fluctuation display game hits and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is converted to the open state. If it is not the hit state, the hit determination random number value stored in the first stored common drawing start memory is compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit deviation of the common drawing fluctuation display game And perform a process of starting a common drawing variation display game. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the common drawing variation display game becomes a hit, and a specific result aspect (common drawing identification result) is derived.

Further, the game control apparatus 100 predetermines a plurality of lighting patterns predetermined for a predetermined fluctuation time in the common drawing indicator 74 provided in the collective display device 50 as processing for executing the common drawing fluctuation display game. After displaying the common map during the repeated display in the above order, a processing for displaying the common map change display game is performed to stop and display the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result.
In addition, the common view display 74 is configured by the display device 41 and, for example, numbers, symbols,
A character symbol or the like may be displayed for variation for a predetermined period of time, and then may be stopped and displayed.

If the result of the popular drawing variation display game is a hit, the lighting pattern which becomes either the first hit stop symbol or the second hit stop symbol which makes a special result aspect in the common symbol display 74 corresponding to the type of the hit The stop display is performed, and the common voltage solenoid 37c is operated to open the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 for a predetermined time. That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). When the result of the common drawing variation display game is a release, control is performed to display a lighting pattern which is a result of the deviation on the common drawing display 74.

In addition, the winning balls to the start winning hole 36 and the winning balls to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a respectively provided inside.
In the CPU 111A of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100, the first start memory for making a start memory (a special figure start memory) based on the winning on the start winning hole 36 is a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4)
) Are stored to the limit, and the second start memory which makes start memory (special figure start memory) based on the prize winning on the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is stored a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four) in the limit. A big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as start memory information based on winning on the starting winning opening 36 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the extracted disturbances are extracted The numerical values are stored in the RAM 111B as the first start storage and the second start storage. The number of start-up memories is displayed on the special view 1 reserve display 54 or the special view 2 reserve display 55 of the collective display 50, and is displayed as a decorative special view start store display at a predetermined location of the center case 40. Be done.

The CPU 111A of the game control device 100 stores the first start memory corresponding to the special view change display game to be started when the first special view change display game or the second special view change display game can be started. A process of determining the hit of the special figure variation display game or the like is performed by comparing the determined big hit determination random number value with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B. Furthermore, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs, to the effect control device 300, a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special view variation display game to be executed.

And, when executing the first special figure fluctuation display game, a plurality of lighting patterns predetermined by the special figure 1 display 51 (the fluctuation display device) are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order over a predetermined fluctuation time. After the special figure 1 is displayed during the change, a process is performed to display a first special figure change display game in which a lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is displayed in a stopped state. In addition, when the second special figure fluctuation display game is executed, a plurality of lighting patterns predetermined by the special figure 2 display 52 (the variable display device) are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order over a predetermined fluctuation time. After the special figure 2 is displayed during the change, a process of displaying a second special figure change display game in which a lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed.

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, a plurality of types of identification information (for example,
A process is performed to display a decorative feature variation display game in which numbers, symbols, etc. are variably displayed. Furthermore, the effect control device 300 performs processing of setting of effect state, output of sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, control of light emission of various LEDs, and the like based on a control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling an effect on a game (a variable display game or the like).

The decoration special figure variation display game in the display device 41 is, for example, a left variation display area (first special symbol), a decoration special symbol (identification information) composed of the numbers etc. described above in the display device 41,
In each of the right variation display area (second special symbol) and the middle variation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is variably displayed (high speed variation) at a speed that makes identification difficult. Then, the symbols changing after a predetermined time are stopped sequentially in the order of the left change display area, the right change display area, and the middle change display area, and stopped in each of the left change display area, the right change display area, and the middle change display area. It is performed by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result mode configured by the displayed identification information. In addition, in the display device 41, various effect displays such as changes in display color and fluctuation mode are performed to improve interest.

And, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays a lighting pattern as a special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52, and Perform processing to generate a gaming state. In addition, the result mode of the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 corresponding to this is also a special result mode.

In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100
A control for enabling the game ball to flow into the lower large winning opening by opening the open / close door 38c of the first special changing winning device 38 by the lower large winning opening solenoid 38b, or a second special changing by the upper large winning opening solenoid 39b Control is performed to open the opening / closing door 39c of the winning device 39 and to allow the game ball to flow into the upper large winning opening. Then, a special winning opening is performed until a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls win in the special winning opening, or a predetermined openable time elapses from opening of the special winning opening. Is a round, and the control (cycle game) is performed to repeat (repeat) this for a predetermined number of rounds. That is, when the stop result mode is the special result mode, the game control apparatus 100 forms a special winning opening / closing control means that performs control to open and close the special winning opening. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is disapproval, the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2
Control is performed on the display 52 to display the result of the deviation.

In addition, when the game ball flows into the probability change operation area 38h of the first special variation winning device 38 in the specific round, the game control apparatus 100 can generate the high probability state as the game state after the end of the special game state. ing. This high probability state is a state in which the probability that a special result is obtained in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that in the normal probability state. In addition, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure even in the high probability state based on the result form of the special figure fluctuation display game of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

In addition, the game control apparatus 100 can generate a time saving state (a specific game state, a common drawing high probability state) as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this short time state, the probability (common drawing probability) to be the hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is set to a high probability (general drawing high probability state) higher than 0 which is the normal probability (general drawing low probability state) Is possible. As a result, control is performed so that the opening time of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 per unit time is larger than that in the case where the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the low probability state.

For example, in the time saving state, the execution time (general drawing fluctuation time) of the above-mentioned common drawing fluctuation display game
Can be controlled to be a second change display time shorter than the first change display time. Also, in the time saving state, the common drawing stop time for displaying the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is the first
It is possible to control to become the 2nd stop time shorter than stop time. Also, in the time saving state, when the regular drawing fluctuation display game is hit and the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is opened, the opening time (the public opening time) is longer than the first opening time of the normal state. It is possible to control to become 2 opening time. Moreover, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 (number of times of general electric power release) is set to 1 for one hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game.
It is possible to set the second opening number of times that is greater than the opening number of times. Also, in the time saving state, the probability (general drawing probability) to be a hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is a high probability (for example) 250/251 higher than the low probability (for example 0/251) in the normal operating state. It is possible to

In the short time state, the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the common drawing fluctuation time, the common drawing stop time, the number of common power release times, the common power release time, and the common drawing probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. Moreover, it is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states which are different from each other. In the present embodiment, the movable member 37b is set so as not to be opened in the normal operation state (a common drawing probability is 0). In the case of a hit, either the first open mode or the second open mode may be selected. In this case, the first
The selection probabilities of the open mode and the second open mode may be made different. Also, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently of each other, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

The special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display, but each special view fluctuation display so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game is displayed. Also, the display device 41 may use separate display devices or separate display areas in the first special view variable display game and the second special view variable display game, or use the same display device or display area. The decoration special feature variation display game is displayed so as not to be executed independently and simultaneously, though it is good. Further, the special view variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41 without providing the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52 in the gaming machine 10. Also,
The first special view variation display game and the second special view variation display game are executed in the order of generation of start storage. Further, in the description of the present embodiment, when the first special view variation display game and the second special view variation display game are not distinguished from one another, they are simply referred to as a special view variation display game.

7 and 8 show the operations of the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 in the special gaming state. 12R positive variation, 5R positive variation, 5R normal, 4 special types of results
There are 5 types of R definite variation and 4R normal, and they are selected based on the jackpot symbol random number. The number of each big hit type indicates the number of rounds, and the positive change indicates that there is a high possibility that the game ball will flow into the positive change operation area 38h and it is likely to be in the high probability state (positive change state) after the special game state ends. Is
It has shown that possibility that a game ball will flow into the definite change operation field 38h is low, and it is hard to be in a high probability state (certain change state) after the end of the special game state. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, whether or not to be in the high probability state is determined depending on whether or not the gaming ball flows into the probability change operation area 38h.
Even if the jackpot type is a definite change, the game ball does not enter the high probability state unless the game ball flows into the definite change operation area 38h, and the game ball flows into the positive change operation area 38h even if the big hit type is normal. It becomes.

FIG. 7 shows the open mode in each round for each jackpot type. The details of the open mode are shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 7 (a), in the 12R probability variation, the first round is
The lower V release to open the special fluctuation winning device 38 is performed. The lower V open is an open mode in which the gaming ball is likely to flow into the probability change operation area 38 h. Then, after the second round, the upper long opening for opening the second special variation winning device 39 and the lower long opening for opening the first special variation winning device 38 are alternately performed. The big hit type is 5R positive variation, 4R positive variation is also the first round in the first round
The lower V release to open the special fluctuation winning device 38 is performed. In addition, in the 5R normal mode and the 4R mode in which the jackpot type is normal, the lower short circuit opening is performed to open the first special variation winning device 38 in the first round. The lower short opening is an opening mode in which the possibility that the gaming ball flows into the probability change operation area 38 h is lower than the lower V opening.

Since the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 are alternately opened in any jackpot type, the passage of a predetermined openable time or a predetermined number of gaming balls must be won When the predetermined interval time has elapsed after the end of the round, the other special fluctuation winning device is released. In addition, it is only the lower V open and the lower short open performed in the first round that gaming balls can be made to flow into the positive change operation area 38 h. Since the upper long opening and the upper short opening open the second special variation winning device 39, there is no possibility that the gaming ball will flow into the probability change operation area 38h. In addition, since the lever member 38i is not operated in the lower long opening or the lower short opening other than the first round, there is no possibility that the gaming ball will flow into the probability changing operation area 38h.
That is, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the specific round which is the round in which the gaming balls may flow into the probability change operation area 38h forming the specific area is the first round. Of course, this particular round may be a round other than the first round.

As shown in FIG. 8 (a), in the upper long opening, the second special variation winning device 39 is opened with the start of the round (t11), or a predetermined number (for example, 9 pieces) of 25,000 ms of available opening time elapses. When one of the conditions for winning of the game ball is satisfied, the second special variation winning device 39 is closed to complete the round (t12). Thereafter, the interval time and upper large winning opening remaining ball processing time is started (t12), and when the interval time is over, the next round is started (t13). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set along with the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

As shown in FIG. 7, in the special game state, since the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 are alternately opened, the first special variation game first occurs as the interval time elapses.
Although the special variation winning device 38 is opened, the second special variation winning device 39 continues the upper prize winning opening remaining ball processing time. The lower short circuit shown in FIG. 8 (b) is the same as the upper long ball except that the openable time and the interval time are different.

As shown in FIG. 8C, in the lower V opening, the first special variation winning device 3 along with the start of the round.
8 is released (t31). Furthermore, with the start of the round, the lever solenoid 38f is turned on
While making it a state, the positive change operation area switch 38d is made effective. Lever solenoid 38
When f is off, the lever member 38i covers the probability changing operation area 38h and the gaming ball can not flow in. When the lever solenoid 38f is turned on, the lever member 38i retracts from the probability changing operation area 38h to play the game ball Is ready to flow. Further, the state in which the probability changing operation area switch 38d is effective is a state in which the detection of the gaming ball by the probability changing operation area switch 38d is treated as being effective. On the other hand, the state in which the probability change operation area switch 38d is invalid is a state in which the detection of the gaming ball by the probability change operation area switch 38d is treated as invalid.

The lever solenoid 38f is turned off after 64 ms have elapsed from the start of the round (t32). Then, when 100 ms elapses after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off, the probability change operation area switch 38d becomes invalid (t33). That is, there is a possibility that the game ball won immediately after the first special variation winning device 38 opens may flow into the probability variation operation area 38h.

The first special fluctuation winning device 38 is closed 200 ms after the start of the round (t
34). Then, when 2700 ms elapses, the first special fluctuation winning device 38 is released again (t
35) The first special variation winning device 38 is closed and the round is ended (the condition that either a 25000 ms openable time elapses or a predetermined number (for example, nine) game balls wins) is satisfied. t39). Thereafter, the interval time and the lower large winning opening remaining ball processing time are started (t39), and when the interval time ends, the next round is started (t41).

Also, after the second opening (t35) of the first special variation winning device 38, the lever solenoid 3
8f is also turned on for a predetermined time (t36 to t37, t38 to t39). In addition, the probability change operation area switch 38d is also effective (t36). 2 of this first special variation winning device 38
The opening is the opening for a sufficiently long time, and the ON state of the lever solenoid 38f also continues for a long time, so the gaming ball will almost certainly flow into the positive change operation area 38h.
Therefore, when the jackpot type is positive, the probability state is almost certainly high.

Also, the lever solenoid 38f can be turned on for a predetermined time after the first special fluctuation winning device 38 is closed (t40 to t43), and flows into the first special fluctuation winning device 38 just before closing. The game ball can also flow into the probability change operation area 38h. It should be noted that the first special variation winning device 38 is closed by the lapse of the openable time or when a predetermined number of gaming balls wins, and the gaming ball that has won the first special variation winning device 38 is a lower prize winning opening residual ball processing When all the balls are discharged, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off with the end of the remaining ball processing time (t42) to end the operation, and the positive change operation area switch 38d is invalidated.

In addition, the first special variation winning device 38 is closed by the lapse of the openable time or when the predetermined number of gaming balls wins, and all the gaming balls that have won the first special variation winning device 38 are discharged within the remaining ball processing time If the lever solenoid 38f is completely discharged by the end (t43) of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state, the lever solenoid 38f is completed at the completion of the discharge.
Turns to the OFF state and ends the operation, and the positive change operation area switch 38d becomes invalid.

In addition, the first special variation winning device 38 is closed by the lapse of the openable time or a predetermined number of gaming balls are winning, and the gaming ball that has won the first special variation winning device 38 is the lower winning prize opening ball processing time In the case where all of the lever solenoid 38f is not discharged by the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t43), the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t43) When the lever solenoid 38f is turned off, the operation is ended. In this case, when 100 ms elapses after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off (t43), the positive change operation area switch 38d becomes invalid (t44).
.

As shown in FIG. 8 (d), in the lower short opening, the same opening as the first opening of the first special variation winning device 38 in the lower V opening is performed (t51 to t54), and based on the opening being ended. End the round (t54). The first special variation winning device 38 is opened for a very short time, and the ON state of the lever solenoid 38f is also for a short time,
There is a low possibility that the gaming ball will flow into the probability variation operation area 38h. Therefore, when the jackpot type is normal, the probability state is high.

The operation of the lever solenoid 38f and the switching between valid and invalid of the probability variation operation area switch 38d perform the same operation as in the case of the lower V open as long as the gaming ball remains in the first special variation winning device 38 ( t56 to t63). Therefore, when the game ball remains in the first special variation winning device 38 even if the lower large winning opening residual ball processing time has elapsed, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off when the discharge of the remaining ball is completed. And end the operation, and the positive change operation area switch 38d is invalidated. In addition, when all the game balls are not discharged by the end (t62) of the period when the lever solenoid 38f is turned ON, the lever solenoid 3
When the period 8f turns on (t62), the lever solenoid 38f turns off and the operation is ended, and the lever solenoid 38f turns off (t62)
When 100 ms elapses, the positive change operation area switch 38d becomes invalid (t63).

However, the lever solenoid 38f or the positive change operation area switch 38 at the lower short open state
Control of d as shown in FIG. 8D is performed only when the lower short is released in the first round. If the lower short is open in any other round, the lever solenoid 3
8f is not operated, and the positive change operation area switch 38d also remains invalid. In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set along with the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

As shown in FIG. 8 (e), in the lower long opening, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened with the start of the round (t61), or a predetermined number (for example, 9 pieces) of 25,000 ms of the openable time elapses. When one of the conditions for winning of the game ball is satisfied, the first special variation winning device 38 is closed to complete the round (t62). Thereafter, the interval time and the lower large winning opening remaining ball processing time are started (t62), and when the interval time ends, the next round is started (t63). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set along with the end of the round, and then the ending time is set. In the lower long open state, the lever solenoid 38f is kept in the OFF state, and the positive change operation area switch 38d is also kept invalid.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine which performs such a game will be described. First, control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 14 which is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be described. The main process is started by turning on the power. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, first, the process of prohibiting the interrupt (step S1) is performed, and then the start address of the area to save the value of the register etc when the interrupt occurs. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed.
Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of this embodiment, the range of the address of the RAM is 0000h to 01FFh, and the upper order is 00h or 01
In step S4, the head 00h is set.
Next, a signal for stopping the emission is output to set the emission permission signal to the prohibited state (step S5).
. The release permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop the release, and the release of the game ball is prohibited.

Thereafter, the state of input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6),
A process of setting a power on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, the program of the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) which performs various controls in accordance with the instruction from the game control device 100 forming the main control means by setting a predetermined initial value. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) to wait for normal activation is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 temporarily rises first, and sends a command to the slave control apparatus before the slave control apparatus (for example, the payout control apparatus 200 or the presentation control apparatus 300) starts up. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control apparatus 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control apparatus (the payout control apparatus 200, the effect control apparatus 300, etc.) It constitutes a standby means for setting a standby time.

Further, the power-on delay timer counts time by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register other than the validity determination target) which is not a target of the validity determination (check sum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when the check data such as the checksum of the RAM area is calculated, it is not necessary to exclude and calculate a part of the RAM area, and it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

The initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and
By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the waiting time, the initialization switch 11 is started.
2 operation can be detected reliably. That is, when the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power on to the elapse of the standby time. You need to keep doing that. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it becomes possible to detect by performing the operation immediately after the power is turned on without performing such troublesome operations, and the initialization operation performed at the time of the power on It can prevent the situation that can not be accepted.

After the process of setting the power on delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the waiting time and monitoring the occurrence of the power failure during the waiting time (steps S8 to S12) are performed.
First, set the number of times (for example, 2 times) to read the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 through the port and data bus and check (step S8), and determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (step S9).

If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). Then, when the on state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks (step S10;
N) returns to the determination (step S9) whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. If the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process waits for the power of the gaming machine to be shut off. in this way,
By determining that a power failure has occurred when reception of a power failure monitoring signal continues for a predetermined period, false detection of a power failure due to noise or the like can be prevented, and problems at the time of power on can be appropriately addressed. .

That is, the game control device 100 functions as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to cope with a power failure that has occurred during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that forms the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a problem at the time of power on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the previous power-off are kept, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the waiting time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, if a power failure does not occur, the power on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11). Is determined (step S12).
If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8).
If the value of the timer is 0 (step S12; Y), that is, if the waiting time is over, the access permission of read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step S13). And outputs the off data to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port provided in advance in the gaming microcomputer 111 and used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15) and read first. From the state of the first input port 122, it is determined whether the initialization switch is turned on (step S16).

If the initialization switch is off (step S16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5 Ah) (step S17). (Step S17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection region 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection region check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S)
18). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), a checksum calculation process is performed to calculate a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM (step S19).
It is determined whether the calculated checksum and the checksum at power-off match (step S2)
0).
If the checksums match (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S21 of FIG. 10 to perform processing in the case of normal recovery from a power failure. That is, when the supply of power to the gaming machine is started, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes validity determination means for determining the validity of predetermined data stored in the storage means (RAM 111C).

If it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S16; Y), or if it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; N)
Alternatively, if it is determined that the checksum is not normal (does not match) (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S26 of FIG. 10 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch is an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. I

In step S21 of FIG. 10, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (
Step S21). The area to be initialized here is an area relating to a power failure inspection area, a checksum area and an error fraud monitoring. Note that the busy signal status area storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can receive a command, is also cleared to indicate that the state of the payout busy signal is not determined. It is in an undetermined state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the touch switch signal state is set to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal is not determined.
Thereafter, the area storing the gaming state in the RWM is checked to determine whether the probability state of the special view fluctuation display game is the high probability state (step S22). Here, when it is not in the high probability of the special view (step S22; N), the steps S23 and S24 are skipped and the step S25 is performed.
Transition to If the special drawing is in high probability (step S22; Y), the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), and the high probability notification LED (error indicator, provided on the game board 30) The on (lighting) data of the third gaming state display section 78) is saved in the segment area (step S24).
And the command at the time of the power failure restoration corresponding to the processing number prepared in order to rationally execute the below-mentioned special figure game processing is transmitted to the production control board (presentation control device 300) (step S25) Go to In the case of the present embodiment, in step S25, a model designation command, a special figure 1 pending number command, a special figure 2 pending number command, a probability information command, a screen designated command If it is a command of recovery screen)
Send multiple commands, etc. That is, when the legitimacy determination means confirms the legitimacy, the game is resumed based on the data stored in the storage means.

On the other hand, when jumping from step S16, S17, S18, S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibited area is set to access permission (step S26), and all areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S27), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step S28).
Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S29)
. Here, the area to be initialized is an area related to setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the effect mode.
Then, a command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S30,
Model specification command, Special figure 1 pending number command, Special figure 2 pending number command, Probability information command,
A plurality of commands such as a RAM initialization command (a command for displaying a customer waiting demo screen and notifying of the RAM initialization with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)) are transmitted.

In step S31, a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator)
Perform the process of activating the circuit. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating the random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process of step S31, the random number generation circuit is activated and set (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111 sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit to a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit.
Performed by A. Further, setting of bit transposition pattern of hard random numbers (here, big hit random numbers) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also performed. The bit transposition pattern is a method to replace the bit arrangement of the extracted random number (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and store it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after the bit transposition in the lower row) Is a pattern that determines By replacing the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the secrecy of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Also, it may be set arbitrarily by the user.

Thereafter, predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power on
Of the various initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, random numbers that determine the hit symbol of the special figure (big hit symbol random numbers), random numbers that determine the hit of the common figure, hit random number) After saving in a predetermined area of RWM as an initial value (start value) of a random number (per symbol random number) for determining a per symbol (step S33), an interrupt is permitted (step S34). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment is configured to change the initial value of the soft random number register every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing this, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software, and to make it difficult for the player to obtain an incorrect random number.

Subsequently, an initial value random number updating process (step S35) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers and break the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are configured to be generated using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. There is. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" updated based on a clock at a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, the big hit symbol random number, hit random number, hit symbol random number is a program processing unit timer interrupt CTC output that has the same cycle as processing (CT different from CTC (CTC0 of timer interrupt processing)
It is a "slow counter" updated based on C (CTC 2)). In addition, in the big hit design random number, in per random number, in per design random number, adopting the so-called “initial value change method” which changes the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) every round of random number There is. Each of the random numbers may be a counter type update by +1 or -1, or may be a random type update in which all the values within the range appear apart without overlapping until one round. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number is a random number updated by the hardware and software.

The number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus after the initial value random number update process of step S35.
Are set (step S36), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S3).
7).
If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process (step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the check (loop processing) of the power failure monitoring signal are repeated. By permitting the interrupt (step S34) before the initial value random number update process (step S35), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is performed. By waiting for the initial value random number updating process, it is possible to avoid the pressure on the interrupt process.

In addition to the main processing, there is also a method of performing initial value random number update processing in the timer interrupt processing in addition to the main processing, and the initial value random number update processing in step S35 described above In order to prevent the value random number update process from being performed, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit the interrupt and then update and cancel the interrupt. There is no problem in releasing the interrupt before the initial value random number update process if the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed and is performed only in the main process.
This has the advantage that the main processing is simplified.

If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38).
.
And when the on state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step S3)
8: N) returns to the determination (step S37) whether the power failure monitoring signal is on.
Further, when the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step S38;
Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, a process of temporarily prohibiting an interrupt (step S39) and a process of outputting off data to all output ports (step S40) are performed.

Thereafter, the blackout inspection area check data 1 is saved in the blackout inspection area 1 (step S41).
), The blackout inspection area check data 2 is saved in the blackout inspection area 2 (step S42).
Furthermore, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating a checksum at the time of power interruption of the RWM, and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step S44), the RW
After performing the process of prohibiting access to M (step S45), the process waits for the power of the gaming machine to be shut off. As described above, by saving check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating a checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is determined whether or not the information stored in the RWM is correctly backed up before the power shutdown. It can be judged at the time of reinjection.

From the above, main control means (game control apparatus 100) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and slave control means (disbursement control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. Standby control means for setting a predetermined standby time for waiting for activation of the slave control device by delaying activation of the main control device when the power is turned on. And 100) and the blackout monitoring means (game control apparatus 100) for monitoring the occurrence of blackout in the predetermined standby time.

Further, the power supply device 400 for supplying power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that the power failure has occurred.

In addition, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) is a RAM 111C capable of storing data,
An initialization operation unit (an initialization switch) that can be operated from the outside, and an initialization unit (game control device 100) that initializes data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. And the operation state of the initialization operation unit is read before the start of the waiting time.

Also, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

FIG. 11 shows the type of model specification command which is one of the commands transmitted in step S25 and step S30. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the probability of becoming a big hit,
There are four types of model types A to D as multiple types of model types having different control contents such as the number of times of execution of the special view variation display game in which time saving state is achieved, big hit type and distribution, and distribution of effects.
Furthermore, each model type includes a plurality of types of models having different model names. For example, model type A includes three types of model names A-1, A-2, and A-3.

The game control apparatus 100 is set to any one of a plurality of types of model types, and is also set to any one of a plurality of types of model names included in the model type. . The model designation command is a command different depending on the model type and model name, and when the power is turned on, the model designation command according to the model type and model name set in the game control device 100 is transmitted to the effect control device 300 .

Based on the received model designation command, the effect control device 300 can grasp the model type and model name set in the game control device 100. Then, a default symbol corresponding to the received model specification command is displayed on the display device 41. Thus, the model type and model name of the model can be confirmed by checking the display on the display device 41 when the power is turned on.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the command is composed of MODE and ACTION, and in the model designation command, MODE is a value indicating that it is a model designation command (here, 05H), and ACTION corresponds to the model type and model name. Value. For example, if the model type is A and the model name is A-1, MODE is 05H as a model specification command.
, A model specification command with an ACTION of 61H is sent. And effect control device 300
Then, based on receiving a model designation command of MODE 05H and ACTION 61H, the controller recognizes that model name A is model name A-1 and displays 131 as a default symbol on the display device 41.

In the default symbol, the upper two digits correspond to the model type and the lower one digit corresponds to the model name, so the model type and model name can be easily confirmed. Of course, the default symbol is not limited to that shown in FIG. 11 and can be set arbitrarily. However,
It is also possible not to use a symbol (for example, 767) which is a combination of reach and a symbol (for example, 777) which is a combination of big hit. In addition, the default symbol may be a symbol combination that can appear in the decorative special symbol variation display game, or may be a symbol combination that does not appear in the decorative special symbol variation display game. In addition, each symbol included in the default symbol may be a symbol other than the identification information of the decorative pattern variation display game, in part or in whole. Also,
The default symbol is a symbol corresponding to a model type and a model name, but may be a symbol corresponding to only one of the model type and the model name.

In addition, after a default symbol corresponding to a model type and a model name is displayed for a certain period of time, a second default symbol may be displayed. The second default symbol may be of any kind, but for example, it may be a common symbol regardless of the model type and model name, and may be the same in appearance even in the same model but different model types . Also, the second default symbol may be a symbol common to other models. Further, the second default symbol may be set in the game arcade.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 12 shows checksum calculation processing in the above-described main processing (steps S19 and S4).
3) is shown. In this checksum calculation process, first, RW is used as the start value of the calculated address.
The start address of M is set (step S51), and the number of repetitions is set (step S52).
Then, "0" is set as the calculated value (step S53). RA used for repeat count
The number of bytes of M is set.

Thereafter, a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is taken as a new calculated value (step S5).
4) Update the calculated address by +1 (step S55), update the number of repetitions by -1 (step S56), and determine whether the calculation of the checksum has been completed (step S57). If the calculation is not completed (step S57; N), the process returns to step S54 and the above process is repeated. When the calculation is completed (step S57; Y), the checksum calculation process is ended.

Initial Value Random Number Update Process
FIG. 13 shows the initial value random number updating process (step S35) in the main process described above. In this initial value random number updating process, the jackpot symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S61)
, Initial value random number is updated by 1 (step S62), initial symbol initial value random number is updated by 1 (step S63), and the initial value random number update process is ended.
Here, "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure variation display game, and "hit initial value random number" is a random number that determines the hit of the common figure variation display game A random number that is an initial value of "per-pattern initial value random number" is a random number that is an initial value of a random number that determines a stop symbol of the common-pattern variation display game. Thus, the randomness of the random number can be enhanced by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time allows in the main processing.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 14 is started.

When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step S1).
01). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main process) to the RWM.
Next, the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S102). In step S102, step S in the main processing is performed.
The same processing as in 4 is performed, but the register bank is different.
Next, input from various sensors and switches, and taking in of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S103) is performed.

Next, based on the output data set in the various processes, the solenoid (lower large winning opening solenoid 38b, upper large winning opening solenoid 39b, common electric solenoid 37c, lever solenoid 38
f) An output process (step S104) for performing drive control of the actuator such as is performed. Note that when a signal for stopping the emission is output in step S5 in the main processing, the output processing causes the emission permission signal to be output, and the emission permission signal can be set to the permission state. The launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing is performed. Further, the release permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of release permission seen from the game control device, and a second signal (release permission signal) indicating the state of release permission viewed from the payout control device is also the payout control. It is generated in the device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the gaming ball is configured to be in a state where it can be launched.

Next, a payout command transmission process (step S105) for outputting a command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, a random number update process 1 (step S106),
The random number updating process 2 (step S107) is performed.
Next, the start opening 1 switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a, and the gate switch 34 of the common view
a, Whether the winning opening switch 35a, the lower large winning opening switch 38a, the upper large winning opening switch 39a whether there is an input of a normal signal or monitoring an error (whether the front frame or the glass frame is opened Etc.) is performed (step S108).

Next, it is determined whether an abnormal discharge error is occurring (step S109). The abnormal discharge error is to detect the discharge from the upper flow passage 38j despite the fact that the game balls existing in the upper flow passage 38j are 0, or the gaming balls existing in the lower flow passage 38k are 0 Nevertheless, it is to detect the discharge from the lower flow path 38k (see FIG. 81). When the abnormal discharge error is occurring, the abnormal discharge error flag is set.

If an abnormal discharge error is occurring (step S109; Y), the process proceeds to step S113. That is, the game is prevented from proceeding.
In addition, when the abnormal discharge error is not occurring (step S109; N), the special figure game process which performs the process regarding the special figure fluctuation display game (step S110), the common drawing game process which performs the process regarding the common drawing fluctuation display game (step S111) A segment LED editing process (step S112) is provided which is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying a special view variation display game and various information related to the game to display desired contents.

Next, an abnormal discharge monitoring process (step S113), a magnet fraud monitoring process (step S114) that checks a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 to determine whether there is an abnormality, a detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 A board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S115) is performed to check whether there is an abnormality or not. Then, an external information editing process (step S116) is performed to set a signal to be output to various external devices in the output buffer, and the timer interrupt process is ended.
Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the specification of the register bank (that is, the process of specifying the register bank 0) Automatically at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Note that, depending on the CPU to be used, there are gaming machines that need to be instructed to execute a process of restoring an interrupt disabled state and a process of restoring a register bank specification.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (step S103) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 15, in input processing, first, input port 1, that is,
Reads the state of the detection signal of the switch taken into the first input port 122 (step S
121). Then, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 1), the state of that bit is cleared (step S122).

Subsequently, the read input port 1 state is saved in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (
Then, the address of the input port 2, ie, the address of the second input port 123 is prepared (step S124), and the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step S125). Thereafter, if there is an unused bit of the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data is prepared (step S126), and if there is an inverted bit of the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data Prepare (step S12)
7) Perform switch read processing (step S128). Here, "prepare" in the present embodiment means setting a value in a register, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a value may be set in an RWM or another memory.

Next, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step S129), and the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step S130).
). Thereafter, if there is an unused bit of the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data is prepared (step S131), and if there is an inverted bit of the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data Are prepared (step S132), the switch reading process (step S133) is performed, and the input process is ended.

Unused bit data and inverted bit data are prepared for each input port.
Therefore, the unused bit data of the input port 2 prepared in step S126 and the unused bit data of the input port 3 prepared in step S131 may be different data but may be data of the same value as a result. is there.
Although the bit data to be inverted of the input port 2 prepared in step S127 and the bit data to be inverted of the input port 3 prepared in step S132 are different data,
As a result, it may be data of the same value.

[Switch reading process]
Next, switch reading processing in the above-mentioned input processing (steps S128 and S133)
Explain the details of. As shown in FIG. 16, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step S141). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step S142), and the bit necessary for inversion is inverted (step S143), and the port input state of the target switch control area is saved (Store) (Step S144). After that, it waits for the delay time (for example, about 100 microseconds) until the second reading to elapse (step S145).
).

When the delay time has elapsed, the second reading of the state of the signal taken into the target input port is performed (step S146). Then, if there is an unused bit of the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step S 147), and a bit necessary for inversion is inverted (
Step S148) The port input state (first data) of the target switch control area is loaded, and the inverted data (second data) is saved (stored) in the port input state (step S149).
After that, a definite bit pattern in which the bit in the same state is 1 and the bit different is 0 in the first and second readings is created (step S150), the logical bit of the bit pattern and the port input state is taken, Let it be a bit (step S151).

Next, an indeterminate bit pattern is created in which the state is 0 for the same state and 1 for different bits in the first and second reading (step S152), and the logic between the indeterminate bit pattern and the determined state at the previous interrupt The product is taken and it is set as the previously held bit (step S153). As a result, it is possible to obtain the state of a signal from which noise due to chattering of a switch or the like has been removed.
Then, the currently determined bit and the previously held bit are combined and saved as the currently decided state (step S154), exclusive OR is performed between the previous and currently decided states, and saved as the rising edge (step S155). , Finish the switch reading process.

Note that when the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch is read.
There is a way to determine whether the signal has changed by reading the switch once for each interrupt processing and comparing it with the result of the previous read, but if you do so, it will take you until the next interrupt processing If the state of the switch read in the previous interrupt is lost, there is a risk that the correct determination can not be made. On the other hand, by performing the switch reading process twice in one interruption process with a predetermined time difference as in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned problems.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (step S104) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 17, in the output process, first, off data is output (reset) to the output port 135 which outputs data of the segment of the batch display device (LED) 50 (step S161). Next, lower large winning opening solenoid 38b, upper large winning opening solenoid 39b,
The data to be output to the output port 134 for outputting data of the common power solenoid 37c and the lever solenoid 38f are synthesized and output (step S162).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display unit (LED) 50 is updated (step S163), and the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is updated.
The output data of the digit line is acquired (step S164). In the case of this embodiment, the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 3. Next, the acquired data and external information data are combined (step S165), and the combined data (for example, data of "door / frame open" data of "security signal") are output ports for digit / external information output 136
(Step S166).

Thereafter, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S167), and the loaded data is output to the output port 135 for segment output (step S168). As a result, the plurality of light emitting display portions provided in the collective display device 50 are controlled by dynamic control.

Subsequently, various output data of external information are synthesized (step S169), and the synthesized data (
For example, data of "big hit signal 1", data of "big hit signal 2", data of "big hit signal 3", data of "big hit signal 4", data of "design fixed number of times signal", data of "starting opening signal" , "Main prize ball signal" data) and the output data of the firing permission are synthesized (step S1).
70) The synthesized data is output to the output port 137 for outputting the external information / emission permission signal (step S171).
Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test injection test device is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S172). Thereafter, the data output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay substrate 70 which outputs the test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S173).

Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test injection test device is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S174). Furthermore, the data output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S175). Then, the data output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S176), the output process ends.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step S105) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 18, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control apparatus 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided.
The prize number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out the prize balls, and the prize for which the payout command has not been transmitted yet The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 forms a winning ball command counter capable of storing information on the winning ball command.

The winning number counter area 2 is for transmitting a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of prize balls (the expected number of payouts) generated by the winning on the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here 10) In the area to be used, data of winning corresponding to the winning balls not subjected to the generation processing of the main winning ball signal is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 forms a main winning ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main winning ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, a payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control device 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). By matching these two signals,
It is possible to monitor fraudulent payments.

In these winning number counter areas, the winning number counter area is set according to the number of winning balls set for each winning opening (three winning balls, 10 winning balls, 14 winning balls in the case of this embodiment). The counter number of the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by one based on the winning on the winning opening. That is, the information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. The winning number counter area 1 is assigned a wider area than the winning number counter area 2 so that more winning data can be stored. This is because the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the transmission destination, while transmission may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 to which the payout command is the transmission destination. This is because data may be accumulated.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, three winning ball counter areas of the winning number counter area 1, 10,
In the individual prize ball counter area and the 14 prize ball counter area, up to 65535 winnings can be stored, respectively, the 3 prize ball counter area of the prize number counter area 2, the 10 prize ball counter area, and 14 prizes In the ball counter area, up to 255 winnings can be stored.

In the process of checking whether there is a count in winning number counter area 2 (step S181), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each winning ball number, “0” in the winning number counter area to be checked. Determine if there is a non-count number.
Then, when there is no count number (step S181; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is judged whether the checking of the counting numbers of all winning number counter areas is completed. It determines (step S183). In this judgment,
If it is determined that all checks have been completed (step S183; Y), step S192 is performed.
Migrate to On the other hand, when it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S183; N), the process returns to step S181 and the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area → 10 prize ball counter area → 14 prize ball counter area.

If it is determined in step S181 that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S184).
, And the number of payouts corresponding to the address of the target number-of-games counter area 2 is obtained (step S18).
5). Then, the value of the winning balls remaining number area and the acquired number of payouts are added (step S186), and the addition result is saved in the remaining winning balls area (step S187). In addition, as the value of the remaining number area of winning balls before this processing, a fraction which does not meet a predetermined number serving as a reference of the output of the main winning ball signal is stored.

Thereafter, 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S188), and it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S189). If it is not 0 or more (step S189; N), step S is performed.
Move to processing of 192. If the number is 0 or more (step S189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (step S190). That is, whenever the number of remaining winning balls is ten, the number of outputs of the main winning ball signal is updated by +1.
Then, the result of subtraction is saved in the remaining number area of winning balls (step S191), step S18.
It returns to the process of 8. As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control apparatus 100 forms an external information output unit that outputs a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out with the winning of the game ball in the predetermined pay area. . In addition, when the payout of the game ball such as during a big hit is concentrated by outputting the main prize ball signal, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game ball, and the accurate occurrence occurred during the big hit It is possible to prevent such a problem that the number of winning balls can not be counted.
Here, the process of steps S181 to S191 is a process of updating (increasing) the number of outputs of the main winning ball signal, and the process of steps S192 to S201 is a process of transmitting a payout command.

In step S192, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become "0" (step S1).
93). If the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S193; N), the payout command transmission process is ended. If the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S193; Y), the payout busy signal flag is checked to determine whether the payout busy signal is in the busy state (step S194).

The payout busy signal indicates whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control, and the payout busy signal is in the on state (busy state) when the payout control can not be immediately started. Be done. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal makes a state signal indicating whether the payout control means (the payout control device 200) can start the payout control.

If the payout busy signal is in the busy state (step S194; Y), the payout command transmission process is ended. That is, in the present embodiment, the payout command is not transmitted for each timer interrupt, but a predetermined time elapses (the value of the payout command transmission timer becomes 0), and the payout control device 200 can pay the prize ball. When in the state, it is configured to transmit a payout command. As described above, when the payout control device 200 can not immediately start the payout control and does not transmit the payout command, it is possible to perform the useless processing by preventing the subsequent processing regarding the transmission of the payout command. We try to prevent and reduce the burden of control.

The conditions for the payout busy signal to be in the on state (busy status) are, for example, during the payout operation, the ball lending operation, the shoot ball out error, the overflow error, the frame radio wave illegal occurrence, the payout ball detection switch The number of prize balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control device 200 during an abnormality of a switch for monitoring a shot ball, a shortage of payout error, a payout excess error, and the number of unpaid balls Etc) (when it is not = 0) etc.

If the payout busy signal is not in the busy state (step S194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195). Winning counter area 1
In the process of checking whether there is a count in (step S195), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each winning ball number, there is a counted number that is not "0" in the winning number counter area to be checked. Determine if

Then, when there is no count number (step S195; N), the address of winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S196), and it is judged whether the checking of the counting numbers of all winning number counter areas is completed. It determines (step S197). In this judgment,
If it is determined that all the checks have been completed (step S 197; Y), the payout command transmission process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S197; N), the process returns to step S195 and the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area → 10 prize ball counter area → 14 prize ball counter area.

If it is determined in step S195 that there is a count number (step S195; Y), the count number of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S198).
Then, the payout amount command corresponding to the address of the target winning number counter area 1 is acquired (step S199). Then, the acquired payout amount command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S201), and the payout command transmission process is ended. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and 200 ms is set as an initial value, for example.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one winning in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls the payout of a predetermined number of winning balls based on the payout command. That is, the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control output from the payout control means (the payout control device 200) indicates that the game control device 100 can start the payout control. In this case, the winning ball command transmitting means transmits the winning ball command to the payout control means.

As described above, since the game control apparatus 100 controls the game ball command to be transmitted based on the state signal output from the payout control apparatus 200, the award is made only when the payout control apparatus 200 can immediately execute the payout control. The ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winnings that have not been paid out will be held on the game control device 100 side, so when a power failure occurs, it will be backed up by the game control device 100 and backed up to the payout control device 200. Accurate dispensing control can be realized without providing the function for

In a conventional gaming machine (e.g., the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when the power is shut off due to some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its own storage means, and immediately before the power is shut off. The payout control state based on the data of is maintained. However, conventional gaming machines require functions for backup, so
There was a problem that it led to the cost increase. According to the present invention, accurate dispensing control can be realized without providing the dispensing control device 200 with a function for backup.

Also, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to an external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay, and the external device such as a hall computer can pay out the prize balls. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be grasped accurately. Further, since the prize ball instruction counter capable of storing information on the prize ball instruction and the main prize ball signal counter capable of storing the information on the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball instruction and the main prize ball having different transmission timings Information on signals can be managed separately, and information can be managed reliably.

From the above, the game control is generally performed, and the winning area (start winning hole 36, normal fluctuation winning device 37, general winning hole 35, first special fluctuation winning device 3 provided in the game area 32
8. Based on the winning ball command to the second special variation winning device 39) game control means (game control device 100) to transmit a winning ball command based on the winning ball command transmitted from the game control means, A payout control means (payout control device 200) for performing payout control of gaming balls, wherein the game control means indicates whether or not the payout control means outputted from the payout control means can start payout control. Control to transmit the winning ball command to the payout control means based on the signal (busy signal), and a state indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control means when a power failure occurs and returns from the power failure Even if a signal is output, the ball is not immediately sent to the payout control means,
The prize ball command is sent to the payout control means in response to the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is continuously output from the payout control means over the predetermined period. .

In addition, the game area 32 is a winning area different in the number of winning balls (start winning hole 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 3
7. A plurality of general winning openings 35, a first special variation winning device 38, a second special variation winning device 39) are provided, and the game control means (game control device 100) controls the payout control of the game balls for each number of winning balls. It has a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) which can specify presence or absence of non-transmission of the prize ball command to instruct,
When the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started and there is an unsent winning ball command in each winning ball command counter, the winning ball command is transmitted to the payout control means (the payout control device 200) The status signal indicates whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control prior to the identification of whether or not there is any unsent winning ball command in each winning ball command counter. It will be.

In addition, while overall game control is performed, predetermined winning area (start winning hole 36, normal fluctuation winning device 37, general winning hole 35, first special fluctuation winning device 38, second special fluctuation winning device 39
Game control means (game control apparatus 100) for transmitting a winning ball command based on the winning of the game ball)
And payout control means (payout control device 200) for performing payout control of the game ball based on the winning ball command transmitted from the game control means, and the game control means is outputted from the payout control means Prize ball command transmission means (game control for transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means when the status signal indicating whether the payout control means can start the payout control indicates that the payout control can be started External information output means for outputting to the outside of the gaming machine a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal) including information regarding the number of prize balls determined to be paid out according to the device 100) and the winning of the gaming ball to a predetermined prize area The external information output means outputs the winning ball signal regardless of whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control. I tried to do To become.

In addition, even if the prize ball command transmission means (game control apparatus 100) generates a power failure and returns from the power failure, the prize ball command is immediately issued even if the status signal indicates that payout control can be started. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (the payout control device 200), and the winning ball command is issued in response to the state in which the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started continues for a predetermined period. It will be transmitted to the payout control means.

In addition, the game control means (game control apparatus 100) can store information on the award ball signal counter (game control apparatus 100) capable of storing information on the award ball command and the information on the award ball signal (main award ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control apparatus 100) is provided, and the prize ball command transmission means (game control apparatus 100) is provided with a predetermined winning area (start winning hole 36, normal fluctuation winning device 37, general winning hole 35, first). A winning ball command is generated on the basis of one winning to the special fluctuation winning device 38, the second special fluctuation winning device 39), and the winning ball command is generated, and the winning ball command indicates that the payout control can be started. The command is configured to be transmitted to the payout control means (the payout control device 200), and the winning ball command counter (the game control device 100) can store the information of the winning in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area. And While updating the game ball at the fixed winning area at the time of winning, and updating it in response to transmission to the winning ball command to the payout control means, the number of winning ball commands not transmitted can be stored. The external information output means accumulates the number of winning balls determined to be paid out according to the winning of the gaming ball in the predetermined winning area, and outputs the winning ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine every time the cumulative value reaches the predetermined number. The prize ball signal counter is capable of storing information on the prize in units of one prize in the predetermined prize area, and is updated when the gaming ball is prized in the predetermined prize area, By performing updating in accordance with the cumulative processing of the number of winning balls by the external information output means, it is possible to store the number of winning balls that have not been subjected to the cumulative processing.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 19 shows the random number update process 1 (step S106) in the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number which are targets of the initial value random number update processing. In the random number updating process 1, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S211).

If the jackpot symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; N), it is determined whether or not the random number for the general drawing is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S214).
If the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; Y), the jackpot symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S212), and the next initial value of the jackpot symbol random number loaded corresponds The start value of the random number counter (random number area) to be set is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value (step S213). After that, it is determined whether or not the random number per block is waiting for setting the next initial value (start value) (step S214)
.

If the hit random number in the drawing is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; N), it is determined whether the hitting symbol random number in the drawing is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217)
).
If the random number per block is waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; Y), the initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S215), and the next initial stage of the random number per block is loaded A value is set in a register (start value setting register) for holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S216). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the hit symbol random number in the common drawing is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217).

If the hit symbol random number in the common drawing is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; N), the random number updating process 1 is ended.
Also, if the hit symbol random number in the common drawing is waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; Y),
Register to hold the start value of the random number counter (random number area) corresponding to the next initial value of the loaded symbol random number loaded as a next initial value (step S218) It sets to a register | resistor) (step S219), and complete | finishes random number update process 1. FIG.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 20 shows the random number update process 2 (step S107) in the timer interrupt process. The random number updating process 2 is a process of updating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, there are 1 byte random number (variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2 byte random number (variation pattern random number 1) as fluctuation pattern random numbers, and both random update processing 2 Each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. Furthermore, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed at different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, 2 by random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process
The update of the byte fluctuation pattern random number 1 (reach fluctuation mode determination random number) is configured to be performed for either the upper one byte or the lower one byte.

In the random number update process 2, first, the random number update scan counter for specifying in order which random number of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be the target of the current update process is updated (step S231). In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the random number update scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Then, when the value of the random number update scan counter is "0", the variation pattern random number 1 (upper order) is updated, and when it is "1", the variation pattern random number 1 (lower order) is updated;
In the case of “], the variation pattern random number 2 is updated, and in the case of“ 3 ”, the variation pattern random number 3 is updated. Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S232).
Next, the upper limit judgment value of the random number is acquired from the table referenced based on the calculated address (step S234). In the table referred to at this time, the upper limit judgment value for each kind of random number, that is, a value for judging whether or not the random number has made a round is stored.

Subsequently, for example, in the CPU used as the gaming microcomputer in the present embodiment,
Refresh register (hereinafter referred to as "R register") used for refreshing the RAM
Is not provided, and instead, a counter called “M1 counter” that operates equivalent to the R register is built in, but the value of the M1 counter is loaded (step S234). The randomness can be given randomness by using the value of the M1 counter.
Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is obtained, and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step S235). The mask value is the number of bits different depending on the random number to be updated, for example, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated, the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter are set. This is because the upper limit value is different depending on the type of random number. When the lower 1 byte of fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated as a mask value, M1
In the case of updating the lower 3 bits of the counter and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter are exemplified, but the numerical value is merely an example and the present invention is not limited thereto.

Next, it is determined whether the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236). Then, if the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S 236; Y), the value left by masking the value of the M 1 counter with the mask value as the added value Is set as a mask update value obtained by adding “1” to “masked value”, and the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (step S 237), and the process proceeds to step S 239. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S 236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to “0” as the addition value, and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value ( Step S238), Step S239
Go to The reason for adding "1" to the masked value is that the masked value may become "0", and adding "0" later does not change from the value before addition, so to avoid it. is there.

Then, it is determined whether the random number area to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step S239). If it is a 2-byte random number (step S239; Y), the value (2-byte) of the random number area to be updated is set (step S240). ), Go to step S242. If the random number area to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step S239; N), “0” is set as the upper 1 byte of the random number value, and the value of the random number area to be updated as the lower 1 byte of the random value (1 A byte is set (step S241), and the process proceeds to step S242.

In step S 242, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in step S 237 or S 238 to the random number value is set as a new random number value, and it is determined whether this new random value is larger than the upper limit judgment value acquired in step S 233 (step S243). Then, if the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step S243; N), the new random value is saved in a lower random number area of 1-byte random number or 2-byte random number (step S245). If the new random number value is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step S243; Y), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit judgment value from the new random number value is taken as a new random number again (step S244). Byte random number or 2
It saves in the lower random number area of the byte random number (step S245).

Next, it is determined whether the updated random number area is a 2-byte random number (step S246), and if it is not a 2-byte random number (step S246; N), the random number updating process 2 is ended. Also, 2
If the random number is a byte random number (step S246; Y), the new random number value (when a new random number is calculated again) is saved in the upper random number area of the 2-byte random number (step S24)
7) The random number update process 2 ends.
In the case of this embodiment, the upper limit judgment value, the mask value of the M1 counter, and the type information of the random number area to be updated (1-byte random number, 2-byte random number (upper), 2-byte random number (lower)) on the effect random number update table. The address of the update area, etc. is defined for the type of random number to be updated (4 blocks).

As described above, the CPU 111A updates the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2. Therefore, the CPU 111A determines the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game balls to the starting winning opening 36 and the starting area of the normal variation winning device 37. It is a random number updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for

[Prize port switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 21 shows the winning opening switch / status monitoring process in the timer interrupt process (step S1).
08) was shown. In this winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first, a winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the winning opening switch (upper large winning opening switch 39a) in the upper large winning opening (second special variation winning device 39) is prepared (step (S301) A fraud / prize monitoring process (step S302) is performed to monitor whether there is an illegal prize at the upper prize port despite the upper prize port is not open and to detect a normal prize.

The winning opening monitoring table includes a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether there is an input to the target switch, a lower address of fraud monitoring information, a lower address of a fraud winning number area
Information on an incorrect prize error notification command, an incorrect prize number upper limit value (irregularity determination number), and an address of the winning opening switch table are defined. In addition to the number of repetitions of monitoring (number of switches) in the winning table of the winning opening monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit, lower address of winning number counter area 1, winning number counter area 2 for each switch. The lower address information of is defined. The winning opening monitoring table is prepared for each of the switches to be monitored.

Thereafter, a winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the winning opening switch (lower large winning opening switch 38a) in the lower large winning opening (first special variation winning device 38) is prepared (step S303), and whether there is any illegal winning Incorrect & prize monitoring process (step S30) to detect normal prizes
Execute 4).

Next, the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the common power (normal fluctuation winning device 37)
A winning opening monitoring table is prepared (step S305), and a fraud & prize monitoring process (step S306) is performed to monitor whether there is an illegal prize and to detect a normal prize.
Then, prepare a winning opening monitoring table of a winning opening switch that can always win (for example, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36 and the winning opening switch 35a in the general winning opening 35) (
Step S307) A winning number counter updating process (step S308) is performed to update the winning number.

Next, a state scan counter for specifying in order which switch or signal of the plurality of switches whose state should be monitored and which signal is to be the target of the current monitoring is updated (step S309). In the case of the present embodiment, the state scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3.
Thereafter, in accordance with the value of the state scan counter, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared (step S310). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S311) is performed to determine whether or not an error has occurred.

In the case of the present embodiment, by referring to the value of the status scan counter in the gaming machine status monitoring table 1, when the value of the status scan counter is “0”, a switch abnormality is output due to the occurrence of connector disconnection or the like of the switch. Monitoring of the state based on the detection signal 1 is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “1”, monitoring of the state based on the shoot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the status scan counter is “2”, monitoring of the status based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is “3”, monitoring of the status based on the payout abnormality status signal is configured. Ru.

Next, in accordance with the value of the state scan counter, the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared (step S312). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S313) is performed to determine whether or not an error has occurred.

In the case of the present embodiment, by referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, when the value of the state scan counter is "0", the glass frame open detection switch 63
Monitoring of the state based on the signal output from is set, and the value of the state scan counter is "1"
In this case, monitoring of the state based on the signal output from the main body frame open detection switch 64 is set. Moreover, when the value of the state scan counter is "2", monitoring of the state based on the frame radio wave illegal signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "3", monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is It is set.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the state scan counter is "0" (step S314). If the value of the state scan counter is not "0" (step S314; N), step S3 is performed.
Migrate to 18 In this case, there is no monitoring target of the state in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next.
If the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S314; Y), the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S315), and the gaming machine determines whether or not an error has occurred. A state check process (step S316) is performed.

In the case of this embodiment, by referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, when the value of the state scan counter is "0", a switch abnormality is output due to the occurrence of connector disconnection or the like of the switch. Monitoring of the state based on the detection signal 2 is set. Note that
The gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is “1” to “3”.

Thereafter, a payout busy signal check process (step S317) is performed to check the payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control, and step S318.
Migrate to Note that the processing in steps S315 to S317 is executed only when the value of the status scan counter updated at each timer interrupt is “0”, so that it is executed at a rate of once every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processes of steps S315 to S317 are performed every 16 ms.

Next, a V abnormal passage monitoring process (step S318) is performed to monitor detection of an abnormal input in the probability change operation area switch 38d, and a residual ball monitoring process (step S319) to monitor gaming balls remaining in the upper channel 38j. I do. Further, the discharge ball monitoring process (step S320) for monitoring the game balls remaining in the lower flow path 38k is performed, and the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is ended.

[Incorrect & prize monitoring process]
FIG. 22 shows the fraud & prize monitoring process (steps S302, S304, and S306) in the above-described prize hole switch / state monitoring process. This fraud & prize monitoring process is performed on the lower special winning opening switch 38a of the first special variation winning device 38, the upper winning hole switch 39a of the second special variation winning device 39, and the starting opening 2 switch 37a of the normal variation winning device 37. It is a process to be performed. For the special winning opening (first special fluctuation winning device 38, second special fluctuation winning device 39) and the general electric power (normal fluctuation winning device 37), the opening / closing member is forcibly opened to insert the game ball and pay out the prize ball In addition to the detection of winnings, fraud monitoring is conducted because fraud is easy to perform.

In this fraud & prize monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is checked (step S 321), and it is determined whether or not the fraud monitoring period is under (
Step S322). The fraud monitoring period is the period during which the flag for the lower prize winning opening unfair monitoring period is set when the winning prize switch to be monitored for errors is the lower prize winning mouth switch 38a, and the winning bid switch for error monitoring is If it is the upper large winning a prize opening switch 39a, it is a period during which the upper large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag is set, and if the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is the starting opening 2 switch 37a, This is a period other than the state in which the release control of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is being executed.

Then, if it is during the fraud monitoring period (step S322; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S323). If there is no input on the target winning opening switch (step S323; N), the process proceeds to step S332. In addition, when there is an input on the target winning opening switch (step S323; Y), the number of incorrect winnings of the target is updated by +1 (
Step S324) It is determined whether or not the number of incorrect winnings after the update is equal to or more than the number of fraud occurrence determination targets to be monitored (step S325).

In the case of this embodiment, regardless of the type of winning opening switch subject to error monitoring, the number of fraud determination determinations is set to five, but the number of unauthorized occurrences defines a different number for each type of winning opening switch. It can also be done.
The determination number is set to five, for example, when the big winning opening in the open state or the portable power is converted to the closed state, the game ball is caught in the big winning opening or the opening / closing member of the portable power, and the gaming ball wins This is so as not to judge that the signal is illegitimate when the player wins after the period of validity of the mouth switch or when the signal is noisy, and it is not easy to judge as an error if it is not illegitimate.

And, if the number of incorrect winnings is not equal to or more than the number of the determined fraud occurrences of the monitoring target (step S325)
N) prepare a winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch (step S330)
.
Also, in the case where the number of incorrect winnings is equal to or more than the number of detected frauds to be monitored (step S 325;
Y) holds the number of incorrect winnings to the number of incorrectness determinations (step S326), and saves an initial value (for example, 60000m seconds) in the target incorrect winning notification timer area (step S327). Next, a target fraudulent generation command is prepared (step S328), a fraudulent prize occurrence flag is prepared as a fraudulent flag (step S329), and the prepared fraudulent flag is compared with the value of the target fraudulent flag area (step S338). ).

On the other hand, if the fraud monitoring period is not underway (step S322; N), the winning hole monitoring table of the target winning hole switch is prepared (step S330), and the winning number counter update process (step S331) for setting the winning balls is performed. Yes, and if the target notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (
Step S332). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.
Then, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step S333). If the value is not 0 (step S333; N), that is, if the time is not up, the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. If the value is 0 (step S333; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, prepare the target fraud release command (step S334), and set the fraud winning flag as the fraud flag. Prepare (step S335)
). Then, it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S336).
.

If it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S336; Y), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the present fraud & prize monitoring process, the target number of wrong prizes is cleared ( Step S337), compare the prepared fraud flag with the value of the target fraud flag area (
Step S338).
Also, if it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S 336; N), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous fraud & prize monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is targeted. The value is compared with the value of the incorrect flag area (step S338).

Then, if the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step S)
338; Y) ends the fraud & prize monitoring process.
Also, if the prepared fraud flag does not match the value of the target fraud flag area (step S)
338; N) saves the prepared fraud flag in the target fraud flag area (step S3)
39), Perform rendering command setting processing (step S340), and end the fraud & prize monitoring processing. According to the above processing, the error notification command is produced according to the occurrence of an error.
The incorrect prize error cancellation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 along with the cancellation of the error, and the start and end of the error notification are set.

[Winning number counter update processing]
FIG. 23 shows winning number counter updating processing (steps S308 and S331) in the above-described winning opening switch / status monitoring processing and fraud & winning monitoring processing. In this winning number counter update process, first, the number of winning opening switches to be monitored is obtained from the winning opening monitoring table (step S 351), and whether there is an input (accurate change in input) to the target winning opening switch It determines (step S352).

If there is no input on the target winning opening switch (step S352; N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all switches is completed (step S362).
If the target winning opening switch has an input (step S352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step S353), and the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S354). It is determined whether it overflows (step S355). And
When the overflow does not occur (step S355; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step S356), and the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). Also, when an overflow occurs (step S35)
5; Y) loads the value of the target winning number counter area 2 (step S357). In the case of the present embodiment, in step S354, the counter for winning balls (delivery command transmission) is updated. The counter size is 2 bytes (range 0-65535).

After the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S 357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S 358), and it is determined whether it overflows (step S 35).
9). When no overflow occurs (step S359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step S360), and the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361). It is determined whether monitoring of all the switches has ended (step S362). Also, when an overflow occurs (step S35)
9; Y) updates the table address to the address of the next record (step S361)
It is determined whether monitoring of all the switches has ended (step S362). In the case of this embodiment,
In step S358, the counter for the main prize ball signal is updated. The counter size is 1 byte (range 0-255).

If monitoring of all the switches has not ended (step S362; N), the process returns to the process (step S352) of determining whether there is an input on the target winning opening switch. When the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S362; Y), the winning number counter updating process is ended.
As a result of the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning on the winning area, and the information on the winning is stored.

[Pachislot machine state check process]
In FIG. 24, the gaming machine state check process (in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process)
Steps S311, S313, and S316) are shown. In this gaming machine status check process,
First, the status monitoring table corresponding to the status scan counter is acquired (step S371).
It is determined whether the signal to be monitored is on (step S372).

Information corresponding to the state scan counter is defined in the state monitoring table (the gaming machine state monitoring table prepared in the winning hole switch / state monitoring process). As this information,
For example, lower address of start address of status monitoring area, lower address of port input status area of switch control area where target signal information is stored, mask data for extracting only bits of target signal, judgment data of signal ON, Status off command (If error type, make error notification end command), Status on command (Error type, error alert start command), State off monitoring timer comparison value, State on monitoring timer comparison value is included. .

If the target signal is not on (step S372; N), the state off flag is prepared as the state flag (step S373), and the target state off command is acquired and prepared (step S373).
Step S374). After that, the target state off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S
375) Compare the value of the target signal control area with the current signal state (step S379)
. If the target signal is not on (step S 372: N), it is a state indicating that the error signal is not an error (is normal), and a state that the signal from the touch switch is not touched is there.

On the other hand, when the target signal is on (step S372; Y), the state on flag is prepared as the state flag (step S376), and the state on command of the target is acquired and prepared (step S377). Thereafter, the target state on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S378), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S3).
79). The case where the target signal is on (step S 372; Y) is a state indicating that the error signal is an error (abnormal or incorrect), and that the signal from the touch switch is touched. Is a state showing

When the value of the target signal control area matches the state of the current signal (step S379; Y)
That is, if the signal status has not changed, the target status monitoring timer is updated by +1 (
Step S382) It is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or more than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383).
In addition, when the value of the target signal control area does not match the state of the current signal (step S37)
9; N), that is, when the signal state has changed, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control area (step S380). Then, the target status monitoring timer is cleared (step S 381), the target status monitoring timer is updated by 1 (step S 382), and it is determined whether the target status monitoring timer value is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value ( Step S383).

If the value of the target state monitoring timer is not greater than or equal to the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383; N
) Ends the gaming machine state check process.
Also, when the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S38)
3; Y) updates the status monitoring timer by -1 and holds the comparison value at -1 (step S 384)
And the prepared state flag is compared with the value of the target state flag area (step S 385).

Then, when the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area match (step S385; Y), the gaming machine state check process is ended.
If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (step S 385; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step S).
386) The effect command setting process is performed (step S387), and the gaming machine state check process is ended. Thus, the state off command prepared in step S374 or S377
The state on command prepared in the above is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Discharge busy signal check process]
FIG. 25 shows the payout busy signal check process (step S317) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this payout busy signal check process, first,
It is determined whether the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step S391). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 can not start the payout control.

If the payout busy signal is on (step S391; Y), a busy status flag is prepared as the status flag (step S392), and the on-confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32)
m seconds) is set (step S393), and it is determined whether the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S396). If the payout busy signal is not on (step S391; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S39).
394), setting the off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) (step S395)
It is determined whether the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S39).
6). This makes it possible to check whether the same state continues for a plurality of timer interrupts.

If the value of the busy signal state area does not match the state of the current signal (step S396; N
In step S397, the state of the current signal is saved in the busy signal state area (step S397), the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0 (step S398), and the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S399).
Also, when the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S 396)
To Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S399).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value set in step S393 or step S395 (step S400). If it is not greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S400; N), The payout busy signal check process ends. Also, if it is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S400; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept at the value of comparison value -1 (step S401) to prepare in step S392 or step S394. The status flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step S402), and the payout busy signal check process is ended.

By this processing, the busy signal status is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal status is not changed immediately, and the busy signal status is changed when the changed state continues over the signal determination time, and the noise is changed. It is hard to be influenced by

In addition, since the busy signal status is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal status is not set and is in an undefined state until any signal state continues for the signal determination time. As a result, when a power failure occurs and returns from the power failure, the payout control device 200 immediately outputs the winning ball command even if the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200. And the payout ball command is sent to the payout control device 200 in response to the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period. It will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the winning ball command and reliably recognizes that the payout processing can be performed immediately, and then the winning ball command is transmitted, and the payout control corresponding to the winning ball command is performed. You can prevent it from being

[V abnormal passage monitoring processing]
FIG. 26 shows the V abnormal passage monitoring process (step S318) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this V abnormal passage monitoring process, first, the positive change operation area 38
It is determined whether h is valid (step S411). The fact that the probability variation operation area 38h is active means that the detection of the gaming ball by the probability variation operation area switch 38d is treated as being effective (see FIG. 8). If the probability variation operation area 38h is in effect (step S411; Y), the process proceeds to step S418. In addition, when the positive variation operation area 38h is not active (step S41
1; N) determines whether or not there is an input to the probability change operation area switch 38d (step S412)
).

Then, when there is no input to the probability change operation area switch 38d (step S412; N),
It transfers to step S418.
Further, when there is an input to the probability change operation area switch 38d (step S412; Y), processing relating to the occurrence of the V abnormal passage error from step S413 is performed. The probability changing operation area 38h can flow only when the lever member 38i is retracted from the probability changing operation area 38h. Then, the period during which the probability changing operation area switch 38d is effective starts when the lever member 38i is in the retracted state, and the game ball that has flowed in after the lever member 38i becomes in the state covering the probability changing operation area 38h is the probability changing operation area When a predetermined time sufficient to be detected by the switch 38d has elapsed, or when the lever member 38i is in a state of covering the positive change operation area 38h, the operation is ended. Therefore, the presence of an input to the probability change operation region switch 38d when the probability change operation region switch 38d is not effective is an abnormal state which normally does not occur, and processing regarding occurrence of a V abnormal passage error is performed.

In the processing related to the V abnormal passage error occurrence, first, an initial value (V abnormal passage notification timer area)
Here, the value corresponding to 60 seconds is saved (step S413), and it is determined whether the value of the V abnormal passage flag area is an error occurring flag (step S414).
And, if the value of the V abnormal passage flag area is an error occurring flag (step S41)
4; Y), that is, when an error has already occurred, the V abnormal passage monitoring process is ended.

Also, if the value of the V abnormal passage flag area is not an error occurring flag (step S 414)
N), that is, when it is determined that an error occurs in the current process, an error occurring flag is saved in the V abnormal passage flag area (step S415), and a V abnormal passage generation command is prepared (step S416). Thereafter, rendering command setting processing is performed (step S417).
, V abnormal passage monitoring processing is ended. The effect control device 300 performs a process of notifying an error upon receipt of the V abnormal passage occurrence command.

On the other hand, if the process proceeds to step S418, it is determined whether the V abnormal passage notification timer is 0 (step S418).
Then, when the V abnormal passage notification timer is 0 (step S418; Y), the V abnormal passage monitoring process is ended. In this case, the V abnormal passage error is not occurring.
If the V abnormal passage notification timer is not 0 (step S418; N), the V abnormal passage notification timer is updated by 1 (step S419), and it is determined whether the V abnormal passage notification timer becomes 0 (step S420). ).

If the V abnormal passage notification timer has not become 0 (step S420; N), the V abnormal passage monitoring process is ended. In this case, the notification of the V abnormal passage error continues.
When the V abnormal passage notification timer becomes 0 (step S420; Y), the normal medium flag is saved in the V abnormal passage flag area (step S421), and a V abnormal passage cancellation command is prepared (step S422). . Thereafter, rendering command setting processing is performed (step S4).
23) End the V abnormal passage monitoring process. The effect control device 300 performs a process of ending the error notification in response to the reception of the V abnormal passage cancellation command.

[Residual ball monitoring process]
FIG. 27 shows the remaining ball monitoring process (step S319) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this remaining ball monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the passage port switch 38g that detects gaming balls that have not flowed into the probability change operation area 38h (step S431). If there is no input to the passage port switch 38g (step S431; N), the process proceeds to step S433. Also, when there is an input to the passage port switch 38g (step S4)
31; Y), if the remaining ball counter for managing the number of gaming balls in the upper channel 38 j is not 0
1 is updated (step S432), and the process proceeds to step S433.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the probability change operation area switch 38d (step S433), and when there is no input (step S433; N), the process proceeds to step S435. If there is an input to the probability change operation area switch 38d (step S433; Y), the remaining ball counter for managing the number of gaming balls in the upper flow passage 38j is not 0 and updated by 1 (step S434).
It transfers to step S435.

Then, it is determined whether or not there is an input on the lower large winning opening switch (step S435), and if there is no input (step S435; N), the process proceeds to step S438.
Also, when there is an input to the lower large winning opening switch (step S 435; Y), the upper flow path 3
The remaining ball counter that manages the number of game balls in 8j is updated by 1 (step S436), the timer initial value is saved in the remaining ball monitoring timer area (step S437), and the process proceeds to step S438. The remaining ball monitoring timer is for determining that there is a remaining ball error when the gaming ball has stayed in the upper channel 38j for a long time. Here, as the initial value, a time sufficiently longer than the time taken to flow into the upper flow path 38 j and to be discharged without abnormality is set. In addition, since the value is updated by -1 in the following processing, it is set so that 3 seconds can be clocked by saving a value of +1 corresponding to 3 seconds as an initial value.

Next, it is determined whether the remaining ball counter is 0 (step S438). If the remaining ball counter is 0 (step S438; Y), that is, there is no gaming ball in the upper channel 38j, the remaining ball is An error cancellation flag is prepared (step S444), and a residual ball error cancellation command is prepared (step S445). Then, it is determined whether the prepared state flag matches the value of the remaining ball error flag area (step S446).

On the other hand, if the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step S438; N), that is, the upper flow path 3
If there is a game ball in 8j, it is determined whether a remaining ball error is already occurring (step S)
439). If the residual ball error is already occurring (step S439; Y), the residual ball monitoring process is ended. Also, if the residual ball error is not already occurring (step S439; N
) Updates the remaining ball monitoring timer by -1 (step S440), and determines whether the remaining ball monitoring timer is 0 (step S441).

If the remaining ball monitoring timer is not 0 (step S441; N), the remaining ball monitoring process is ended. If the remaining ball monitoring timer is 0 (step S441; Y), a flag for the remaining ball error being generated is prepared (step S442), and a remaining ball error generating command is prepared (step S442).
Step S443). Then, it is determined whether the prepared state flag matches the value of the remaining ball error flag area (step S446).

When the prepared state flag matches the value of the remaining ball error flag area (step S446
Y) ends the residual sphere monitoring process.
If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the remaining ball error flag area (step S446; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the remaining ball error flag area (step S447), and rendering command setting processing is performed. Then (step S448), the remaining ball monitoring process is ended. The effect control device 300 performs a process of starting an error notification based on the reception of the remaining ball error occurrence command, and performs a process of ending the error notification based on the reception of the remaining ball error cancellation command.

That is, according to the above processing, a predetermined time (from the inflow of the last gaming ball to the upper channel 38 j
Here, even if all the game balls are not discharged from the upper flow passage 38j even after three seconds, it is determined that there is a remaining ball error. Thus, for example, it is possible to prevent a cheating action such as making a game ball (line fishing ball) attached with a thread remain in the upper flow passage 38j.

[Emission ball monitoring process]
FIG. 28 shows the discharge ball monitoring process (step S320) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this discharge ball monitoring process, first, it is determined whether there is an input to the discharge confirmation switch 38e that detects the game balls discharged from the lower flow passage 38k, that is, the game balls discharged from the first special variation winning device 38 (Step S451). Discharge confirmation switch 3
If there is no input to 8e (step S451; N), the process proceeds to step S453. In addition, when there is an input to the discharge confirmation switch 38e (step S451; Y), the lower flow passage 38 is
If the discharge ball counter for managing the number of game balls in k is not 0, it is updated by 1 (step S452
), Shift to step S453.

Next, it is determined whether there is an input to the passage port switch 38g that detects gaming balls that have not flowed into the probability change operation area 38h (step S453), and there is no input (step S453; N)
The process proceeds to step S456. Further, when there is an input to the passage port switch 38g (step S453; Y), the discharge ball counter managing the number of gaming balls in the lower flow passage 38k is updated by +1 (step S454). The initial value is saved (step S455), and the process proceeds to step S456.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the probability changing operation area switch 38d for detecting gaming balls having flowed into the probability changing operation area 38h (step S456), and there is no input (step S456; N)
The process proceeds to step S459. Further, when there is an input to the probability change operation area switch 38d (step S456; Y), the discharge ball counter managing the number of gaming balls in the lower flow path 38k is updated by +1 (step S457). Save the timer initial value (
The process proceeds to step S458) and step S459.

The passage opening switch 38g and the positive change operation area switch 38d also have a function as a switch for detecting gaming balls flowing into the lower flow path 38k, and the discharge ball counter is incremented by 1 based on the detection of gaming balls with these switches. Update and save the timer initial value in the discharge ball monitoring timer area. The discharge ball monitoring timer is for determining that a discharge ball error occurs when the gaming ball has stayed in the lower flow passage 38k for a long time. Here, as the initial value, a time sufficiently longer than the time taken to flow into the lower flow path 38 k and to be discharged without abnormality is set.
Also, since the value is updated by -1 in the following processing here, a value corresponding to 3 seconds as an initial value +
It is set to be able to measure 3 seconds by saving the value of 1.

Next, it is determined whether the discharge ball counter is 0 (step S459). If the discharge ball counter is 0 (step S459; Y), that is, if there is no gaming ball in the lower flow path 38k, the discharge ball is An error cancellation flag is prepared (step S465), and a discharge ball error cancellation command is prepared (step S466). Then, it is determined whether the prepared state flag matches the value of the discharge ball error flag area (step S 467).

On the other hand, if the discharge ball counter is not 0 (step S459; N), that is, the lower flow path 3
If there is a game ball in 8k, it is determined whether a discharge ball error is already occurring (step S)
460). And, if the discharge ball error is already occurring (step S460; Y),
End the discharge ball monitoring process. Also, if the discharge ball error has not already occurred (step S4)
60; N) updates the discharge ball monitoring timer by -1 (step S461), and determines whether the discharge ball monitoring timer is 0 (step S462).

If the discharge ball monitoring timer is not 0 (step S462; N), the discharge ball monitoring process is ended. If the discharge ball monitoring timer is 0 (step S462; Y), a discharge ball error occurrence flag is prepared (step S463), and a discharge ball error generation command is prepared (step S463).
Step S464). Then, it is determined whether the prepared state flag matches the value of the discharge ball error flag area (step S 467).

When the prepared status flag matches the value of the discharge ball error flag area (step S 467)
Y) ends the discharge ball monitoring process.
If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the discharge ball error flag area (step S 467; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the discharge ball error flag area (step S 468), and effect command setting processing is performed. Then (step S448), the discharge ball monitoring process is ended. The effect control device 300 performs a process of starting an error notification based on the reception of the discharge ball error occurrence command, and performs a process of ending the error notification based on the reception of the discharge ball error cancellation command.

That is, according to the above processing, a predetermined time (from the inflow of the last gaming ball to the lower flow path 38k
Here, if all the game balls are not discharged from the lower flow passage 38k even after 3 seconds have elapsed, it is determined that a discharge ball error has occurred. Thus, for example, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent action such as making a game ball (line fishing ball) attached with a thread remain in the lower flow passage 38k.

[Special figure game processing]
Next, the details of the special view game process (step S110) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the special figure game processing, the starting opening 1 switch 36 a and the starting opening 2 switch 3
The monitoring of the input of 7a, the control of the whole processing concerning the special figure variation display game, and the setting of the display of the special figure are performed.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the special view game process, first, a starting opening switch monitoring process (step A1) is performed to monitor winning of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, the start winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 3 which makes the second starting winning opening
If there is a game ball prize in 7, then it extracts various random numbers (such as a big hit random number), and determines in advance the game result based on the prize at the stage before the start of the special view variation display game based on the prize Make a decision.

Next, the upper winning prize opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In the upper large winning opening switch monitoring process, processing is performed to monitor the detection of the game ball by the upper large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variation winning device 39.
Further, the lower large winning opening switch monitoring process (step A3) is performed. In this lower large winning opening switch monitoring process, processing is performed to monitor the detection of gaming balls at the lower large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variation winning device 38.

Thereafter, the positive change operation area switch monitoring process (step A4) is performed. In this probability change operation area switch monitoring process, processing is performed to monitor the detection of gaming balls in the probability change operation area switch 38d provided in the probability change operation area 38h.
Next, remaining ball processing timer update processing (step A5) is performed. In this remaining ball processing timer update processing, processing is performed to manage the special winning opening remaining ball processing time set after the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 are closed.

Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A6). In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A7).
If the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A7; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, reference is made to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number. The special figure game sequence branch table to be set is set in the register (step A8), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A9). Then, a subroutine call is made in accordance with the special figure game process number (step A10).

At step A10, when the special figure game processing number is "0", the variation start of the special figure variation display game is monitored, and the setting of the variation start of the special figure variation display game, the setting of the effect, the special figure variation A special drawing routine processing (step A11) is performed to set information required to perform processing.
At step A10, when the special figure game process number is "1", the special figure variation process which performs setting of the stop display time of the special figure, setting of information necessary for performing the special figure display process, etc. (Step A12) is performed.

In step A10, when the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the type of the big hit, the big winning opening of each big hit Special chart display processing (Step A1) to set the fan fare time according to the opening pattern, and to set the information necessary to perform fan fare / interval processing
Do 3).

At step A10, when the special figure game processing number is "3", the setting of the opening time of the special winning opening and the updating of the opening number, the setting of information necessary for performing the special winning opening opening process, etc. A fanfare / interval process (step A14) is performed.
In step A10, when the special figure game processing number is "4", while the big hit round is not the final round, while setting the interval command, the processing of setting the ending command in the final round, the big winning opening survival A special winning opening open process (step A15) is performed to set information required to perform ball processing.

If the special figure game processing number is "5" in step A10, if the big hit round is the final round, the process for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, the big hit end processing Big winning opening remaining ball processing to set the information necessary to do, etc. (Step A16
)I do.
At step A10, when the special figure game process number is "6", a big hit end process (step A17) is performed to set information necessary for performing the special figure routine process.

Thereafter, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special view 1 display 51 (step A)
18) Perform special symbol 1 display 51 related symbol variation control processing (step A19). And
After preparing the table for controlling the variation of the special view 2 display 52 (step A20), the symbol variation control process (step A21) related to the special view 2 display 52 is performed. Thereafter, a lever solenoid control process (step A22) for controlling the operation of the lever solenoid 38f is performed.
The special view game process ends.
On the other hand, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" at step A7 (step A)
7; N), that is, when the time is not up, shift to the processing of step A18,
Perform the subsequent processing.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (step A1) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 30, in the starting opening switch monitoring process, first, the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36), the prize monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and the hard random number acquisition processing (step A102) is performed. (1) It is determined whether or not there is a winning on the starting opening (step A103).
When it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning on the first starting opening (step A103)
In N), the process proceeds to step A109, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a winning on the first starting opening (step A)
103; Y) determines whether or not the special drawing time is in the middle (general pressure support) (step A)
104).

If it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is not short (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is short (step A104;
In Y), a right-handed command notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. That is, if it is a time saving state, regardless of the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game, a right-handed command notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player does not win the prize unless it is left-handed to the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36), and the second starting opening (normal fluctuation winning device 3)
7) will not win unless you hit the right. Therefore, in the time saving state, the game state in which the right hitting is more advantageous than the left hitting is advantageous, but there is a win in the first starting opening during the time saving state (that is, the left hitting in the time saving state) In addition, the presentation control device 300 is configured to send a right-handling instruction notification command to the effect control device 300 and perform notification (warning) instructing to perform a right-handling operation. Then, prepare a table for setting the information of suspension by the first start opening (start winning opening 36) (step A107), and the special view start opening switch common processing (step A108)
I do.

Next, prepare a second start port (normal fluctuation winning device 37) prize monitoring table (step A1)
09) A hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed to determine whether there is a winning on the second starting opening (step A111).
When it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning on the second starting opening (step A111)
N) end the starting port switch monitoring process.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning on the second starting opening (step A)
111; Y), the normal motorized part (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is in operation, ie,
It is determined whether or not the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is activated and the game ball is in an open state in which winning of the game ball is possible (step A112), and it is determined that the ordinary electric role is in operation (step A112; Y). , Shift to the process of step A114, and perform the subsequent processes. Step A
If it is determined at 112 that the ordinary motor-operated part is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not the general electric power fraud is occurring (step A113).

In the determination as to whether or not the general electric power fraud is occurring, it is determined that the fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent prizes to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is equal to or more than the fraud occurrence judgment number (for example 5). In the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the gaming ball can not be won in the closed state, and the gaming ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, when the game ball wins in the closed state, it is the case where some abnormality or injustice occurs,
If there is a game ball that has won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of unfair prizes.
Then, when the number of incorrect winnings thus counted is equal to or more than a predetermined number (upper limit value), it is determined that the fraud is in progress.

If it is determined in step A113 that no ordinary power transmission is occurring (step A113; N), a table for setting the information of suspension by the second starting port (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is prepared (
Step A114) The special view starting opening switch common processing (step A115) is performed, and the starting opening switch monitoring processing is ended.
If it is determined in step A113 that a general power transmission fraud is occurring (step A113; Y), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated further.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, the hard random number acquisition process in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process (step A102)
, A110) will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 31, in the hard random number acquisition process,
First, among the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (normal fluctuation winning device 37),
Setting no prize information on the starting opening to be monitored (Step A121), the starting opening 1 switch 3
It is determined whether there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored among the 6a and the start port 2 switch 37a (step A122).
Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process is ended.
On the other hand, if there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether latch data is present in the target random number latch register (step A124). .

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number is extracted, the hard random number acquisition processing is ended.
Also, when there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y)
Loads the prepared big hit random number into the hard random number latch register to be monitored and prepares it (step A125). Then, among the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (normal fluctuation winning device 37), the winning presence information of the starting opening to be monitored is set (step A12
6) Finish the hard random number acquisition process.

[Special figure starting port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special view starting port switch common processing (steps A108 and A115) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring processing will be described. The special view starting opening switch common processing is processing that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a.

As shown in FIG. 32, in the special view starting port switch common process, first, the starting port 1 switch 36
The start opening signal output number of times which is the number of times of outputting information on the number of winnings to the start opening switch to be monitored among the a and the start opening 2 switch 37a to the management device outside the gaming machine 10 is loaded (step A131) The loaded value is updated by +1 (step A132), and it is determined whether the number of outputs overflows (step A133).
If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is RW
It saves in the start opening signal output frequency area of M (step A134), and proceeds to the processing of step A135. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step A133; Y),
It transfers to the process of step A135. In the present embodiment, “0” in the start opening signal output frequency area
Values from 0 to "255" can be stored. When the loaded value is “255”, the value after updating becomes “0” by +1 updating, so that it is determined that the number of times of output overflows and is not updated.

Next, it is determined whether the number of to-be-updated special figure reservations (starting storage) corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored among the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit (step A135).
If the number of to-be-updated holdings to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A135; N), the special drawing starting opening switch common processing ends.
In addition, when the number of to-be-updated special figure reservations is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), the number of to-be-updated special figures (number of specially-designated 1 reservations or specially-designated number 2) is updated +1 Step A13
6) Prepare a decoration special drawing reservation number command corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored and the special drawing reservation number (step A137), and perform rendering command setting processing (step A138).

Next, save the target starting opening winning flag (step A139), and calculate the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the number of starting opening switches to be monitored and the number of special drawing reservations (step A140).
And the big hit random number prepared in step A125 is saved in the big hit random number storage area of RWM (step A141). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starting opening switch to be monitored is extracted,
It prepares (step A142) and saves it in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of RWM (step A143).

Next, the variation pattern random numbers 1 and 2 are saved in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step A 144), and the address of the variation order flag storage area corresponding to the total of the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number Is calculated (step A145), and the target fluctuation order flag is saved in the calculated area (step A146). In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the first start memory and the second start memory are digested in the generation order, and the variation order flag is stored in the 1 to 8 variation order flag storage areas corresponding to the digestion order. Alternatively, by storing the information of Special Figure 2, the start-up storage order is managed.
Thereafter, a special-graph hold information determination process (step A147) is performed to determine information on the starting memory before the start-up memory is digested, and the special-figure starting port switch common process is ended.

Here, the game control apparatus 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 and the start winning area of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37, and becomes the right to execute the variable display game. A start storage means is provided for storing a predetermined number at the upper limit as start storage. Also,
The start storage means (game control device 100) stores various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (start winning opening 36) as a first start memory with a predetermined number as the upper limit. The various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball on the second starting winning opening (normal fluctuation winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory with a predetermined number as the upper limit.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
Next, the special figure reservation information determination process in the above-mentioned special view starting opening switch common process (step A)
147) will be described in detail. The special view reservation information determination process is a prefetch process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start storage prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game based on the corresponding start storage.

As shown in FIG. 33, first, a low probability determination flag is prepared in order to make a determination based on the determination value in the low probability state (step A 151), and read ahead big hit determination processing is performed (step A 152)
).
And, if the result of the pre-read big hit determination process is a big hit (step A153; Y), set the big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting opening switch (step A154), and the big hit symbol prepared in step A142. The stop symbol information corresponding to the random number is acquired (step A155), and the process proceeds to step A157.
If the result of the pre-read big hit determination processing is not a big hit (step A153; N), that is, if it is a release, stop symbol information of the release is set (step A156), and the process proceeds to step A157.

Then, the stop symbol information is saved in the symbol information area (step A157), and the prefetch stop symbol command (low probability) corresponding to the target starting opening switch and the stop symbol information is prepared (step A158). (Step A159). Thus, the determination result in the low probability state is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Next, a high probability determination flag is prepared in order to perform determination based on the determination value in the high probability state (step A160), and pre-read big hit determination processing is performed (step A161).
Then, if the result of the pre-read big hit determination process is a big hit (step A162; Y), set a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting opening switch (step A163), and the big hit symbol prepared in step A142. The stop symbol information corresponding to the random number is acquired (step A164), and the process proceeds to step A166.
If the result of the pre-read big hit determination process is not a big hit (step A162; N), that is, if it is a release, stop symbol information of the release is set (step A165), and the process proceeds to step A166.

Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure height probability (high probability state) is in progress (step A166), and when it is not in the special figure height probability (step A166; N), the process proceeds to step A168. If the special figure height probability is in progress (step A166; Y), the stop symbol information is saved (overwritten) in the symbol information area (step A167), and the process proceeds to step A168.
After that, the pre-reading stop symbol command corresponding to the target starting opening switch and the stop symbol information (
Prepare high probability) (step A 168) and perform rendering command setting processing (step A1)
69). Thereby, the determination result in the high probability state is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Next, special figure information setting processing (step A170) for setting special figure information that is a parameter for setting a variation pattern is performed, and variation pattern setting process for setting a variation aspect of the special figure variation display game is performed (step A171). Thereafter, a look-ahead fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the first half fluctuation number indicating the first half fluctuation pattern and the second half fluctuation number indicating the second half fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation pattern of the special view fluctuation display game is prepared (step A172), and rendering command setting processing is performed. (Step A173), the special figure hold information determination process is ended. Step A
Special figure information setting processing in 170, fluctuation pattern setting processing in step A171,
It is the same as the processing executed at the start of the special view variable display game in the special view normal processing.

With the above process, the prefetch stop pattern command including the result of the special view change display game based on the start storage of the preread target and the read change pattern command including the information of the change pattern in the special view change display game based on the start storage It is prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300.
In addition, the command corresponding to each of the determination result in the low probability state and the determination result in the high probability state is transmitted as the prefetch stop symbol command. Thereby, the effect control of the result related information (whether or not a big hit or the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is performed before the start timing of the special view fluctuation display game based on the corresponding start memory. From the start timing of the special view variation display game by changing, for example, the decorative special view start storage display displayed on the decorative special view start storage display unit 42 of the center case 40 that can be notified to the device 300. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the related information.

That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the start storage in the start winning storage means (game control device 100) before the execution of the variable display game based on the start storage (
For example, it is determined whether or not a special result is obtained, etc. It should be noted that the time when the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of the starting winning combination where the starting memory is generated but any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played Good.

[Pre-reading big hit judgment processing]
Next, pre-reading big hit determination processing in the above-mentioned special figure reservation information decision processing (step A152
, A161) will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 34, in the read ahead big hit determination process,
First, the lower limit judgment value of the jackpot judgment value is set (step A181), and it is judged whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower judgment value (step A182). Note that being a big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit judgment value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is not less than the lower judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and not more than the upper judgment value which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A182; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A187), and the pre-reading big hit judgment processing is ended.
If the value of the jackpot random number is not smaller than the lower limit judgment value (step A182; N), it is judged whether the judgment flag is high probability judgment (step A183).

Then, if the determination flag is the high probability determination (step A183; Y), the upper limit determination value in the high probability is set (step A184), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value. (Step A186).
If the determination flag is not the high probability determination (step A183; N), that is, the low probability determination flag, the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (step A185), and the value of the target jackpot random number is the upper limit. It is determined whether it is larger than the determination value (step A186).

If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A186; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A187), and the pre-reading big hit judgment processing is ended. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A186; N), that is, if it is a big hit, a big hit is set as the judgment result (step A188), and the prefetch big hit judgment processing is ended.

[Upper prize winning opening switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the upper prize winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 35, in the upper prize winning opening switch monitoring process, first,
It is determined whether the value of the special figure game process number is "4", that is, it is in the process of opening the special winning opening (step A191). If the special winning opening is being processed (step A191; Y)
) Shifts to the processing of step A193. If the special winning opening is not being processed (step A191; N), it is determined whether the value of the special drawing game processing number is "5", that is, the special winning opening residual ball processing is in progress (step A192).

If the special winning opening game is being processed (step A192; Y), the process proceeds to step A193. If the special winning opening residual ball processing is not in progress (step A192; N), the upper large winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended. Since the special figure game process number does not shift next until the special figure game process timer becomes “0”, it is possible to check the progress of the game by the special figure game process number.

Then, it is determined whether the upper large winning opening is in operation (step A193). In operation of the upper large winning opening is a state where there is a possibility that the second special variation winning device 39 detects a winning. The possibility of detecting a prize includes a state in which the open / close door 39c is operated to open the game ball in an open state in which a game ball can be won, and also includes a predetermined period after the open state is converted to a closed state. . If the upper large winning opening is not in operation (step A193; N), the upper large winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. If the upper large winning opening is in operation (step A193; Y), it is determined whether the upper large winning opening switch 39a has an input (step A194).

If there is no input on the upper large winning opening switch (step A194; N), the upper large winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. In addition, when there is an input in the upper large winning a prize mouth switch (step A194
Y) prepare a special winning opening count command (step A195) and perform effect command setting processing (step A196). Thereby, in the effect control device 300, it is possible to execute the effect corresponding to the winning of the second special variation winning device 39.
Then, it is determined whether the special winning opening is being processed (step A197). If the special winning opening is not being processed (step A197; N), the upper winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. If the special winning opening is being processed (step A 197; Y), the special winning opening count is updated by +1 (step A 198), and the special winning opening count is the upper limit (one round can be won) Number of gaming balls, for example "9") It is judged whether or not (step A199)
.

When the special winning opening count is not equal to or more than the upper limit (step A199; N), the upper large winning opening switch monitoring process is ended.
If the special winning opening count is equal to or more than the upper limit (step A199; Y), the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step A200), and the upper winning prize opening switch monitoring process is ended. As a result, the second special variation winning device 39 is closed and one round is completed.

[Secondary prize winning opening switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the lower large winning opening switch monitoring process (step A3) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 36, in the lower winning prize opening switch monitoring process, first,
It is determined whether the value of the special figure game process number is "4", that is, it is in the process of opening the special winning opening (step A201). If the special winning opening is being processed (Step A201; Y
) Shifts to the process of step A203. If the special winning opening is not being processed (step A201; N), it is determined whether the value of the special drawing game processing number is "5", that is, the special winning opening residual ball processing is in progress (step A202).

If the special winning opening game is being processed (step A202; Y), the process proceeds to step A203. If the special winning opening residual ball processing is not in progress (step A202; N), the lower large winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended. Since the special figure game process number does not shift next until the special figure game process timer becomes “0”, it is possible to check the progress of the game by the special figure game process number.

Then, it is determined whether the lower large winning opening is in operation (step A203). The lower special winning opening is in operation is a state where there is a possibility that the first special variation winning device 38 detects a winning. The possibility of detecting a prize includes a predetermined period after the open state is converted to a closed state, in addition to a state in which the open / close door 38c is operated to enable winning of the game ball. . If the lower large winning opening is not in operation (step A203; N), the lower large winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. If the lower large winning opening is in operation (step A203; Y), it is determined whether the lower large winning opening switch 38a has an input (step A204).

If there is no input on the lower large winning opening switch (step A204; N), the lower large winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. Also, if there is an input on the lower prize winning opening switch (step A 204)
Y) prepares a special winning opening count command (step A205), and performs effect command setting processing (step A206). Thereby, in the effect control device 300, it is possible to execute the effect corresponding to the winning of the first special variation winning device 38.
Then, it is determined whether the special winning opening is being processed (step A207). If the special winning opening is not being processed (step A207; N), the lower large winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. If the special winning opening is being processed (step A207; Y), the special winning opening count is updated by +1 (step A208), and the special winning opening count is at the upper limit (one round can be won) Number of gaming balls, for example "9") It is judged whether or not (step A209)
.

When the special winning opening count is not equal to or more than the upper limit (step A209; N), the lower large winning opening switch monitoring process is ended.
If the special winning opening count is equal to or more than the upper limit (step A209; Y), the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step A210), and the special drawing per end pointer area is hit and the end pointer value is reached. Is loaded and saved in the control pointer area during the special view (step A211), and the lower large winning a prize opening switch monitoring process is ended. As a result, the first special variation winning device 38 is closed and one round is completed.

[Probability change operation area switch monitoring process]
Next, the positive change operation area switch monitoring process in the special drawing game process described above (step A4)
Explain the details of. As shown in FIG. 37, in the probability variation operation area switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation operation area 38h is active (step A221). The fact that the probability variation operation area 38h is active means that the detection of the gaming ball by the probability variation operation area switch 38d is treated as being effective (see FIG. 8). If the positive variation operation area 38h is not active (step A22)
1; N) ends the positive change operation area switch monitoring process. In addition, if the probability variation operation area 38h is valid (step A221; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the probability variation operation area switch 38d (step A222).

Then, when there is no input to the probability change operation area switch 38d (step A222; N),
The positive change operation area switch monitoring process ends.
Also, when there is an input to the probability variation operation area switch 38d (step A222; Y), prepare a probability variation operation area passing command (step A223) and perform rendering command setting processing (step A223)
Step A224). As a result, in the effect control device 300, effects corresponding to the game balls having flowed into the probability variation operation area 38h can be executed.

Next, it is determined whether the jackpot symbol is a V easy symbol (step A225). The V-easy symbol is a symbol corresponding to 12R positive variation, 5R positive variation, 4R positive variation. In the case of the big hit by these symbols, the lower V opening is performed, so the gaming ball will almost certainly flow into the positive change operation area 38h. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit by 5R normal or 4R normal which is not a V-easy symbol, the lower short is open, so it is rare for the game ball to flow into the probability change operation area 38h.

Then, when the big hit design is V easy design (step A225; Y), set the probability variation operation area normal passage information (step A226), save the set information in the probability variation operation area passage information region (step A228) ), End the positive change operation area switch monitoring process.
If the big hit design is not V easy design (step A225; N), set the probability variation operating area irregular passage information (step A227), save the set information in the probability variation operation area passing information area (step A229) ), End the positive change operation area switch monitoring process.

Remaining ball processing timer update processing
Next, details of the remaining ball processing timer update process (step A5) in the above-mentioned special view game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 38, in the remaining ball processing timer updating process, first, the upper large winning opening remaining ball processing timer which manages the upper large winning a prize opening remaining ball processing time which is the remaining ball processing time for the second special variation winning device 39. Is determined to be 0 (step A231).

And, if the upper large winning a prize opening residual ball processing timer is 0 (step A 231; Y), that is, the upper special winning opening residual ball processing time which is the remaining ball processing time for the second special variation winning device 39 Is transferred to step A235.
Also, if the upper large winning opening remaining ball processing timer is not 0 (step A 231; N), that is, during the upper large winning opening remaining ball processing time, the upper large winning opening remaining ball processing timer is updated by -1 ( Step A232) It is judged whether or not the upper large winning a prize winning hole residual ball processing timer has become 0 (step A233).

When the upper large winning a prize winning opening residual ball processing timer has not become 0 (step A233; N), it moves to step A235.
Also, when the upper large winning a prize opening residual ball processing timer becomes 0 (step A233; Y), the setting at the end of the upper large winning a prize opening residual ball processing time is performed (step A234). In the setting at the end of the large winning a prize opening residual ball processing time, set the special motorized item 1 in operation signal to OFF, clear the upper large winning a prize opening open state flag, save the flag during the upper large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period Do.

Next, it is determined whether the lower large winning opening residual ball processing timer that manages the lower large winning opening remaining ball processing time, which is the remaining ball processing time for the first special variation winning device 38, is 0 (step A23)
5).
Then, if the lower large winning opening residual ball processing timer is not 0 (step A 235; N), that is, during the lower large winning opening residual ball processing time, the lower large winning opening remaining ball processing timer is updated by -1. (Step A236), it is determined whether the lower large winning opening remaining ball processing timer has become 0 (step A237).

If the lower large winning a prize winning slot residual ball processing timer has not become 0 (step A 237; N), the residual ball processing timer updating process is ended.
If the lower large winning opening residual ball processing timer becomes 0 (step A 237; Y), the setting at the end of the lower large winning opening residual ball processing time is performed (step A 238). In the setting at the end of the lower large winning a prize opening residual ball processing time, set the special motorized item 2 in operation signal to OFF, clear the lower large winning opening opening state flag, save the flag during the lower large winning opening fraud monitoring period Do.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the lever solenoid is stopped (step A239). When the lever solenoid is stopped (step A239; Y), the remaining ball processing timer update process is ended. When the lever solenoid is stopped, the first special variation winning device 3 except in the first round
This state is set when opening the lever 8, that is, when the lever solenoid 38f is kept in the OFF state. In this case, the lever solenoid 38f is used after the remaining ball processing time has elapsed.
Does not operate, so the lever solenoid 3 after the remaining ball processing time has elapsed.
Processing concerning the operation of 8f is not performed.

If the lever solenoid is not stopped (step A239; N), the remaining ball monitoring operation information is saved in the lever solenoid information area (step A240) and the number of remaining balls is 0
It is determined whether or not (step A 242).
Then, if the number of remaining balls is not 0 (step A 242; N), the remaining ball processing timer updating process is ended. In this case, the remaining ball monitoring operation of the lever solenoid is maintained.

If the number of remaining balls is 0 (step A242; Y), the lever solenoid is set at the end of the remaining ball monitoring (step A243), and the remaining ball processing timer updating process is ended. In the setting of the lever solenoid at the end of the remaining ball monitoring, the in-stop information is saved in the lever solenoid information area, and the in-stop value is saved in the control pointer of the lever solenoid control area.
Further, the control timer area of the lever solenoid control area is cleared to 0.

On the other hand, if the lower large winning opening residual ball processing timer is 0 (step A235; Y), that is, if the lower large winning opening residual ball processing time has already ended, the lever solenoid is in the residual ball monitoring operation It is determined whether it is (step A241).
Then, if the lever solenoid is not in the remaining ball monitoring operation (step A241; N), the remaining ball processing timer updating process is ended.
In addition, when the lever solenoid is in the residual ball monitoring operation (step A241; Y),
It transfers to step A242. In this case, the number of remaining balls is 0 (step A 242)
The setting of the lever solenoid at the end of remaining ball monitoring (step A243) is performed by Y), and the operation of the lever solenoid 38f is finished.

By the above processing, the upper large winning a prize opening remaining ball processing time and the lower large winning a prize opening remaining ball processing time are managed. The timer that manages upper large winning a prize opening residual ball processing time and lower large winning a prize opening residual ball processing time is a timer different from the special figure game processing timer in order to manage the opening time of the special variation winning device in at least special gaming state. Since there is, it is possible to manage the upper large winning a prize opening remaining ball processing time and the lower large winning a prize opening remaining ball processing time in parallel with the progress of the special gaming state. That is, while managing the opening of one of the special variation winning devices, it is possible to manage the special winning opening residual ball processing time of the other special variation winning device.

If it is going to control an interval time and the big winning a prize mouth remaining ball processing time which follows by one special figure game processing timer, with the special figure game processing timer concerned, management of the interval time after the management of the opening possible time in the round Since it will carry out and manage the big winning a prize opening remaining ball processing time after that and will manage the openable time of the next round, the time between rounds will become long. If it is going to shorten the time between rounds, it will become easy to occur that a regular winning will be treated as invalid since the big winning a prize mouth remaining ball processing time will also become short. On the contrary, if the processing time for the big winning opening remaining balls is lengthened to prevent such a situation, the time between rounds becomes long and there is a problem that the digesting speed of the special game state is sacrificed.

In addition, since the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 are alternately opened, the processing time for the upper winning opening remaining ball and the lower winning opening remaining ball processing time are always secured sufficiently long. It is possible to Then, after the end of the special winning opening residual ball processing time, since the fraud monitoring period is set by the opening of the special variation winning device which has been processed for the special winning opening residual ball processing time, the special winning opening residual It is possible to prevent the occurrence of damage even if there is an act of illegally winning a game ball with respect to the special variation winning device maintaining the closed state after the end of the ball processing time.

From the above, the variable display game is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the game is controlled in the gaming machine which generates the special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. A first special variation winning device 3 that can be converted into a game control means (game control device 100) and a closed state in which the game ball can not win in the special game state and an open state in which the game ball can win
8 and the second special variation winning device 39, the gaming control means, in a special gaming state consisting of a plurality of rounds, in each round the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 The first special fluctuation winning apparatus 38 and the second special fluctuation winning apparatus 39 are controlled to be alternately opened every round by changing one of the above to open one for each round. In addition, based on the end of opening in the round, control to start the special winning opening remaining ball processing time that treats the detection of gaming balls that have flowed into the special variation winning device opened in the round as a normal winning, The remaining ball processing time is at least counted by a timer different from the timer for managing the opening time of the special variation winning device in the special game state (special figure game processing timer) The it has to perform.

Therefore, since the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 are alternately opened, it is possible to secure the special winning opening remaining ball processing time for the special variation winning device being closed, and the special winning opening remaining ball Since the processing time and the opening time of the special fluctuation winning device are managed independently, it is possible to appropriately manage the big winning opening residual ball processing time for the other special fluctuation winning device while one special fluctuation winning device is open, and closed. It is possible to prevent the fraudulent act against the special fluctuation winning device in the inside.

In addition, the game control means (game control device 100), from the end of the special winning opening residual ball processing time,
It is possible to invalidate the winning of the special fluctuation winning device until the special fluctuation winning device targeted for the special winning opening residual ball processing time is released. Therefore, it is possible to prevent cheating in the special game state.

[Special figure usual processing]
Next, the details of the special view routine process (step A11) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 39, in the special view ordinary processing, first, it is determined whether the special view 1 reserve number (first start memory number) and the special figure 2 reserve number (second start memory number) are both “0”. Do (step A3)
01). When the special figure 1 number of reservations and the special figure 2 number of reservations are not "0" (step A301; N)
That is, when at least one of the special drawing 1 pending number and the special figure 2 pending number is not 0, the flag is loaded from the fluctuation order flag storage area (for the total 1 pending number) (step A302).
It is determined whether it is a fluctuation of (step A303).

And, if the information of Special Figure 1 is stored in the case of fluctuation of Special Figure 1 (Step A 303; Y), that is, the information of Special Figure 1 is stored in the fluctuation order flag storage area (for the total number of reservations 1), A corresponding decoration special drawing reservation number command is prepared (step A304), and effect command setting processing (step A305) is performed. At this point in time, the special drawing 1 holding number is not subtracted, and a decoration special drawing holding number command corresponding to the current value of the special drawing 1 holding number-1 is prepared. And special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A306) is done, special figure normal processing ends.

On the other hand, when the information in Special Figure 2 is not stored in the special order 1 (step A 303; N), that is, when the information in Special Figure 2 is stored in the change order flag storage area (for the total number of reservations 1), Prepare the decoration special figure reservation number command to be done (step A307), rendering command setting processing (
Step A308) is performed. In addition, since the special figure 2 pending number is not subtracted at this time, the decoration special figure pending number command corresponding to the value of the present special figure 2 pending number -1 is prepared. And special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A309) is done, special figure normal processing ends.

Moreover, when both the number of special drawing 1 reservations and the number of special drawing 2 reservations are "0" (step A301; Y)
Determines whether the customer waiting demo has been started (step A310), and when the customer waiting demo has been started (step A310; Y), the process proceeds to step A314. If the customer waiting demo has not been started (step A310; N), the customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A311). Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A312), and an effect command setting process (step A313) is performed.

Next, set "0" relating to the special processing routine processing as the processing number (step A314), save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (step A315), and clear the variation symbol discrimination flag area ( Step A316). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A317), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower large winning a prize mouth fraud monitoring period flag region (step A318). The figure usually ends processing.

[Special figure 1 change start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A306) in the special figure normal process described above will be described. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 40, first, the type of the special view variation display game to be executed (here, the special view 1
) Is saved in the variation symbol discrimination flag area (step A321).
. Next, a game number command corresponding to the value of the game number area for managing the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game for changing the effect mode is prepared (step A322), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A323).

Thereafter, a big hit flag 1 setting process (step A324) is performed to set the shift information and the big hit information to the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the first special view variation display game is a big hit. Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A 325) according to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (pattern information), the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. An information setting process (step A326) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special drawing fluctuation display game is set. (Step A327). Thereafter, a fluctuation pattern setting process (step A328) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation aspect in the first special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting process for setting information on fluctuation start of the first special figure fluctuation display game (Step A329) is performed.

Next, “1” is set as the process number (step A330), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A331). Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A332), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 fluctuating signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A333). After that, save the in-fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A334), and select the initial value of the blinking control timer (special figure 1 indicator 51 blink period timer) in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area (step A334). Here, 100 ms) is set (step A 335), and an initial value (
Here, 0) is set (step A336), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is ended.

The initial value set in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area is 0, so that the variation indication is started from the state in which all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit in the state in which the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from the state in which all the segments are turned off.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A309) in the special figure normal process described above will be described. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process to be performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the process similar to the process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. It is done as.

As shown in FIG. 41, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, the special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step A341). Next, a game number command corresponding to the value of the game number area for managing the number of times of execution of the special view variation display game for changing the effect mode is prepared (step A342), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A343). After that, the big hit flag 2 setting process for setting the shift information and the big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether the second special view fluctuation display game is a big hit or not ((2)
Perform step A343).

Next, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process according to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (pattern information) (step A)
After performing 345), special figure information setting processing (step A346) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern is performed, and various settings relating to setting of variation patterns of the second special figure variation display game are performed. A special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referencing information is set, is prepared (step A347). Thereafter, a fluctuation pattern setting process (step A 348) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation aspect in the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting process for setting information on fluctuation start of the second special figure fluctuation display game (Step A349) is performed.

Next, “1” is set as the process number (step A350), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A351). Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A352), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 fluctuating signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A353). After that, save the in-fluctuating flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A354), and select the initial value of the blinking control timer (special figure 2 indicator 52 blink timer) in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area (step A354). Here, 100 ms) is set (step A 355), and an initial value (
Here, 0) is set (step A356), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is ended.

The initial value set in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area is 0, so that the variation indication is started from the state in which all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit in the state in which the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from the state in which all the segments are turned off.

[Big hit flag 1 setting processing]
In FIG. 42, the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above (step A)
324). In this big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step A 361). Next, RWM special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (
The big hit random number is loaded from preparation 1) and prepared (step A362), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for number 1 of reservations) is cleared to 0 (step A363). In addition, the number of reservations is 1
The “use” is an area for storing information (random numbers etc.) about the special figure 1 start storage which is the earliest among the special figure 1 in the digest order. Thereafter, a big hit determination process (step A364) is performed to determine whether the prepared big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value or not according to whether it is a big hit.

Then, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A364) is a big hit (step A365; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the outlier information was saved in step A361 (step A366) ), The big hit flag 1 setting process is ended. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A364) is not a big hit (step A365; N), the big hit flag 1 while the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1
End the setting process. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the first special view variation display game is one of “big hit” and “losing”.

[Big hit flag 2 setting processing]
In FIG. 43, the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above (step A
344). In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step A371). Next, RWM special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (
A big hit random number is loaded from preparation 1) and prepared (step A 372), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for number 1 reserve) is cleared to 0 (step A 373). In addition, the number of reservations is 1
The “use” is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure 2 start storage of the earliest among the special figure 2 in the digest order. Thereafter, a big hit determination process (step A 374) is performed to determine whether the prepared big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value or not according to whether it is a big hit.

If the determination result in the big hit determination process (step A 374) is a big hit (step A 375; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the out information was saved in step A 371 (step A 376) ), And the big hit flag 2 setting process is ended. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A 374) is not a big hit (step A 375; N), the big hit flag 2 while the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2
End the setting process. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the second special view variation display game is either “big hit” or “losing”.

[Big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 44 shows the big hit determination process (steps A364 and A374) in the above-mentioned big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process. In this big hit judgment process, first,
The lower limit judgment value of the jackpot judgment value is set (step A381), and it is judged whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower judgment value (step A382). Note that being a big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit judgment value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is not less than the lower judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and not more than the upper judgment value which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A 382; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A 387), and the big hit judgment processing is ended.
If the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step A 382; N), it is determined whether the state is a high probability state (step A 383). Then, if it is in the high probability state (step A383; Y), the upper limit judgment value in the high probability is set (step A384), and it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper judgment value (step A386). ). If the state is not the high probability state (step A383; N), the upper limit judgment value in the low probability is set (step A385), and it is judged whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A3)
86).

If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A 386; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A 357), and the big hit judgment processing is ended. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A 386; N), that is, if it is a big hit, a big hit is set as the judgment result (step A 388), and the big hit judgment processing is ended.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
In FIG. 45, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above (step A)
325). In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A 401), and if it is a big hit (step A 401; Y), the special figure 1 is
The big hit symbol random number is loaded from the big hit symbol random number storage area (for retention number 1) (step A4)
02). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step A403), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A404). This process selects the type of special result.

Thereafter, the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A405), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A406). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special view display (here, the special view 1 display 51) or a stop symbol on the display device 41.
Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A407). As the round number upper limit information area, 12R,
Either 5R or 4R is set.
Then, the special winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special winning opening opening information area (step A408), and the process proceeds to step A411. Big winning opening information is
This is information defining an opening pattern (see FIG. 7) in the special gaming state.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A401; N), the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A409), the off stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (Step A410), step A411.
Migrate to By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special view variable display game is set.

After that, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A411)
The decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (step A412), and effect command setting processing (step A413) is performed. The decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later.
Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A 414), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A 415). Stop symbol setting processing ends.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing]
FIG. 46 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above (step A
345). In this special view 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A431), and if it is a big hit (step A431; Y), the special figure 2 is
The big hit symbol random number is loaded from the big hit symbol random number storage area (for retention number 1) (step A4)
32). Next, the special figure 2 big hit design table is set (step A433), the stop design number which corresponds to the big hit design random number which is loaded is acquired, it saves in the special figure 2 stop design number territory (step A434). This process selects the type of special result.

Thereafter, the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A435), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A436). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special view display (here, the special view 2 display 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41.
Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A437). As the round number upper limit information area, 12R,
Either 5R or 4R is set.
Then, the special winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special winning opening opening information area (step A 438), and the process proceeds to step A 441. Big winning opening information is
This is information defining an opening pattern (see FIG. 7) in the special gaming state.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A431; N), the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A439), and the off stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (Step A440), step A441.
Migrate to By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special view variable display game is set.

After that, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A441).
The decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (step A442), and a rendering command setting process (step A443) is performed. The decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later.
Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A444), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A445). Stop symbol setting processing ends.

That is, the game control device 100 executes the first variation display game as a variation display game based on the detection of the gaming ball at the first start winning opening (starting entry 36), and the second start winning opening (normal variation winning) The variable display game execution means is configured to execute the second variable display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the gaming ball in the device 37). In addition, game control control 100, the decision expedient (
The variable display game execution control means is configured to control the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the game control device 100).

[Special map information setting process]
Next, the details of the above-mentioned special figure reservation information determination process, special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and special figure information setting process (step A170, A326, A346) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. As shown in FIG. 47, in the special view information setting process, first, the fluctuation group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and the fluctuation state group selection pointer corresponding to the probability state and the stop symbol pattern number is acquired (step A452) . Note that the probability state is any one of the low probability state and the non-short state, the high probability state and the short state, the low probability state, and the short state. In addition, stop design pattern number, off design, 12R probability variation design, 5R
The odd variation symbol, 5R normal symbol, 4R false variation symbol, 4R normal symbol is any of 0 to 5 corresponding to each.

Next, it is determined whether the stop symbol pattern is an out symbol (step A453), and if it is not an out symbol (step A453; N), that is, a big hit symbol, the pointer is saved in the variation group selection pointer area ( Step A455) The special drawing information setting process is ended.
In addition, when it is the off design (step A453; Y), the fluctuation group selection pointer is updated to the value which corresponds to the special figure 1 reservation number and the total value of the special figure 2 reservation number (step A454), fluctuation group selection pointer The pointer is saved in the area (step A455), and the special map information setting process is ended.
That is, if the result is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern is selected without considering the number of starting memories, and if the result is an outlier, the fluctuation pattern is selected in consideration of the number of starting memories. Step A45
At 4, the variation group selection pointer is updated in consideration of which one of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is to be processed and the current effect mode.

For example, when the processing mode is the special mode when the effect mode is the normal mode, the variation group is selected in consideration of the total number of pending numbers being 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 to 8 Update the pointer Also, if the processing target is the special figure 2 when the effect mode is the normal mode,
The variation group selection pointer is updated without considering the total number of pending numbers.
Then, when the processing mode is the special figure 1 when the effect mode is other than the normal mode, the variation group selection pointer is updated without considering the total number of holding numbers, and the effect mode is other than the normal mode When the processing target is the special view 2, the fluctuation group selection pointer is updated in consideration of which of the numbers 0 to 1, 2 to 8 the total number of reservations is.
In addition, the total number of the number of holdings is 0 when the starting memory is generated and the special figure variation display game is started with no starting memory (in the customer waiting demo) and the total number of holding numbers is Is a case where the special figure variation display game is started with one starting memory.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the above-mentioned special view reserve information determination process, special view 1 change start process, and special pattern 2 change start process (steps A171, A328, A348) will be described. As shown in FIG. 48, in the fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the fluctuation group address table is set (step A461), and the address of the fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation group selection pointer is acquired and prepared (step A462), Load and prepare variation pattern random number 1 from the target variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for number of reservations 1) (step A4)
63).

Then, 2-byte distribution processing (step A464) is performed to acquire and prepare the address of the variation pattern selection table obtained as a result of the distribution (step A465),
Load the variation pattern random number 2 from the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the hold number 1),
Prepare (step A466). Then, distribution processing (step A 467) is performed, and the fluctuation pattern number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the fluctuation pattern number area, and the fluctuation pattern setting processing is ended. By this processing, the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game such as the presence or absence of the reach and the type of the reach is set. That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes a variation pattern setting unit that sets a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of a game, from a plurality of patterns.

[2-byte distribution process]
FIG. 49 shows 2-byte distribution processing (step A) in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern setting processing.
464). The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting a variation pattern selection table of the special figure variation display game from the variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

In this 2-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether the head data of the selection table (the variation group table prepared in step A 462) is a code without distribution (ie, "0") (step A 471). Here, the fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one fluctuation pattern selection table, but the fluctuation group table defines only the fluctuation pattern selection table in which the fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. (For example, in the case of a partial change group table in the case where the result is a loss), there is no need to distribute, so a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is specified at the top.

Then, if the first data in the selection table (the change group table) is a code without distribution (step A 472; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result is updated (step A 477) to distribute 2 bytes. End the process.
On the other hand, when the first data in the selection table (variation group table) is not a code without distribution (step A 472; N), one distribution value defined first in the selection table (variation group table) is acquired ( Step A 473).

Subsequently, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A 473 from the random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) prepared in step A 463 (step A 474)
), Determine whether the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A 475)
.
Then, if the new random number value is not smaller than “0” (step A 475; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A 476), the process proceeds to step A 473. Do the processing. That is, the distribution value defined next in the selection table (variation group table) is acquired (step A 473), and then the distribution value is subtracted from the random number value determined in the previous step A 475 to generate a new randomness. A numerical value is calculated (step A 474), and it is determined whether the calculated new random value is smaller than "0" (
Step A 475).

The above process is executed until it is determined in step A475 that the new random value is smaller than "0" (step A475; Y). Thereby, any one variation pattern selection table is selected from at least one variation pattern selection table defined in the selection table (variation group table).
Then, if it is determined in step A 475 that the new random value is smaller than "0" (step A 475; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result is updated (step A 477), and 2-byte distribution processing is performed. Finish.

The distribution process of step A 467 in the above-described fluctuation pattern setting process is the same process as the above-described two-byte distribution process. However, program instructions for calculation differ in that the size of the random number used for distribution is 1 byte or 2 bytes.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting process (steps A329 and A349) in the above-mentioned special drawing 1 fluctuation start process and special drawing 2 fluctuation start process will be described. As shown in FIG. 50, in the change start information setting process, first, the random number storage area of the target change pattern random numbers 1 and 2 is cleared (step A491).
Next, a fluctuation time value table is set (step A492), and fluctuation time values corresponding to fluctuation pattern numbers are acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A493).
Thereafter, the variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern number is prepared (step A494), and a rendering command setting process is performed (step A495).

Next, the special figure reservation number corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is updated by 1 (step A 496)
, Set the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag (step A 497)
). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step A 498), and the free space after the shift is cleared (step A 499). Then, the variation order flag storage area is shifted (step A500), the free space after the shift is cleared (step A501), and the variation start information setting process is ended.

Information on the start of the special view variable display game is set by the above process. That is,
The game control device 100 serves as a determination means for determining various random number values stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Further, the game control apparatus 100 forms a variation pattern determination unit capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

Then, the information on the start of the special view variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information on the start of the special view variation display game. The detailed effect contents in the special figure variation display game are set. As information related to the start of these special view variation display games, an ornament special drawing reservation number command including information on the number of starting memories (number of reservations), an ornament special view command including information on stop symbols, variation of the special view variation display game A variation command including information on a pattern is mentioned, and the command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special drawing command earlier than the change command, the process in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Process during special figure change]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A12) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 51, in the special figure variation processing, first, as information for stopping the variation display, prepare a symbol stop command corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag (step A601).
Then, effect command setting processing is performed (step A602).
Next, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A604). In the case of this embodiment, if the stop symbol pattern is a detached symbol pattern, the display time is 800 m.
Set seconds, and if the stop symbol pattern is a big hit symbol pattern, display time is 20
Set 00 ms. That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes stop time setting means for setting the stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

Thereafter, the processing number "2" relating to the processing during special view display is set (step A605), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A606).
Next, save the signal related to the end of fluctuation of Special Figure 1 (for example, the signal during special symbol 1 fluctuation is OFF) in the test signal output data area (Step A 607), and the signal related to the end of fluctuation of Special Figure 2 (for example, special symbol 2) Save the fluctuation signal in the test signal output data area (Step A608) and set the number of times the symbol is determined to the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game for output to the external information terminal. A value (for example, 256 ms) is saved (step A 609).

After that, as the information for controlling the first special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51, save the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 1 display 51 in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (
Step A610) As the information for controlling the second special view fluctuation display game in the special view 2 display 52, save the stop flag relating to the fluctuation stop in the special view 2 display 52 in the special view 2 fluctuation control flag area Then (step A611), the special figure display processing is ended.

[Process while displaying special map]
Next, the details of the special figure display processing (step A13) in the special figure game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 52, in the special figure display processing, first, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 change start process, and the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 change start process The big hit flag 2 which is set in is loaded (step A701), and the big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM are cleared (step A702).
Then, it is judged whether the big hit flag 2 loaded is a big hit (step A 703), and if it is determined that it is a big hit (step A 703; Y), the big hit of the second special view fluctuation display game (
Save the test signal (for example, signal ON during condition device operation, signal ON during continuous item operation device ON, signal per special symbol 2) in the test signal output data area of RWM for the start of the special figure 2 big hit Then, the round number upper limit table is set (step A 707).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A703 that the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit as a result of the check of the big hit flag 2 (step A 703; N), it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (
Step A704) If it is determined that it is a big hit (step A704; Y), the test signal (for example, the condition device in operation signal ON), the feature, regarding the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the first special figure fluctuation display game Continuous operation device ON signal during operation, special symbol 1 signal ON)) RW
The data is saved in the M test signal output data area (step A705), and a process of setting a round number upper limit table (step A707) is performed.

After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A 707), the round number upper limit (in the case of this embodiment, any of 12, 5 or 4) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired, It saves in the round number upper limit value area of RWM (step A 708). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired, and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A709).

Next, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decoration special drawing command area of RWM and prepared (step A710), and a rendering command setting process (step A71)
Do 1).
After that, prepare a probability information command relating to the information that makes the probability of being a hit result in the common drawing fluctuation display game and the special drawing fluctuation display game the normal probability state (low probability state) (step A 712)
And effect command setting processing (step A 713).
Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special view 1 or special view 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A 714)
And effect command setting processing (step A 715).

Next, a signal corresponding to the special winning opening open information and the probability of being hit in the common view variation display game and the special view variation display game is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A716). Thereafter, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A717). As a result, information on the probability state and the time saving state of the special view when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

And the big hit fanfare time corresponding to the stop design pattern (here 100ms
, 2500 ms or 500 ms) in the special figure game processing timer area (step A 718), and the fanfare / interval processing shift setting process 1 (step A 71)
9) and finish the processing while displaying the special map. That is, based on the game control device 100 becoming a special result in any of the first special view variation display game and the second special view variation display game,
A special gaming state generating means is provided which generates a special gaming state for converting the first special fluctuation winning device 38 or the second special fluctuation winning device 39 into the open state.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit in step A704 (step A 704)
N performs time reduction variation number update processing (step A 720) to manage the period of high probability state and time reduction state, and special figure game information check processing (step A 7) related to setting of the effect mode
Do 21). Next, "0" related to the special processing routine processing is set as the processing number (step A7)
22) Save the process number in the special figure game process number area (step A723), clear the variation symbol determination flag area (step A724), and end the special figure display processing.

[Time reduction variation update process]
Next, the processing for updating the number of times for shortening time change in the processing while displaying the special drawing (step A720)
Explain the details of. As shown in FIG. 53, in the time reduction variation update process, first,
It is determined whether the special drawing time is in the middle of a short time (in the short time state) (step A751). When it is not during the special drawing time (step A 751: N), the time shortening variation number updating process is ended. If the special figure time is short (step A 751; Y), it is determined whether the special figure high probability is in progress (high probability state) (step A 752). When it is not in the special figure high probability (step A 752; N),
It transfers to step A757. In addition, when special figure high probability is under (step A752; Y)
The value of the high probability change number is updated by 1 (step A 753), and it is determined whether the high probability change number has become “0” (step A 754).

If the high probability fluctuation number is not “0” (step A 754; N), the process shifts to step A 757. Also, if the high probability fluctuation number becomes “0” (step A 754; Y), that is, if the high probability state ends in the current special feature fluctuation display game, the high probability notification flag area is cleared (step A755), clear the positive variation operation area passing information area (step A7)
56), Go to step A757. The information of the probability variation operation area passing information area is cleared by this processing or by turning on the power of the gaming machine.

Next, the time reduction variation number is updated by -1 (step A757), and the time reduction variation number
It is determined whether it is 0 "(step A758). If the time reduction variation count is not “0” (step A 758; N), the time reduction variation count update process is ended. In addition, when the number of time reduction variations becomes “0” (step A758; Y), that is, when the time saving state ends in the current special view fluctuation display game, a signal related to time saving end (for example, 2 big hit signals OF
F) is saved in the external information output data area (step A759).

Next, a signal relating to the high probability & the end of the short time is saved in the test signal output data area (step A760). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the high probability state and the short state are ended by executing the special figure variation display game the same number of times, so the number of times of high probability variation becomes zero. Also, the number of time shortening fluctuations becomes zero, and the high probability state and the time saving state are simultaneously ended. In step A760, for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OF
F, set special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal OFF, set normal symbol 1 high probability state signal OFF. Since the ordinary drawing only changes the probability state even when the special drawing is in the high probability state, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the normal electric combination 1 open extension state signal are always off.

Next, save the number without time saving in the gaming state display number area (step A 761), save the general drawing low probability flag in the general drawing game mode flag area (step A 762), and make special drawing in the special drawing game mode flag area. Save the low probability & time saving none flag (step A 763)
). Further, save a signal (for example, the launch position designation signal 1 is OFF) relating to the left hitting instruction in the test signal output data area (step A764), and display the LED during right hitting (for example, the second gaming state display unit 77). In order to extinguish the game, the number in the left hitting state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A 765), and the time reduction variation number updating process is ended.

[Special figure game information check processing]
Next, the special figure game information check process in the above-mentioned special figure display processing (step A721)
Explain the details of. As shown in FIG. 54, in the special view gaming information check process, first,
It is determined whether the next mode transition information is a code without update (step A771).
If the next mode transition information is the no update code (step A771; Y), the special figure gaming information check process is ended. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of executed special figure variation display games.

If the next mode transition information is not a no update code (step A771; N), the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game up to the change of the effect mode is updated by -1.
Step A772) It is determined whether the number of games has become "0" (Step A773). When the number of times of playing is not "0" (step A773; N), the special figure gaming information check process is ended. If the number of games has become "0" (step A773; Y), that is, if the effect mode is to be changed from the next special image variation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (step A774), and the next The address of the table corresponding to the mode transition information is acquired (step A775).

Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, and saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A 776), and the number of games in the effect mode to be transferred is acquired.
The game is saved in the number-of-games area (step A778), the next mode shift information of the effect mode to be shifted is acquired, and the next mode shift information area in the RWM is saved (step A779).
Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the newly set effect mode number is prepared (step A 780), and the prepared probability information command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A 781). Perform step A 782).

Next, a game number command corresponding to the newly set game number is prepared (step A783), effect command setting processing (step A784) is performed, and the special view game information check processing is ended. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of giving notice of switching from before the specified number of revolutions of switching of the effect mode. As described above, by managing the effect mode in the game control apparatus 100, for example, control such as generating a specific reach can be performed only in a specific effect mode, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Fanfare / Intermediate process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / inter-interval process shift setting process 1 (step A 719) in the above-described special-image display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 55, in the fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing 1, first, the processing number relating to the fanfare / interval processing is set (step A 791), and processing is performed in the special figure game processing number area. Save the number (step A 792).

Next, a signal related to the end of the high probability state and the short time state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal OF
F, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A793). Since the ordinary drawing only changes the probability state even when the special drawing is in the high probability state, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the normal electric combination 1 open extension state signal are always off.
Thereafter, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special gaming state is cleared (step A 794), and a number with no time saving is saved in the gaming state display number area (step A 795). The general drawing low probability flag is saved in the area (step A796).

Then, the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A 797), and the high probability notification flag is used to turn off the gaming state display LED (third gaming state display unit 78) provided on the gaming board 30 related to the high probability state display. The area is cleared (step A798), and the special figure low probability & time saving none flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A799).

Next, clear the high probability fluctuation number area for managing the number of the special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in the high probability state to 0 (Step A800), and manage the number of the special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in the short time state The time reduction variation number area is cleared to 0 (step A801). Then, the normal mode number is saved in the effect mode number area (step A 802), the game number area is cleared to 0 (step A 803), and the no-update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (
Step A 804). Thereafter, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery time transmission command area for saving the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A805). As a result, the high probability state and the short time state are ended, and the normal probability state and the normal state are obtained. Also, with the occurrence of the special game state, the information on the effect mode is once cleared.

Then, save a signal (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is ON) relating to a right-handed command in the test signal output data area (step A806), and display LED during right-handing (for example, second gaming state display unit 77). In order to light up, save the number in the right-handed state in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A 807), and set the fanfare / interval processing transition setting process 1
Finish.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
Next, details of the fanfare / in-interval process (step A14) in the above-described special view game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 56, in the fanfare / interval processing, it is first determined whether it is the start of the odd round which is the round for opening the first special variation winning device 38 (step A851). (Step A 851; N), that is, in the case of an even round of opening the second special variation winning device 39, the process proceeds to Step A 853. Also, if it is the start of the odd round (Step A
851; Y) determines whether the remaining ball counter managing the number of gaming balls remaining in the upper channel 38j of the first special variation winning device 38 is 0 (step A852).

If the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step A852; N), the processing is ended during fanfare / interval. That is, when the gaming ball remains in the upper channel 38j, the first
When the special variation winning device 38 is opened, the remaining balls may flow into the positive variation area 38h. In particular, since the gaming balls are likely to flow into the probability variation operation area 38 h immediately after the first special variation winning device 38 is opened, the possibility of being in a high probability state is very high. Therefore, the upper channel 38
If there is a remaining ball in j, that is, if there is a game ball which may flow into the definite change operating area 38h which forms a specific area in the first special change winning device 38, then this definite change operating area 38h
It is arranged to wait for the start of the round for opening the first special variation winning device 38 until it is confirmed that there is no gaming ball which may flow into the game. In the case of an even round opening the second special variation winning device 39, the round is started regardless of the presence or absence of the gaming ball in the second special variation winning device 39.

When the remaining ball counter is 0 (step A 852; Y), the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step A 853), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step A). A 854), rendering command setting process (step A 85)
Do 5).
Thereafter, a special winning opening opening table is set (step A 856), and special winning opening opening information and large winning opening opening data corresponding to the number of rounds are obtained and saved (step A 857). The special winning opening open data is data indicating which one of the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 is to be opened, and an opening mode such as an opening time.

Then, the current round number in the special gaming state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value of the round number upper limit value area of RWM to determine whether the current round is the final round (
Step A858), if it is the final round (step A858; Y), step A
Migrate to 863. If it is not the final round (step A 858; N), it is determined whether it is a lever solenoid operation round (step A 859). The lever solenoid operation round is a round in which the lever solenoid 38f is operated to operate the lever member 38i, and in the case of this embodiment, it is only a specific round of the first round.

If it is the lever solenoid operation round (step A 859; Y), the operation data of the lever solenoid is set (step A 860), and the process proceeds to step A 863. Thus, data is set in the lever solenoid control pointer area, and the lever solenoid control timer is cleared.

Also, if it is not the lever solenoid operation round (step A 859; N), it is determined whether it is the start of the odd round (step A 861), and if it is not the start of the odd round (step A 861)
Step A861; N) proceeds to step A863. In this case, the second special variation winning device 39 is opened. Also, if it is the start of the odd round (step A8
61; Y) sets the stop data of the lever solenoid (step A862), and proceeds to step A863. In this case, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened but the lever solenoid 38f is not operated.

Thereafter, the special winning opening opening time corresponding to the special winning opening opening data is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A863), and the hit start pointer value corresponding to the special winning opening opening data is acquired Save to the control pointer area (step A864). Furthermore, the hit end pointer value corresponding to the big winning opening opening data is acquired and saved in the end pointer area for the special view hit (step A865), and it is determined whether it is the start of the odd round (step A86)
7).

Then, when it is not the start of the odd round (step A867; N), the special winning opening open processing transition setting process 1 is performed (step A868), and the fanfare / interval middle processing is ended. If it is the start of the odd round (step A867; Y), the special winning opening open processing transition setting process 2 is performed (step A868), and the fanfare / interval middle processing ends.

In step A852, it is confirmed whether the remaining ball counter is 0. In addition to this, it is confirmed whether the discharged ball counter is 0. If it is not 0, the processing after step A853 is not performed. You may That is, the round may be started after it is confirmed that all the gaming balls in the first special variation winning device 38 have been discharged.

From the above, the variable display game is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the game is controlled in the gaming machine which generates the special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. It is possible to convert the game control means (game control device 100), the closed state where the game ball can not win in the special game state and the open state where the game ball can win, and the specific area where the game ball can flow into The first special variation winning device 38 having the probability change operation area 38h), the closed state in which the gaming ball can not win in the special gaming state, and the open state in which the gaming ball can win in the winning state; (2) The special variation winning device 39, The gaming control means is based on the fact that the gaming ball that has won the first special variation winning device 38 flows into the specific area, from the case where the gaming ball does not flow into the specific area It is possible to generate a gaming state advantageous to the player after the end of the special gaming state, and in the special gaming state constituted by a plurality of rounds, in each round, the first special fluctuation winning device 38 and the second special fluctuation winning device 39 The first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 are controlled so as to be alternately opened every round by changing one of the two special variation winning devices which are opened every round. First special variation winning device 3
When starting the round of opening 8, wait for the start of the round until it is confirmed that there is no gaming ball which may flow into the specific area in the first special variation winning device 38 It will be done.

Therefore, since it waits for the start of the round which opens the first special variation winning device 38 until it is confirmed that there is no gaming ball which may flow into the specific area, fairness of the game can be secured. .

In addition, when the game control means (game control device 100) starts the round for opening the second special variation winning device 39, is all the gaming balls flowing into the second special variation winning device 39 discharged? The round is to be started regardless of whether or not it is. Therefore, when the second special variation winning device 39 not having the specific area is opened, it is opened even without confirmation of the discharge, so that the special gaming state can be quickly digested.

Further, it may be determined in step A 851 whether the start of the specific round is to be made, and it may be confirmed whether the remaining ball counter is 0 only in the case of the start of the specific round. That is, a game control means for controlling a game in a game machine which executes a variable display game based on establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result. (Play control device 100), a special game state can be converted to a closed state where the game ball can not win a prize and an open state where the game ball can win a prize, and a specific area (probable change operation area) where the game ball can flow into 38h) A first special variation winning device 38, a second special variation that can be converted into a closed state where the gaming ball can not win a prize in the special gaming state and an open state where the gaming ball can win a prize, and does not have a specific area The game control means is provided with a winning device 39, and based on the fact that the gaming ball that has won the first special variation winning device 38 flows into the specific area, the game is played more than when the gaming ball does not flow into the specific area Can be generated after the end of the special gaming state, in the special gaming state consisting of a plurality of rounds, in each round the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 First special variation winning device 38 and second special variation winning device 39 by opening one of the two and changing the special variation winning device to be opened every round.
Control to open alternately every round, and in the special game state, the first
It controlled to execute the round which opens special fluctuation winning a prize device 38 multiple times, it flowed into 1st special fluctuation winning a prize device 38 in the specific round of the plural round which opens the 1st special fluctuation winning a prize device 38 It is configured to determine whether the gaming ball has flowed into the specific area, and when starting the specific round, there is no gaming ball that may flow into the specific area in the first special variation winning device 38 It may be possible to wait for the start of the particular round until it is confirmed. By doing this, since the start of the specific round is waited until it is confirmed that there is no gaming ball that may flow into the specific area, fairness of the game can be secured.

Furthermore, it is determined in step A 851 whether it is a round to open the first special variation winning device 38 following the start of a specific round or a specific round, and is the remaining ball counter 0 only if it is the start of these rounds? You may make it confirm. That is, when the game control means (game control device 100) starts the round for opening the first special variation winning device 38 after the specific round, the specific area (probability change operation in the first special variation winning device 38) The start of the round may be waited until it is confirmed that there is no gaming ball which may flow into the area 38h). In this way, since it waits until it is determined whether or not the gaming ball which has flowed in the specific round has flowed into the specific area, it is possible to secure the fairness of the game.

Further, when the remaining ball counter is not 0, the start of the round is waited, but when the remaining ball counter is not 0, the start of the special game state may be kept waiting. That is, the game control means (game control device 100) does not have a game ball which may flow into the specific area in the first special fluctuation winning device 38 when the result of the fluctuation display game is a special result. It may be possible to wait for the start of the special game state until it is confirmed. Therefore, the first special variation winning device 38 is not opened until it is confirmed that there is no gaming ball which may flow into the specific area, and the fairness of the game can be secured.

In addition, when it is determined that the remaining ball counter is not 0 at the start of the round for opening the first special variation winning device 38 other than the specific round, the second special variation winning device 3 in that round.
9 may be opened. Also, if the specific round is a round other than the first round and the remaining ball counter is not 0 at the start of the round for opening the first special variation winning prize apparatus 38 (it may be only at the start of the specific round) A plurality of consecutive rounds immediately before the specific round may be a round of opening the second special variation winning device 39, as waiting for the start. By doing this, a sufficient time can be secured before the start of a specific round, and the remaining balls can be reliably discharged. Furthermore, a plurality of successive rounds immediately after the specific round may be a round in which the second special variation winning device 39 is opened.

[In process opening setting process 1 during the big winning opening open]
FIG. 57 shows the process transition setting process 1 (step A868) during the opening of the special winning opening in the above-mentioned fanfare / interval process. This special winning opening open processing transition processing setting processing 1
First, set the process number to "4" for the process of opening the special winning opening (step A).
871), Save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (step A872).
Thereafter, the information on the large winning opening count number area storing the number of winnings to the special winning opening is cleared (step A 873), and a signal related to the opening start of the upper large winning opening ) In the test signal output data area (step A874).

Then, the upper winning prize opening on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A875), and the upper winning prize opening operating information is saved in the upper winning prize opening status flag area (step A876).
Next, clear the upper prize winning opening illegal prize number area to 0 (step A 877), save the fraud monitoring out-of-time flag in the upper prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A 878), The processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step A879), and the special winning opening open processing transition processing setting processing 1 is ended.

[In process opening setting process 2 during the big winning opening open]
FIG. 58 shows the process setting process 2 (step A869) during the opening of the special winning opening in the above-mentioned fanfare / interval process. This special winning opening open processing transition processing setting processing 2
First, set the process number to "4" for the process of opening the special winning opening (step A).
881), Save the process number in the special figure game process number area (step A 882).
Then, clear the information of the large winning a prize opening count number territory which remembers the winning a prize number to the special winning a prize opening (step A883), the signal regarding opening opening of the lower large winning a prize mouth (for example ) In the test signal output data area (step A884).

The lower winning prize on data is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (step A885), and the information on the lower winning prize opening is saved in the lower winning prize state flag area (step A886).
Next, the lower prize winning opening incorrect winning number area is cleared to 0 (step A 887), and the fraud monitoring out-of-time flag is saved in the lower big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A 888). The processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step A889), and the special winning opening open processing transition processing setting processing 2 is ended.

[Big winning opening open processing]
Next, the details of the special winning opening open process (step A15) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 59, in the special winning opening open process, first, it is determined whether the special winning opening open data has a pattern to be opened and closed (step A901). The pattern to be opened and closed is an open pattern which is opened and closed in one round, and in the present embodiment, the lower V is opened (see FIG. 8).
If the special winning opening open data is a pattern to open and close (step A901; Y), the special pointer is loaded and prepared during the special view (step A902), and the loaded value is equal to or higher than the end pointer per special figure. It is determined whether there is any (step A903).

And, when the loaded value is not more than the value of the end pointer per special drawing (step A903)
N), that is, when the open / close operation is still performed in the currently running round, the value of the control pointer area is updated by +1 per special figure (step A 904), and the big hit operation shift setting process is performed (step A 905) The special winning opening open processing ends.

As shown in FIG. 60, in the big hit operation shift setting process, the branch process by the control pointer is performed during the special figure (step A921).
If the value of the control pointer is 0 during the special drawing, the wait time (here, 2700 ms
) Is saved in the special view game processing timer area (step A 922), and the lower special winning opening off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area in order to close the first special variation winning apparatus 38 (step A923), the big hit operation shift setting processing ends.

Also, when the value of the control pointer during special drawing is 1, the big hit V second half opening time (here, 25000 ms) is saved in the special drawing game processing timer area (step A 924),
In order to open the special variation winning device 38, the lower large winning opening on data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A925), and the big hit operation shift setting processing is ended.

Referring back to FIG. 59, if the special winning opening open data is not a pattern to open and close (step A901)
; N) or when the loaded value is equal to or greater than the value of the end pointer per special drawing (step A903)
Y) determines whether the current round is the final round by comparing the current number of rounds in the special gaming state being executed with the upper limit number of rounds in the RWM upper limit number area (step A 906) .

Then, if it is not the final round (step A 906; N), an interval time (here 300 ms, 900 ms or 1300) corresponding to the big winning opening opening data and the number of rounds.
Save any of ms) in the special figure game processing timer area (step A 907), prepare an interval command (step A 908), and perform rendering command setting processing (step A 909). Further, the processing number is set to "3" for the fanfare / interval processing (step A910), and the process proceeds to step A915.

Also, if it is the final round (step A906; Y), save the remaining ball processing time (here, either 1300 ms or 1700 ms) corresponding to the big winning opening open data in the special figure game processing timer area (step A911) ), Prepare an ending command (step A912), and perform effect command setting processing (step A913). Further, the processing number is set to "5" for the special winning opening residual ball processing (step A914), step A9.
Migrate to 15.

Then, the special winning opening residual ball processing time corresponding to the special winning opening opening data and the number of rounds is saved in the special winning opening residual ball processing timer area (step A915). In this process, when the round to be ended is a round for opening the first special variation winning device 38, the initial value of the lower large winning opening remaining ball processing time is saved in the lower large winning opening remaining ball processing timer area. Also, if the round to be ended is a round for opening the second special variation winning device 39, the initial value of the upper large winning opening remaining ball processing time is saved in the upper large winning opening remaining ball processing timer area.

After that, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A 916), and the second large floating winning apparatus 38 is opened or closed 38c or the second special floating winning apparatus 39 is closed. Save the off data for turning off the winning opening solenoid 38 b and the upper large winning opening solenoid 39 b in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A 917)
), Finish the processing during the special winning opening open. In step A917, the off data of the lower large winning opening solenoid 38b and the upper large winning opening solenoid 39b is set, but only the OFF data of the large winning opening solenoid of the special variation winning device during opening is set. You may do so.

[Big win mouth remaining ball processing]
Next, the details of the special winning opening remaining ball processing (step A16) in the special drawing game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 61, in the special winning opening residual ball processing, first, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball counter managing the number of gaming balls remaining in the upper flow passage 38j of the first special variation winning device 38 is 0 ( Step A951), when the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step A951; N)
) Ends the special winning opening residual ball processing. In other words, the special game state is prevented from ending from the special winning opening residual ball processing until all the gaming balls in the upper channel 38j of the first special variation winning device 38 are discharged.

When the remaining ball counter is 0 (step A 951: Y), “6” is set as the process number related to the big hit end process (step A 952), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area ( Step A953). Thereafter, an ending time (here, 100 ms, 2300 ms or 2700 ms) corresponding to the special winning opening data is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A 954).

Next, clear the information on the large winning opening count number area storing the winning number to the special winning opening (step A 955), clear the information on the round number area storing the round number of the special gaming state (step A 956) ), Clear the information of the round number upper limit area storing the upper limit value of the round number of the special gaming state (step A 957). Then, clear the information of the special winning opening opening information area storing the opening information determination flag of the special winning opening (step A 956), clear the control pointer area during special drawing (step A 957), and hit special drawing The end pointer area is cleared (step A958), and the special winning opening remaining ball processing is ended.

From the above, when the game control means (game control device 100) ends the special game state, the game having the possibility of flowing into the specific area (probability change operation area 38h) in the first special variation winning device 38 This means that the special gaming state is not ended until it is confirmed that there is no ball. Therefore, the game ball can be prevented from remaining until the next special game state, and fairness of the game can be secured. In step A951, it is confirmed whether the remaining ball counter is 0. In addition to this, it is confirmed whether the discharged ball counter is 0. If it is not 0, the processing after step A952 is not performed. It is good. That is, the special gaming state may be ended after it is confirmed that all the gaming balls in the first special variation winning device 38 have been discharged.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, details of the big hit end process (step A17) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 62, in this big hit end processing, first, the flag is loaded from the special view game mode flag save area (step A1001), and the special game state of this time is based on hit in high probability & time reduction It is determined whether or not (step A1002).
If the special gaming state this time is not based on high probability & hourly hit (step A1002; N), it is determined whether the big hit symbol is the V easy symbol (step A1003)
). The V-easy symbol is a symbol corresponding to 12R positive variation, 5R positive variation, 4R positive variation.

If the big hit symbol is not a V easy symbol (step A1003; N), prepare information of the time saving mode B start as an effect mode after the end of the special game state (step A1004), and shift to step A1006.
In addition, if the special game state this time is based on high probability & hourly hit (step A1002; Y), or if the big hit symbol is V easy symbol (step A1003;
Y) prepares information on the start of the time saving mode A as an effect mode after the end of the special gaming state (step A1005), and proceeds to step A1006.

Then, it is determined whether there is a probability variation operation area passing information set when the gaming ball flows into the probability variation operation area 38h (step A1006).
When there is no probability change operation area passage information (step A1006; N), the big hit end setting process 1 is performed (step A1007), and the process proceeds to step A1010. In this case, the high probability state is not reached.
In addition, when there is a definite change operation area passage information (step A1006; Y), big hit end setting processing 2 is done (step A1008), the information which is prepared as the production mode after the end of the special game state ST mode (ST mode A Or B) (step A1009), and the process proceeds to step A1010. In this case, there is a high probability state. That is, regardless of the jackpot symbol, when the gaming ball flows into the probability change operation area 38h, a high probability state is obtained.

Thereafter, a presentation mode information address table is set (step A1010), and the address of the table corresponding to the prepared information is acquired (step A1011). Then, from these pieces of information, the effect mode number of the effect mode after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved (
Step A1012) Obtain and save the number of games in the effect mode after the end of the special game state (step A1013), obtain and save the next mode transition information of the effect mode after the end of the special game state (step A1014 ). Further, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1015), and the command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1016).

Next, the probability change operation area 38h in the special gaming state based on the jackpot symbol that is not a V easy symbol
It is determined whether or not the probability variation operation area irregular passage, which is the inflow of gaming balls to the vehicle (step A)
1017). And when it does not pass through the definite variation operation area irregularly (step A1017;
N) Go to step A1019. If the probability variation operation area is irregularly passed (step A1017; Y), the irregular probability variation information is added to the probability information command (step A1018), and the process proceeds to step A1019. Then, rendering command setting processing is performed (step A1019), and the probability information command is transmitted to the rendering control apparatus 300.
As the probability information command transmitted here, there are a plurality of commands including information of the rendering mode in either “high probability / time short” or “low probability / time short”, and the probability variation operation area irregular pass In the case of, irregular probability information is added.
Then, a game number command corresponding to the game number is prepared (step A1020), and a rendering command setting process is performed (step A1021).

Next, “0” is set as a process number related to the special figure routine process (step A 1022), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A 1023).
After that, save the signal related to the end of the big hit (for example, the big hit 1 signal OFF, big hit 3 signal OFF, big hit 4 signal OFF) in the external information output data area (step A1)
024), the signal about the end of the big hit (for example, the signal during the condition device operation is OFF, the signal during the continuous action device operation is OFF, the signal for the special symbol 1 is OFF, the signal for the special symbol 2 is OF
F) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1025).

Subsequently, the information of the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is cleared (step A1026), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag region (step A1027). A flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1028). Then, the information of the probability variation operation area passage information area is cleared (step A1029), the information of the special view game mode flag save area is cleared (step A1030), and the big hit end process is ended.

If the special game state this time is based on the high probability state or the short time state, the ST mode may be set as the effect mode regardless of the presence or absence of the probability variation operation area passing information. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the big hit in the first special view variation display game, it becomes the V easy symbol with a predetermined probability, and when it becomes the big hit in the second special figure variation display game, it is all the V easy symbols and Become. In the high probability state or the time saving state, the game is progressed by right-handing, so basically only the second special view fluctuation display game is executed, all the big hit in the high probability state or the time saving state is V easy symbol It should be However, in the case of big hit in the first special view variation display game based on the first starting memory that was present at the time of big hit occurrence, despite the high probability state or time saving state does not become V easy symbol at a predetermined ratio Sometimes.

A player who is not familiar with the contents of the game may understand that all the big hits in the high probability state or in the time saving state will be the V-easiness symbol, and there is a possibility that they may have a distrust of not becoming the ST mode. In the case of a big hit during the high probability state or during the short time state, it is possible to prevent such disbelief by transitioning to the ST mode. It should be noted that since the ST mode ends without generating a big hit at a predetermined rate even in the high probability state, S in the low probability state
Even if the T mode is selected, a sense of discomfort does not occur because a big hit does not occur in the ST mode.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
In FIG. 63, the big hit end setting process 1 (step A100) in the above-mentioned big hit end process
7) is shown. In the big hit end setting process 1, first, a signal related to the start of a short time (for example, the big hit 2 signal is ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1041).
. Since the signal regarding the start of the short time is output from the big hit, it is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous manner.
Next, the signal related to the low probability & the start of the short (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal O
FF, special symbol 2 high probability status signal OFF, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening status signal ON, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening status signal ON, normal symbol 1 high probability status signal ON) test signal output data area (Step A1042).

Next, save the time-saving number in the game state display number area (step A1043), save the common drawing high probability flag in the common drawing game mode flag area (step A1044), and select the special drawing game mode flag area. Save the low probability & time saving flag (step A10)
45). Thereafter, the high probability change frequency area is cleared to 0 (step A1046), the initial value (here 100 times) is saved in the time reduction change frequency area (step A1047), and the big hit end setting process 1 is ended.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
In FIG. 64, the big hit end setting process 2 (step A100) in the above-mentioned big hit end process
8) is shown. In this big hit end setting process 2, first, a signal (for example, big hit 2 signal ON) regarding the start of time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step A1051).
. Since the signal regarding the start of the short time is output from the big hit, it is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous manner.
Then, a signal related to the start of high probability & short time (for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal ON, special symbol 2 high probability state signal ON, special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal ON, special symbol 2 fluctuation time The shortening status signal is ON, and the normal symbol 1 high probability status signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1052).

Next, save the number with time reduction in the gaming state display number area (step A1053), save the general drawing high probability flag in the general drawing game mode flag area (step A1054), and save the special drawing game mode flag area. Save the figure high probability & time saving flag (step A10)
55). After that, save the initial value (100 times here) in the high probability change frequency area (step A1056), save the initial value (100 times here) in the time shortening change frequency area (step A1057), and set the big hit end End processing 2. In addition, while progressing the game by right hitting during the time saving state, since it is instructed to hit the right from the special gaming state, in the big hit end setting processing 1 and 2 the setting regarding instructing the right hitting is performed Absent.

That is, the game control apparatus 100 forms a specific gaming state generation means capable of generating a specific gaming state (time reduction state) over a predetermined period determined in advance after the end of the special gaming state. And
In the specific gaming state, while controlling the operation of the normal variation winning device 37 so that the winning of the normal variation winning device 37 is easier than when not in the specific gaming state, the first than the case where it is not the specific gaming state It will be comprised so that the fluctuation time of a special figure fluctuation display game, a 2nd special figure fluctuation display game, and a common drawing fluctuation display game may be shortened.
In addition, the game control apparatus 100 forms high probability state generation means capable of generating a high probability state (probability change state) over a predetermined period determined in advance after the end of the special game state.

[Lever solenoid control process]
Next, details of the lever solenoid control process (step A22) during the special view game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 65, in the lever solenoid control process, it is determined first whether the lever solenoid control pointer is a no update code (here, -1) (step A1101). If the lever solenoid control pointer is a no update code (step A1101; Y), the lever solenoid control process is ended. If the lever solenoid control pointer is not a no update code (step A1101; N), the lever solenoid control timer is updated by -1 (step A1102), and it is determined whether the lever solenoid control timer becomes 0 (step A1103). .

If the lever solenoid control timer has not become 0 (step A1103; N),
The lever solenoid control process ends. When the lever solenoid control timer becomes 0 (step A1103; Y), the lever solenoid control table is set (step A1104), and the table address corresponding to the lever solenoid control pointer is calculated (step A1104).
Step A1105). Then, the control pointer for the next operation is acquired and saved in the lever solenoid control point area (step A1106), and the control timer for the next operation is acquired and saved in the lever solenoid control timer area (step A1107). Data is acquired and saved in the lever solenoid output data area (step A1108). after that,
Acquire the probability variation operation region validity determination flag and save it in the probability variation operation region validity determination flag region (
Step A1109) The lever solenoid control process ends.

By the above process, the lever solenoid control pointer is sequentially updated each time a predetermined time elapses, and as shown in FIGS. 8C and 8D, ON and OFF of the lever solenoid 38f are set, and the positive change operation area The switch 38d is set to be valid or invalid. When the operation of the lever solenoid is ended by satisfying a predetermined condition, by setting 0 as the lever solenoid control pointer, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off and the positive change operation area switch 38d is invalidated. Then, after 0 is set as the lever solenoid control pointer, -1 is set as the lever solenoid control pointer so that the state in which the operation is stopped continues.

[Processing command setting process]
Next, details of the effect command setting process in each process executed during the timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 66, in the effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A2001), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2001).
Also, when the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A 2002; N),
Write command data (MODE) to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2003)
).

Next, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A2004)
It is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005; Y), the process returns to the process for reading the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2004).
Also, when the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2005; N),
Write command data (ACTION) to the serial transmission buffer for effect (Step A20)
06), finish the rendering command setting process. The effect command setting process may be simply referred to as "command setting process".

[Symbol variation control processing]
In FIG. 67, the symbol variation control process in the special drawing game process described above (steps A19 and A21)
And symbol variation control processing (step B15) in the common drawing game processing described later. The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling the variation of the special symbol (the first special figure, the second special figure, etc.) or the ordinary symbol (the common figure) and setting the display data of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol.

In this symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether or not the variation control flag applied to the symbol to be controlled (for example, any of the first special figure, the second special figure, and the common figure) is changing (step A2)
101). In the case of this embodiment, the lower address of the fluctuation control flag area, the initial value of the blinking control timer, the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value, the display table 2 (in the fluctuation control table prepared in step A18, step A20 and step B14 Stop address), display table 1
An address (for variation) is defined.

In the case that the flag during fluctuation concerning the symbol to be controlled is fluctuating (step A2102; Y)
Acquires the symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled (step A21)
03). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for variation) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A18, step A20 and step B14.
Next, the blinking control timer to be controlled is updated by -1 (step A2104), and it is determined whether the updated blinking control timer is "0" (step A2105), and the updated blinking control timer is "0". If not (step A2105; N), display data corresponding to the value of the variation symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

When the updated blink control timer is “0” (step A2105; Y), the blink control timer initial value (100 ms in this case) corresponding to the target blink control timer area is saved (step A2106), Update the variation symbol number of the control target by +1 in the corresponding range (
Step A2107) The display data corresponding to the value of the variation symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area provided in the RAM 111C (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

On the other hand, when the flag during the change of the symbol to be controlled is not changing (step A2102
N) acquires a symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled (step A2109). In the case of this embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for stopping) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A18, step A20 and step B14. Next, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2110), and the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A).
2111), end the symbol variation control process.

[Puppet game processing]
Next, details of the common-play game process (step S111) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the common drawing game processing, monitoring of the input of the gate switch 34a, control of the entire processing concerning the common drawing variation display game, setting of display of common drawing, and the like are performed.

As shown in FIG. 68, in the common-play game processing, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and a general competition winning switch for monitoring an input from the starting opening 2 switch 37a. A monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the standard game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step B3). In addition, the minimum value of the common drawing game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the common drawing game processing timer is "0" (step B4).

If it is determined that the value of the common-play game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, it is determined that the time-up or time-up has already occurred, reference is made to branch to the processing corresponding to the common-play game processing number The routine drawing game sequence branch table is set in the register (step B5), and the table is used to obtain the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the regular drawing game process number (step B6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the common drawing game process number (step B7).

In step B7, when the popular drawing game processing number is "0", the start of fluctuation of the common drawing fluctuation display game is monitored, and the setting of fluctuation start of the common drawing fluctuation display game and the setting of the effect, the common drawing fluctuation The ordinary drawing process (step B8) is performed to set information necessary for performing the process.
If the drawing game processing number is “1” in step B7, a drawing change processing (step B9) is performed to set information necessary for performing the drawing display processing.

In addition, if the result of the common drawing variation display game is a hit when the common drawing game processing number is "2" in step B7, the setting of the common charge open time according to whether or not the time saving state is being performed. In addition, the general drawing display processing (step B10) is performed to set the information necessary for performing the common processing per processing.
In addition, if the common drawing game processing number is "3" in step B7, then the common drawing is continued during the common drawing, or the common drawing is performed to set the information necessary for performing the common electric residual ball processing, etc. A process (step B11) is performed.

In step B7, if the common drawing game process number is "4", general electric remaining ball processing (step B12) is performed to set information required for performing the common drawing end processing.
If the drawing game processing number is "5" in step B7, the drawing drawing end processing (step B13) is performed to set the information necessary for performing the drawing common processing.

Thereafter, after preparing a common drawing fluctuation control table for controlling fluctuation of the normal symbol by the common drawing display 74 (step B14), symbol fluctuation control processing relating to control of fluctuation of the normal symbol by the common drawing display 74 ( Step B15) is performed to end the common-play game processing.
On the other hand, in step B4, the value of the drawing game processing timer is not "0" (step B4;
N), that is, when it is determined that the time is not up, the process proceeds to the process of step B14, and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-described common game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 69, in the gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101).
Then, when there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; Y), it is determined whether or not the game state (for example, during a big hit, during a special view time (under normal charge support)) is hit right .

When it is a game state to hit the right (step B102; Y), it is determined whether the common drawing reservation number is obtained and the general drawing reservation number is less than the upper limit (for example, "4") (step B105).
If the game state is not right-handed (step B102; N), a left-handed command is prepared (step B103), and the rendering command setting process (step B104) is performed, and then the common drawing reserve number is acquired. It is determined whether the number of general drawing reservations is less than the upper limit (for example, "4") (step B105).

If the common drawing reservation number is less than the upper limit (step B105; Y), the common drawing reservation number is updated by 1 (step B106), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the updated common drawing reservation number is calculated. (Step B107). Then, the random number is extracted and saved in the RWM hit random number storage area (step B108), and the hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the RWM hit symbol random number storage area (step B109). Finish.

If it is determined in step B101 that there is no input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; N), or if it is determined in step B105 that the number of general drawing reservations is not less than the upper limit (step B105; N), End the gate switch monitoring process.

[Puden prize winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the common prize winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above-described common drawing game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 70, in the common power winning switch monitoring process, first, whether it is in the common drawing, that is, the common drawing fluctuation display game is hit and the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is executing the opening operation a predetermined number of times. It is determined whether there is any (step B201).
And, if it is in the middle of the general drawing (step B201; Y), the starting opening 2 switch 37a
(Step B202), and there is an input to the start opening 2 switch 37a (step B202).
If it determines with step B202; Y), the count number of a common charge counter will be updated +1 (step B203).

Next, it is determined whether the count number of the post-update common charge counter is equal to or more than the upper limit (for example, "6") (step B204), and the count is equal to or more than the upper limit (step B204; Y)
If it is determined, the hit pointer value (here 4 or 7) from the end pointer area per drawing
Are loaded and saved in the control pointer area during the drawing (step B205). And
The common drawing game processing timer is cleared to 0 (step B206), and the common electric winning switch monitor processing ends. That is, when there is a routine power prize higher than the upper limit value in the hit state of the common drawing, the hit state of the common drawing is ended halfway at that point.

In addition, when it is determined in step B201 that a common drawing is not in progress (step B201; N
), When it is determined in step B202 that there is no input to the starting opening 2 switch 37a (step B202; N), or when it is determined in step B204 that the common charge count number is not higher than the upper limit Ends the Fuden prize winning switch monitoring process.

[Normal figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the common drawing routine processing (step B8) in the common drawing game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 71, in the ordinary drawing routine processing, first, it is determined whether the ordinary drawing reservation number is “0” (step B301), and the ordinary drawing reservation number is “0” (step B301; Y )
Sets “0” as the process number for shifting to the ordinary drawing normal process (step B 322)
The process number is saved in the common drawing game process number area (step B323). Thereafter, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the routine power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B324), and the routine drawing routine processing is ended.

Also, when the common drawing reservation number is not "0" (step B301; N), random numbers are loaded from the RWM hit random number storage area (for the hold number 1), and the hit symbol random number storage area (for the hold number 1) ,
The hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and the hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) are cleared to 0 (step B302). Next, the probability that the hit result will be the hit result in the common drawing fluctuation display game is the normal probability (
That is, it is determined whether it is in the common map high probability made higher than the common map low probability), that is, it is in the short time state (step B303).

If the general drawing high probability is not (step B303; N), the lower limit judgment value (low probability lower limit judgment value) at the general drawing low probability is set (step B304), and the general drawing high probability is in progress (step B)
303; Y) sets the lower limit judgment value (high probability lower limit judgment value) at the time of the common drawing high probability (step B305).
Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit determination value (step B306). Migrate to

If the value of the per-random number is not greater than or equal to the upper limit determination value (step B306; N), it is determined whether the per-random number is less than the lower limit determination value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307).
If the value of the random number per hit is less than the lower limit judgment value (step B307; Y), that is, if it is a loss, the shift information is saved in the hit flag area (step B308), and a lost stop symbol number is set (step B309). ), The off symbol information is saved in the common figure stop symbol information area (step B310), and the stop symbol number is saved in the common figure stop symbol area (step B314).

On the other hand, if the value of the random number is not smaller than the lower limit judgment value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307; N), that is, if it is a hit, save the hit information in the hit flag area (step B311). The hit stop symbol number corresponding to the hit symbol random number loaded in B302 is set (step B312), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the common drawing stop symbol information area (step B313), and the stop symbol The number is saved in the common drawing stop symbol area (step B314). In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there are two types of hit symbols: an open pattern 1 as a hit symbol; a hit symbol 1 and an open pattern 2;

In the case of the present embodiment, the probability of hitting at low probability is 0/251, the probability of hitting at high probability is 250/251, the upper judgment value is “251”, and the low probability judgment value is “251”, the high probability lower limit judgment value is “1”. Therefore, at the time of the general drawing low probability, the value of the hit random number deviates in all cases of “0” to “250”. Further, at the time of the drawing normal probability, the case where the value of the hit random number is any of “1” to “250” is present, and the case where the value of the hit random number is “0” is not.

After the stop symbol number is saved in the common figure stop symbol area (step B314), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B315).
Thereafter, the random number storage area is shifted (step B316), and the free space after shift is set to 0.
It clears (step B317) and updates the common drawing reservation number by -1 (step B318). That is, with the common drawing variation display game regarding the oldest common drawing reservation number 1 being executed, the processing of raising the positions of the common drawing reservation numbers 2 to 4 held by the common drawing reservation number 1 or later one by one I do. As a result of this processing, the values for the number of general drawing reservations 2 to from the number of general drawing reservations 4 for the random number storage area per common drawing move from the number 1 for general drawing reservations for the random number storage area to the number 3 for general drawing reservation It will be done.
Then, the value for the common drawing reservation number 4 of the random number storage area per common drawing is cleared, and the common drawing reservation number is decremented by one.

Next, the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is extracted (step B319), and the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is set and saved in the common game processing timer area (step B320).
Here, 500 ms at 200/256 is selected as the fluctuation time, and 15 at 40/256.
00 ms is selected, and 3000 ms is selected at 16/256.
Thereafter, the processing for setting transition to normal processing is set (step B 321), and the normal processing is ended.

[Processing setting setting process during general drawing fluctuation]
In FIG. 72, the processing shift setting processing during the general drawing fluctuation in the above-described normal drawing regular processing (step B 321)
)showed that. In this common drawing fluctuating process transition setting process, first, “1” is set as a processing number for shifting to the common drawing fluctuating process (step B 341), and the processing number is saved in the common drawing game processing number area ( Step B342).
After that, a signal relating to the start of the common drawing fluctuation display game (for example, a normal symbol 1 fluctuation signal O
N) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B343), and a floating flag indicating that the common drawing variation display game is changing is saved in the common drawing variation control flag area (step B344).

Then, save the blinking control timer initial value (100 ms here), which is the initial value of the timer of the blinking cycle of the common drawing indicator 74, in the common drawing blinking control timer area (step B345). The value (here, 0) is saved (step B346), and the processing transition setting processing during common drawing is ended.

[During processing of common map fluctuation]
Next, the details of the general drawing fluctuation processing (step B9) in the above-described common drawing game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, in the general drawing variation processing, first, the processing number is set to "2" as the setting processing for shifting to the general drawing display processing (step B411), and the processing number is the common drawing game processing number It saves in the area (step B412).
Thereafter, a common drawing display time (for example, 600 ms), which is a display time of the common drawing variation display game result in the common drawing display 74, is saved in the common drawing game processing timer area (step B413)
Save the signal related to the end of fluctuation of the common drawing (for example, the signal during normal symbol 1 fluctuation is OFF) in the test signal output data area (step B414), and stop flag indicating that the common drawing fluctuation display game is stopped. The common drawing variation control flag area is saved (step B415), and the common drawing variation processing is ended.

[Process while displaying a common map]
Next, details of the common drawing display processing (step B10) in the common drawing game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 74, in the processing of displaying the common drawing, first, the hit flag (hit information or out information) set in the common processing is loaded (step B501), and the hit flag area of RWM is cleared. (Step B502), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B503)

If the hit flag is not hit information (step B 503; N), “0” is set as the process number for shifting to the ordinary drawing normal process (step B 515), and the process number is saved in the ordinary drawing game process number area (Step B516). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the routine power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B517), and the processing during the routine drawing display is ended.

On the other hand, if the hit flag is hit information (step B503; Y), the hit processing setting table is set (step B504), and the hit start pointer value (here 0 and 5) corresponding to the common drawing stop symbol information ) And save it in the control pointer area during
Step B505). Next, the hit end pointer value (here, either 4 or 7) corresponding to the common drawing stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the common drawing hit end pointer area (step B506)
Then, the CPU opens the CPU release time (in this case, either 1700 ms or 2600 ms) corresponding to the common drawing stop symbol information and saves it in the common drawing game processing timer area (step B507).

After that, "3" is set as the process number for shifting to the process during the common drawing
508), the processing number is saved in the common drawing game processing number area (step B509).
After that, a signal related to the start per common figure (for example, the signal during medium power per symbol normally ON) and a signal related to the start of power operation (for example, the signal during normal motorized symbol 1 operation ON) in the test signal output data area Save (step B510).
Furthermore, in order to output a signal for driving (turning on) the common voltage solenoid, the on data is saved in the common power solenoid output data area (step B511), and the common power count number storing the winning number to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 The information on the area is cleared (step B512), and the information on the number of common prize wrong prize areas storing the number of prizes to the normal variation winning device 37 in the common sense electric charge monitoring period is cleared (step B513). Then, save the flag that specifies the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal change winning a prize device 37 (flag outside the fraud monitoring period flag) in the general electric power fraud monitoring period flag area (
Step B514), end the processing of displaying the general drawing.

[Every time per popular map]
Next, the details of the common drawing in the common drawing game process (step B11) will be described. As shown in FIG. 75, in the middle processing per normal drawing, first, the middle control pointer is loaded and prepared (step B601), and the value of the common control pointer per loaded common drawing is greater than or equal to the upper limit It is determined (step B602).

Then, if the value of the control pointer during normal drawing is not the upper limit value or more (step B602; N
) Updates the control pointer by +1 during the general drawing (step B603), performs the routine operation transition setting processing (step B604), and ends the processing during the general drawing.
Also, when the value of the control pointer during normal drawing is the upper limit value or more (step B602; Y)
In step B603, the general operation shift setting process (step B604) is performed without performing processing of updating the processing control pointer area by +1 in the common drawing per step B603, and the processing in the common drawing is ended.

[Puppet operation transition setting process]
In FIG. 76, the general-purpose power transition setting process in the above-mentioned per-general-process processing (step B604)
)showed that. The routine operation shift setting process is a process for controlling the drive of the routine power solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and branches the process according to the value of the control pointer (general control pointer). It is like that. In this routine operation transition setting process, first, a branch process is performed according to the value of the control pointer (step B611). Note that the value of the control pointer used here is the value loaded in step B601 and is the value before being updated by +1 in step B603.

If the value of the control pointer is either 0, 2 or 5, the process proceeds to step B 612 to block the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37, so the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 corresponding to the control pointer is closed. Save the later wait time (here, 300 ms) in the general game processing timer area (step B612), and save the off data in the general electric solenoid output data area to turn off the general electric solenoid 37c (step B613) , End the routine operation transition setting process.

In addition, when the value of the control pointer is either 1 or 3, the process proceeds to step B614, and the opening of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is controlled, so the opening of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 corresponding to the control pointer Save the on-data in the general-purpose solenoid output data area in order to save the general-purpose open circuit time (1700 ms here), which is the time, in the general-purpose game processing timer area (step B614) and turn on the general-electric solenoid 37c. Step B615) The general power on operation transition setting process is ended.

If the value of the control pointer is 6, the process proceeds to step B 616 to control the opening of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37, and the general electric power, which is the opening time of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 corresponding to the control pointer, The open time (here, 2600 ms) is saved in the common game processing timer area (step B616), and the on data is saved in the common solenoid output data area to turn on the common solenoid 37c (step B617). End the power on transition setting process.

If the value of the control pointer is either 4 or 7, the process proceeds to step B 618 to end the release control of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 and perform generalization residual ball processing, so as a processing number "4" is set (step B618). Then, the processing number is saved in the general drawing game processing number area (step B 619), and the general electric remaining ball processing time (here, 600 ms).
Are saved in the common game processing timer area (step B620). After that, in order to turn off the common power solenoid 37 c, save the off data in the common power solenoid output data area (
Step B621) The general power on operation transition setting process is ended.

FIG. 77 shows the operation of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 controlled by the above-described processing. Figure 7
The result is shown in 7 (a) and the case of symbol 1 (open pattern 1) is shown. When the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation display game ends (t81) and the common drawing display time for displaying the hit result elapses (t82
The hit state is started, and the opening of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is started.

In the opening of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the opening for 1700 ms (t82 to t83, t84
T85, t86 to t87) and closing for 300 ms (t83 to t84, t85 to t86) are alternately performed. When the third release is completed (t87), the remaining sphere processing time of 600 ms is reached (t87 to t88), and then the ending time of 100 ms is reached (t88
~ T 89). When the ending time is over (t89), the hit state is over and it is possible to execute a new common drawing variation display game.

The result is shown in FIG. 77 (b) and the case of symbol 2 (open pattern 2) is shown. When the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation display game ends (t91) and the common drawing display time for displaying the hit result passes (
t92), the hit state is started, and the opening of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is started.
In the opening of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the opening 2600 ms (t 92 to t 93, t 94
Perform ~ t95) with a 300 ms closure (t93-t94). When the second release is completed (t95), the remaining sphere processing time of 600 ms is obtained (t95 to t96), and then the ending time of 100 ms is obtained (t96 to t97). When the ending time is over (t97), the hit state is over and it becomes possible to execute a new common drawing variation display game.

In addition, even if it is any opening pattern, when the game ball of specified number (here six) wins normally fluctuation winning a prize device 37, opening of normal fluctuation winning a prize device 37 ends at that time, remaining ball processing It will be time.

[Puden residual ball treatment]
Next, the details of the routine charge remaining ball processing (step B12) in the above-described regular game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 78, in the generalization residual ball processing, first, the processing number "5" related to the end processing per common drawing is set (step B711), and the processing number is saved in the general drawing game processing number area (B Step B712).

Next, the common drawing ending time (100 ms in this case) is saved in the common drawing game processing timer area (step B 713), and a signal (for example,
Save the normal motorized part 1 operation signal OFF) in the test signal output data area (step B 714), and clear the general charge count number area for counting the number of prizes to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (step B 715) . Then, clear the control pointer area during the normal drawing (step B
716), clear the end pointer area per common drawing (step B717), and end the general charge residual ball processing.

[End processing per popular map]
Next, the details of the end-of-round-figure end process (step B13) in the above-mentioned ordinary-figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 79, in the end processing per common drawing, first, the processing number "0" relating to the general processing is set (step B811), and the processing number is saved in the general drawing game processing number area (step B812).

Next, save the signal (for example, the signal is turned off during the normal symbol 1) to the test signal output data area (step B813), and define the fraud monitoring period of the normal fluctuation winning device 37. The flag (during fraud monitoring period flag) is saved in the routine power transmission fraud monitoring period flag area (step B 814), and the per-chart drawing end processing is ended.

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, segment LED editing processing in the above-described timer interrupt processing (step S112)
The details of) will be described. In the segment LED editing process, the special view 1 reserve display 54, the special view 2 reserve display 55, the general drawing reserve display 75, the first gaming state display 76, and the second gaming state display provided in the collective display device 50. The setting regarding driving of the segment LED constituting the unit 77, the third gaming state display unit 78, and the round display unit 60 is performed.

As shown in FIG. 80, in the segment LED editing process, first, the blink control timer is updated by +1 (step S501), and it is determined whether the output on timing is based on whether the specific bit of the blink control timer is 1 or not. (Step S502). In the present embodiment, when the bit 5 of the blinking control timer is 1, it is determined that the output is on timing, thereby creating a blinking cycle of 128 ms.

If the output on timing is set (step S502; Y), the common drawing reservation number display table 1 of the common drawing reservation number display tables 1 and 2 in which the display mode in the common drawing reservation display is defined (Step S503), when it is not the output on timing (Step S502; N)
Sets the common drawing reservation number display table 2 (step S504). Then, display data corresponding to the common drawing reservation number is acquired from the set common drawing reservation number display table, and saved in the segment area for the common drawing reservation display provided in the RAM 111C (step S505). In the present embodiment, if the common drawing reserve number is any one of “0” to “2”, the display data becomes the same regardless of which common drawing reserve number display table is set.

Next, it is determined whether it is the output on timing (step S506), and in the case of the output on timing (step S506; Y), the special figure 1 reserve number in which the display mode on the special figure 1 reserve indicator is defined. Of the display tables 1 and 2, the special figure 1 hold count display table 1 is set (step S507), and when it is not the output on timing (step S506; N), the special figure 1 hold count display table 2 is set (step S506) Step S508). Then, display data corresponding to the special drawing 1 holding number is acquired from the set special drawing 1 holding number display table and saved in the segment area for the special drawing 1 holding indicator provided in the RAM 111C (step S509).

Thereafter, it is determined whether it is the output on timing (step S510), and in the case of the output on timing (step S510; Y), the special figure 2 reserve number display in which the display mode on the special view 2 reserve indicator is defined. Of the tables 1 and 2, the special figure 2 pending number display table 1 is set (step S511), and when it is not the output on timing (step S510; N), the special figure 2 is selected.
The number-of-holds display table 2 is set (step S512). Then, display data corresponding to the special figure 2 reserve number is acquired from the set special figure 2 reserve number display table, and saved in the segment area for the special figure 2 reserve indicator provided in the RAM 111C (step S513).
Furthermore, a round display table in which the display mode in the round display unit is defined is set (
Step S514), acquiring display data corresponding to the round display LED pointer, and RA
Save to the segment area for round display section provided in M111C (step S
515).

Next, when the time saving state occurs, the first gaming state display unit 76 lights up to notify the occurrence of the time saving state.
The game state display table 1 in which the display mode in the game mode is defined is set (step S516), the display data corresponding to the game state It saves in the segment area (step S517). In this embodiment, the first gaming state display unit 76 consisting of one LED is turned off during the normal operation, and the special drawing time is short
It is configured to light up during the common power support).

Thereafter, the gaming state display table 2 is set in which the display mode in the second gaming state display section 77 is informed that the gaming state is more advantageous to the right hitting than the left hitting (step S5)
18) The display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area for the second game state display unit 77 provided in the RAM 111C (step S519). In the present embodiment, the second game state display unit 77 consisting of one LED is turned off at the time of normal hitting (left hitting), and at the time of right hitting (in the case of the present embodiment, during a big hit, during general support). It is configured to light up.

Then, it is determined whether the high probability notification flag which is turned on when the jackpot probability state is high probability state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on (step S520), and the high probability notification flag is on If it is (step S520; Y), the off data of the high probability notification LED (the third gaming state display unit 78) is saved in the segment area (step S521), and the segment LED editing process is ended. If the high probability notification flag is off (step S52)
0; N) The segment LED editing process is ended without saving the off data of the high probability notification LED in the segment area.

[Abnormal discharge monitoring process]
Next, details of the abnormal discharge monitoring process (step S113) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the abnormal discharge monitoring process, the number of gaming balls existing for each of the upper flow passage 38 j and the lower flow passage 38 k is managed, and an abnormal discharge error occurs when the discharge is detected despite the existence of the gaming balls being 0. Perform processing and processing related to cancellation of abnormal discharge error.

As shown in FIG. 81, in the abnormal discharge monitoring process, it is first determined whether an abnormal discharge error is occurring (step S551). When the abnormal discharge error is occurring, the abnormal discharge error flag is set in the abnormal discharge error flag area. Here, whether or not the abnormal discharge error is in progress by the presence or absence of the abnormal discharge error flag judge.
If the abnormal discharge error is not occurring (step S551; N), it is determined whether there is an input on the lower large winning opening switch (step S552), and if there is no input (step S552; N)
) Shifts to step S554. In addition, when there is an input to the lower large winning opening switch (step S 552; Y), the abnormal discharge counter 1 for managing the number of gaming balls in the upper flow passage 38 j is
One is updated (step S553), and the process proceeds to step S554.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the probability change operation area switch 38d (step S554), and when there is no input (step S554; N), the process proceeds to step S558. Further, when there is an input to the probability change operation area switch 38d (step S554; Y), the abnormal discharge counter 2 for managing the number of gaming balls in the lower flow passage 38k is updated by +1 (step S555). It is determined whether it is 0 (step S556).

If the abnormal discharge counter 1 is 0 (step S556; Y), the process proceeds to step S565 to perform processing when an abnormality occurs. In the process at the time of abnormality occurrence, an abnormal discharge error flag is prepared (step S565), an abnormal discharge generation command is prepared (step S566), and the process proceeds to step S572. That is, in this case, although the abnormal discharge counter 1 managing the number of gaming balls in the upper flow passage 38j is 0, there is an input to the probability change operation area switch 38d detecting the gaming balls flowing out from the upper flow passage 38j Since this is the case, processing at the time of abnormality occurrence is performed.

On the other hand, when the abnormal discharge counter 1 is not 0 (step S556; N), the abnormal discharge counter 1 is updated by 1 (step S557), and it is determined whether there is an input to the passage port switch 38g (step S558). When there is no input to the passage port switch 38g (step S558)
N) shifts to step S562. If there is an input to the passage port switch 38g (step S558; Y), the abnormal discharge counter 2 is updated by +1 (step S559).
It is determined whether the abnormal discharge counter 1 is 0 (step S560). Then, if the abnormal discharge counter 1 is 0 (step S560; Y), the process proceeds to step S565 to perform processing when an abnormality occurs. That is, in this case, although the abnormal discharge counter 1 for managing the number of gaming balls in the upper flow passage 38j is 0, there is an input to the passage port switch 38g for detecting gaming balls flowing out from the upper flow passage 38j. Since this is the case, processing at the time of abnormality occurrence is performed.

If the abnormal discharge counter 1 is not 0 (step S560; N), the abnormal discharge counter 1 is updated by 1 (step S561), and it is determined whether there is an input to the discharge confirmation switch 38e (step S562). When there is no input to the discharge confirmation switch 38e (step S5)
62; N) shifts to step S570. If the discharge confirmation switch 38e receives an input (step S562; Y), it is determined whether the abnormal discharge counter 2 is 0 (step S563). And when the abnormal discharge counter 2 is 0 (step S563; Y)
The process proceeds to step S565 to perform processing when an abnormality occurs. That is, in this case, although the abnormal discharge counter 2 managing the number of gaming balls in the lower flow passage 38k is 0, an input is made to the discharge confirmation switch 38e for detecting the gaming balls discharged from the lower flow passage 38k. Since this is the case, processing at the time of abnormality occurrence is performed.

If the abnormal discharge counter 2 is not 0 (step S563; N), the abnormal discharge counter 2 is updated by 1 (step S564), and the process proceeds to step S570. in this case,
In the case where no abnormality has occurred. Thereafter, an abnormal discharge cancellation flag is prepared (step S5).
70) An abnormal discharge cancellation command is prepared (step S571), and it is determined whether the value of the abnormal discharge error flag area matches the prepared flag (step S572).

On the other hand, when the abnormal discharge error is occurring (step S551; Y), it is determined whether the initialization switch 112 has an input (step S567), and when there is no input (step S5
67; N) ends the abnormal discharge monitoring process. In this case, the abnormal discharge error continues to occur. Also, if there is an input to the initialization switch (step S 567; Y),
As a process of canceling the abnormal discharge error, the abnormal discharge counter 1 is cleared to 0 (step S5).
68) The abnormal discharge counter 2 is cleared to 0 (step S569). Thereafter, an abnormal discharge cancellation flag is prepared (step S570), and an abnormal discharge cancellation command is prepared (step S570).
571) It is determined whether the value of the abnormal discharge error flag area matches the prepared flag (step S572).

When the value of the abnormal discharge error flag area matches the prepared flag (step S572)
Y) ends the abnormal discharge monitoring process.
Also, if the value of the abnormal discharge error flag area and the prepared flag do not match (step S)
572; N) saves the prepared flag in the abnormal discharge error flag area (step S5)
73), Perform rendering command setting processing (step S574). Thereby, either the abnormal discharge occurrence command or the abnormal discharge cancellation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 notifies that an abnormal discharge error is occurring in response to the reception of the abnormal discharge occurrence command. Since this abnormal discharge error is an error for stopping the game, the progress of the effect is also stopped, and while the abnormal discharge error is occurring, the error notification is continuously performed. In addition, the game effect is resumed upon receiving the abnormal discharge cancellation command, and the notification that the abnormal discharge error is occurring is ended.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the new flag is an abnormal discharge cancellation flag (step S574),
When it is not the abnormal discharge cancellation flag (step S574; N), the abnormal discharge monitoring process is ended.
If the abnormal discharge cancellation flag is set (step S574; Y), that is, if the abnormal discharge error is canceled based on the operation of the initialization switch 112, it is determined whether a customer waiting demo is in progress (step S576) . And when not waiting for customer demonstration (step S 576)
N) ends the abnormal discharge monitoring process.
If a customer waiting demo is in progress (step S576; Y), a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step S577), a rendering command setting process is performed (step S578), and the abnormal discharge monitoring process is ended. Although the game is resumed along with the release of the error occurrence error, when it is in the customer waiting demo state at the time of restart, the command is not transmitted to the effect control device 300 in another process, so here the effect control device 300 By transmitting the customer waiting demo command to the, the presentation of the customer waiting demonstration state is started.

[Magnet fraud monitoring process]
Next, details of the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S114) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61, and the start and the end of fraud notification are set.

As shown in FIG. 82, in the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3), the magnetic sensor 6 is detected.
It is determined whether 1 is on, that is, a state where abnormal magnetism is detected (step S601).
.
If the magnetic sensor 61 is on (step S601; Y), that is, if an abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer for measuring the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by +1 (step S602). It is determined whether the time is up (step S603).
In the case of the present embodiment, when the magnet fraud monitoring timer is 32 ms or more, it is determined that time is up.

If the magnet fraud monitoring timer times out (step S603; Y), that is, if abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S).
604) Save the magnet fraud alert timer initial value (for example, 60 seconds) in the magnet fraud alert timer area (step S605). Then, prepare a command of notification of magnet irregularity (step S6).
06) Prepare a magnet fraud flag as the magnet fraud flag (step S 607), and determine whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step S 6)
13). That is, when the magnetic sensor 61 is continuously on for a predetermined period (for example, eight interrupts), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor 61 is not on (step S601; N), that is, when the abnormal magnetism is not detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S608), and the magnet fraud specifying the notification time of the magnet fraud If the notification timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S609). In addition, the minimum value of the magnet fraud alerting | reporting timer is set to "0". And
It is determined whether the value of the magnet fraud alerting timer is "0" (step S610). If the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed out (step S603; N), step S
Transfer to processing of 609.

Then, if the value of the magnet fraud alerting timer is not "0" (step S610; N), that is, if the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is ended. Also, if the value of the magnet fraud alert timer is "0" (step S610; Y), that is, if the time is up or the time is up, and the fraud alert period ends, or from the beginning it is fraudulent If the notification has not been made, a command for magnet notification end is prepared (step S611). Furthermore, prepare a magnet fraud release flag as a magnet fraud flag (step S
612), It is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (
Step S613).

Then, if the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step S613; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process is ended. If the prepared magnet fraud flag does not match the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step S613; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step S614), and rendering command setting processing is performed. Then (step S615), the magnet fraud monitoring process is ended. Here, "Step S601
N ”→“ Step S608 ”→“ Step S609 ”→“ Step S610; Y ”→”
Step S611 ′ ′ → “Step S612” → “Step S613; Y” is a normal route.

[Board radio wave fraud monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S115) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62, and the start and the end of fraud notification are set.

As shown in FIG. 83, in the radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the board radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121, It is determined whether the board radio wave sensor 62 is on, that is, an abnormal radio wave is detected (step S701).
If the radio wave sensor is on (step S701; Y), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is detected, the initial value (for example, 60 seconds) of the radio wave fraud alert timer is saved in the radio wave fraud alert timer area (step S702).

Then, prepare a command of board radio wave fraud notification (step S703), prepare a board radio wave fraud occurrence flag as a board radio wave fraud flag (step S704), and prepare the prepared board radio wave fraud flag with the value of the board radio wave fraud flag region. It is determined whether they match (step S709). That is, in the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on a predetermined number of times, while in the case of board radio wave fraud, the board radio sensor 62 is detected once. It is determined that an abnormality has occurred at the time of

On the other hand, if the board radio wave sensor 62 is not on (step S 701; N), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is not detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer defining the notification time of radio wave fraud is
If it is not "1", -1 is updated (step S705). Note that the minimum value of the radio wave fraud alert timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave fraud alert timer is "0" (step S706).

If the value of the radio wave injustice timer is not “0” (step S706; N), that is, if the time is not up, the board radio wave improper monitoring process is ended. If the value of the radio wave informing timer is "0" (step S706; Y), that is, if the time is up or the time has already been up, and the period of the informing notification ends, or from the beginning it is incorrect. If the notification has not been made, prepare a command to end the board radio wave unauthorized notification (step S70).
7) Prepare a board radio wave fraud release flag as a board radio wave fraud flag (step S 708),
It is determined whether the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag region (step S709).

Then, if the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (step S709; Y), the board radio wave fraud monitoring processing is ended. If the prepared board radio wave fraud flag does not match the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (step S709; N), the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area (step S710), and the rendering command is performed. The setting process is performed (step S711), and the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is ended. here,"
Step S 701; N ”→“ Step S 705 ”→“ Step S 706; Y ”→“ Step S 707 ”→“ Step S 708 ”→“ Step S 709; Y ”is the normal route.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S116) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the external information editing process, based on the monitoring results in each process, information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or game arcade internal control device or a test shot test device is created and set in an output buffer .

As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, in the external information editing process, first, it is determined whether a switch abnormality error such as disconnection of a switch is occurring (step S 751), and a switch abnormality error is not occurring ( Step S751; N) saves the off data of the gaming machine error status signal in the test signal output data area (step S752), step S754.
Migrate to If the switch abnormal error is occurring (step S751; Y), the on data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S).
753), and proceeds to step S754.

If the glass frame opening error does not occur (step S754; N) or the body frame opening error does not occur (step S755; N), the off data of the door / frame opening signal is set to the external information output data area. Save (step S756), save the off data of the security signal in the external information output data area (step S757), and step S760.
Transfer to processing of
On the other hand, if a glass frame opening error is occurring (step S754; Y), or
If the main frame opening error is occurring (step S755; Y), the on data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S758), and the on data of the gaming machine error status signal is After saving in the test signal output data area (step S759), the process proceeds to step S760.

Then, if the security signal control timer, which measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by the operation of the initialization switch or the like, is updated by -1 unless it is "0". Step S760). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set at the time of setting the initial value of the RAM when activated by clearing the RAM in the main processing, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S761).

If the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step S761; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S762), step S763 Transfer to processing of
When the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S761; Y)
In other words, if the time has been up or has already been up, step S762.
Then, the process proceeds to step S763.

Then, as shown in FIG. 85, abnormal discharge error, magnet fraud, board radio wave fraud, residual ball error, discharge ball error, V abnormal passage error, upper large winning opening illegality, lower large winning opening illegality, commonplace illegality and vibration If at least one of the frauds is being generated (at least one of steps S763 to S772 is Y), the on data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S773), and the security data is on data. Are stored in the external information output data area (step S776), and the process proceeds to step S777. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information.

On the other hand, abnormal discharge error, magnet fraud, board radio wave fraud, residual ball error, discharge ball error, V abnormal passage error, upper large winning a prize opening fraud, lower large winning a prize opening fraud, commonplace fraud and vibration fraud are all occurring. If not (all of steps S763 to S772 are N), the process proceeds to step S774. If the frame radio wave irregularity is not occurring (step S774; N) and there is no definite change operation area abnormal passage information (step S775; N), the process proceeds to step S777. Also, if frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step S774; Y) or there is a probability variation operation area abnormal passage information (step S775; Y), the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S776). ), Shift to step S777. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information.

Then, a main prize ball signal editing process (step S777) for setting information on the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out is performed, and a starting opening signal editing process (step S778) for editing a winning signal for the starting opening
)I do.
Next, if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game is not “0”, −1 is updated (step S779). The minimum value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the symbol determination number control timer is "0" (step S780).

If the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is "0" (step S780; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area Then (step S781), the external information editing process is ended.
If the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is not "0" (step S780; N), that is, if the time is not up, save the on data of the symbol determination frequency signal in the external information output data area (step S781), end the external information editing process.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, the main prize ball signal editing process in the above-mentioned external information editing process (step S777)
Explain the details of. The main prize ball signal editing process externally generates the main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (predetermined number of payouts) generated by the winning on the winning opening becomes a predetermined number (10 in the case of this embodiment). It is processing to output to the device.

As shown in FIG. 86, in the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S831). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is "0" (step S832). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is "0" (step S832; Y), the number of times the main prize ball signal output is "0".
It is determined whether it is (step S833).

Then, if the main prize ball signal output number is not "0" (step S833; N), the main prize ball signal output number is updated by -1 (step S834), and the main prize ball signal control timer area is displayed. The signal output control timer initial value is saved (step S 835). The main prize ball signal output control timer initial value is a time (for example, 128 ms) of the on state (for example, high level) of the main prize ball signal and a time (for example, 64) of the off state (for example, low level).
It is an on-state time (for example, 128 ms) of m seconds). After that, save the on data for turning on the main prize ball signal in the external information output data area of RWM (
Step S837) The main prize ball signal editing process ends.
If the main prize ball signal output count is "0" (step S833; Y), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step S838) The main prize ball signal editing process is ended.

On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0" (step S832; N)
) Determines whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S).
836). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period is that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0". If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S836; Y), the process proceeds to step S837. When the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step S8)
36; N) saves the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S 838), and ends the main prize ball signal editing process.

In the present embodiment, a main prize ball signal is output from the game control device 100 every time the planned number of game balls to be paid out becomes 10, and the payout control device 200 comes to have 10 game balls paid out. A main prize ball signal is output each time.
Specifically, the game control apparatus 100 updates the main prize ball number signal output count by +1 every 10 payout schedules (every time a payout command is transmitted) (subroutine in payout command transmission processing)
The main prize ball signal is output as many times as the number of outputs updated (set).
Since the prize ball signal is transmitted from the payout control device 200 every time 10 pieces of payout are actually performed for the main prize ball signal outputted for each schedule, the schedule and the result can be matched, It is possible to respond to fraudulent withdrawals. In addition, even if you win during the big hit period, the payout is delayed due to a lack of balls, etc., and even if it is paid out after the big hit, the hall computer (hall computer) is accurate by the main prize ball signal output at the time of winning. Information can be collected (judged).

[Starting mouth signal editing process]
Next, details of the starting opening signal editing process (step S778) in the above-described external information editing process will be described. The start opening signal editing process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the start opening 1 switch 36a and the start opening 2 switch 37a.

As shown in FIG. 87, in the starting opening signal editing process, first, the starting opening signal output control timer
If it is not "0", -1 is updated (step S841). The minimum value of the starting opening signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is "0" (step S842). When the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is "0" (step S842; Y), it is determined whether the number of times of starting opening signal output is "0" (step S843).

Then, if the starting opening signal output number is not "0" (step S843; N), the starting opening signal output number is updated by -1 (step S844), and the starting opening signal output control timer in the starting opening signal output control timer area. The initial value is saved (step S845). The starting opening signal output control timer initial value is a time (for example, 128) of the on state (for example, high level) of the starting opening signal.
It is an on-state time (for example, 128 ms) of the time (for example, 64 ms) of the m-state and the off state (for example, low level). Thereafter, the on data for turning on the starting opening signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S847), and the starting opening signal editing process is ended.
In addition, when the number of start opening signal outputs is "0" (step S843; Y), the off data for turning off the start opening signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S 848), the start opening signal editing process is ended.

On the other hand, when the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is not "0" (step S842; N), it is determined whether the starting opening signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S846)
. In addition, that a starting opening signal output control timer is in an output on area is that the value of a starting opening signal output control timer is not "0". When the starting opening signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S846; Y), the process proceeds to step S847. If the start-up signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step S846; N), the off data for turning off the start-up signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of RWM ( Step S848), the starting opening signal editing process is ended.

"River Soaring Notice Production"
Next, a series of notification effects in the present embodiment will be described.
For example, in the decoration special drawing start memory display unit 42, this consecutive sofa notification effect is performed by changing the display mode of the decoration special drawing start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the notification target to the continuous notice mode It is an effect.

For example, as shown in FIG. 2, the decoration special view start storage display unit 42 of the present embodiment is a display device 41.
Lower left side and lower right side, and the left side special drawing start memory display unit 42
It has a configuration in which four Ds are arranged, and the decoration special drawing start memory display unit 42 on the right side also has a configuration in which four LEDs are arranged. And from the left, these eight LEDs are, in order from the left, the first starting memory → the second starting memory → the third starting memory → the fourth starting memory → the fourth starting memory → the fifth starting memory The memory corresponds to the sixth start memory → the digest order seventh start memory → the digest order eighth start memory. That is, the leftmost LED of the decorative special drawing start storage display section 42 on the left side is the decorative special drawing start storage display corresponding to the first start storage of the digestion order, and The rightmost LED among them is the decoration special view start memory display corresponding to the eighth start memory of the digest order.

FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b) show an example of a series of notification effects.
In the present embodiment, steps A158 and A1 of the special view holding information determination process (FIG. 33).
The determination result in the low probability state is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by the process of 59, and the determination result in the high probability state is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by the process of steps A168 and A169.
Further, in the present embodiment, the probability state of the special view fluctuation display game is high after the end of the special game state based on the occurrence of the V prize (the probability change operation area switch 38d has detected the game ball). It is supposed to be.

Therefore, the determination result in the low probability state is “off” and the determination result in the high probability state is “
If the probability state at the time of execution of the special view fluctuation display game based on the starting memory is a low probability state, the starting memory (hereinafter referred to as “reserved per high probability”) which is a “big hit” The result of the special figure variation display game based on the above is lost. Therefore, before the determination of whether the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is the high probability state or the low probability state, the decoration special view start memory display corresponding to the high probability hold (hereinafter referred to as "high probability hold" When the display mode of “display” is changed to the continuous notification mode, there is a possibility that so-called “gasse effect” will be performed, and there is a possibility that the continuous notification effect will be an effect of low reliability.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG.
That is, when the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is determined to be the high probability state)
In addition, the display mode of the high-probability-hold display is changed from the normal display mode (in this case, a polka-dot pattern) to the continuous mode (in this case, a lattice pattern). As a result, it is possible to perform a highly reliable connected notification effect. In the example shown in FIG. 88 (a), after changing the display mode of one high probability hold display to the continuous alert mode after success in the V prize, the continuous alert informing effect of alerting “two continuous events” Is running.
Here, when V winning is successful, the probability state after the end of the special game state becomes a high probability state because there is an input to the probability change operation area switch 38d when the probability change operation area 38h is active. It is. In the case of failing in V prize, there is no input to the probability change operation area switch 38d when the probability change operation area 38h is active, so that the probability state after the end of the special game state becomes the low probability state. is there.

On the other hand, with regard to starting memories (hereinafter referred to as “held per low probability”) whose judgment result in the low probability state is “big hit” and judgment result in the high probability state is “big hit”, Regardless of whether the probability state at the time of execution of the figure fluctuation display game is the high probability state or the low probability state, the result of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory becomes a big hit. Therefore, before deciding whether the probability state after the end of the special game state is the high probability state or the low probability state, the decoration special view start memory display (hereinafter referred to as "low probability per hold" corresponding to low probability per hold) Even if the display mode of “display” is changed to the continuous information mode, there is no case in which the caster effect is performed. Therefore, the timing (display mode change timing) for changing the display mode of the low probability hold display to the continuous alert mode is optional, but in the present embodiment, in accordance with the display mode change timing of the high probability hold display. When V winning is successful (that is, when it is determined that the probability state after the end of the special game state is the high probability state), the display mode of the low probability hold display is changed to the continuous mode notification mode .

An example of the display mode change timing of the high probability hold display is shown in FIG.
In “(1) High probability hold with high probability” shown in FIG.
1) The display mode of the high probability hold display is changed to the continuous mode. In this case, since it is possible to perform the continuous announcement notification effect at substantially the same time as the continuous V announcement notification effect notifying that the V winning is successful, it is possible to perform mutually related effects as the continuous announcement notification effect and the V winning notification effect. It becomes. Specifically, when there is a hit target for the notification target (high probability hold, low probability hold) in the undivided start memory (ie, when performing a continuous alert notification effect), V prize notification effect When the staging mode is set to the first staging mode and there is no hit hold for the notification target in the undivided start memory (that is, when the continuous staging notification production is not performed), the V prize notification production presentation mode is selected. When the effect mode of the V prize notification effect is set to the second effect mode and the effect mode of the V prize notification effect is the first effect mode, the display mode of the high probability hold indication (or low probability probability hold indication) of the notification target is the normal display mode Reciprocal effects can be performed, such as changing to an aspect.

Also, in the “(2) High probability hold with high probability” shown in FIG.
), And then a predetermined round (specifically the lever solenoid operation round)
In the example shown in FIG. 88 (b), when the second round) is started (t102), the display mode of the high probability hold display changes to the continuous notification mode. In this case, it is possible to perform reliable notification because the continuous notification effect does not get confused with the V prize notification effect.
Also, in the “(3) High probability hold with high probability” shown in FIG.
After that, when the ending effect is started (t103), the display mode of the high probability hold display is changed to the continuous notification mode. In this case, it is possible to perform reliable notification because the continuous notification effect does not get confused with the V prize notification effect.

Next, the timing (display mode return timing) of returning the display mode of the high probability hold display to the normal display mode will be described.
In the example shown in FIG. 89 (a), after changing the display mode of the two high probability hold displays to the connected state after the successful V winning, the connected state notification effect of notifying "three consecutive homes" Is running. In such a case, that is, by changing the display mode of the two or more high probability pending display after successful V winning to the continuous alert mode, the continuous alert informing effect of informing "three or more continuous passes" is executed. In the case where it has been, if the display mode of the high probability display with hold display continues the continuous notification mode even after failing in V prize winning in the special gaming state that occurred thereafter, there is a possibility that the garbled effect will be performed , There is a possibility that the continuous notification effect will be an unreliable effect.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, until the V prize fails (while the V prize continues to be successful),
While the display mode of the high probability hold display continues to be the continuous alert mode, the display mode of the high probability hold display, for example, as shown in FIG. We will return to the normal display mode. As a result, it is possible to perform a highly reliable connected notification effect.

An example of the display mode return timing of the high probability hold display is shown in FIG. 89 (b).
In “(1) High probability hold” shown in FIG. 89 (b), the V prize fails, and thereafter, in the example shown in FIG. 89 (b), a predetermined round after the specific round (lever solenoid operation round). When the second round starts (t111), the display mode of the high probability hold display returns to the normal display mode.
In addition, in “(2) High probability hold” shown in FIG. 89 (b), the V prize fails, and thereafter,
When the ending effect starts (t112), the display mode of the high probability hold display returns to the normal display mode.

The control executed by the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300, including the processing for enabling the effect as described above, will be described. Main control microcomputer 311
90 performs main processing shown in FIG. 90 and timer interrupt processing (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 90, in the main processing, processing at the start of the program is performed first. In the process at the start of the program, first, the interrupt is inhibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and the interrupt is permitted (step C4). Then, the generation of display data is permitted (Step C
5) Set a random number seed (step C6), and save the initial value at power on in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, a power failure occurrence detected flag or the like is cleared.

After the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7 is performed, loop processing is performed as main loop processing.
In this loop processing, first, WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8)
.
Next, effect button input processing (step C9) is performed to create input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29. Production button 2
Reading of the input from the touch panel 5 or the touch panel 29 is performed in the timer interrupt process, and in the effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, a process of changing the contents of the effect is performed.

Then, a hall / player setting mode process is performed to receive setting of the changeable range such as the brightness of the LED and the volume, the change of the brightness and the volume by the player by the player (step C10).
Next, random number update processing (step C11) is performed to update the random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special view variation display game.

Then, the command from the game control apparatus 100 is analyzed and a reception command check process (step C12) for handling is performed, and effect display editing process (step C13) for editing the setting for controlling the progression of the effect and the drawing command ) To set the end of preparation of the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. 1/3
If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 0 seconds (about 33.3 milliseconds) can be prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In this embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (one frame 1/30 seconds), it is determined that it is the frame switching timing when the V blank interrupt (1/60 seconds) is entered twice. Note that the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated in a timing later than 1/60 seconds (frame Switching) may be performed.
When it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15;
In N), the process of step C15 is repeated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15)
15: Y) instructs screen drawing (step C16).

Thereafter, a sound control process (step C17) for controlling the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b) and a decoration control process (step C17) for controlling the LEDs of the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 C18) A movable body control process (step C19) is performed to control the motor and the solenoid of the board effect device 44. Then, an initial operation process of setting an initial operation of the movable effect apparatus is performed (step C20), and the process returns to the process of clearing WDT (step C8).

[Receive command check process]
In FIG. 91, the received command check process (step C12) in the main process described above is performed.
showed that. In this reception command check process, first, the value of the command reception counter which counts how many commands are received during one frame (1/30 seconds) is loaded as the number of command reception (step C201), and the command reception is performed. It is determined whether the number is not 0 (step C202).
When it is determined that the command reception number is 0 (step C202; N), the reception command check process is ended. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

Next, the contents of the receive command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204).
The command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and it is determined whether copying of the command for the number of received commands is completed (step C206). As described above, in this embodiment, without analyzing the command directly in the reception command buffer, the content of the reception command buffer is copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command analysis work is performed in the command area. It is configured as follows. In this way, it is possible to move a command (data) to make a vacancy in preparation for a case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during analysis of the command. In addition, analysis of commands can be performed collectively in one round of main processing.

If it is determined in step C206 that copying of the commands for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the processing returns to step C204. If it is determined that copying of the command for the number of received commands is completed (step C206; Y),
The content of the command area is loaded (step C207), and a received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is completed (step C210).
When it is determined that the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is not completed (step C210; N), the process returns to the process of step C207. If it is determined that the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is ended. Thus, in the reception command check process, one frame (one
Analyze all commands received during / 30 seconds). In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Receive command analysis process]
FIG. 92 shows the received command analysis process (step C208) in the received command check process described above. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is M
ODE separates the lower byte as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), MO
It is determined whether DE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232, step C233)
.
If it is determined that MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether ACT is the correct combination for MODE (step C234).

If it is determined in step C232 or C233 that MODE or ACT is not within the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or if it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step C2
34) N) ends the received command analysis process.

When it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is a correct combination (
In step C234; Y), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the variation system command (step C235). The variation system command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of the special figure.
Then, when it is determined that MODE is in the range of the variation system command (step C235; Y
, Perform variable system command processing (step C236), and end the received command analysis processing.

In addition, when it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not within the range of variation system command (
In step C235; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the jackpot command (
Step C237). The jackpot system command is a command or the like for instructing an operation (such as display of a fanfare screen or a round screen) related to a jackpot middle effect. Then, if it is determined that MODE is in the range of the big hit system command (step C237; Y), the big hit system command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

If it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not within the range of the jackpot command (step C237; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the symbol system command (step C237; N).
Step C239). The symbol system command is a command for instructing information on the symbol of the special drawing (for example, what to make the stop symbol of the special drawing, etc.). When it is determined that MODE is in the range of the symbol system command (step C239; Y), symbol system command processing (step C240) is performed, and the reception command analysis process is ended.

In addition, if it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not within the range of symbol system commands (
In step C239; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of one-shot commands such as the hold number command and the error command (step C241). A single-shot command is a command that is established independently, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. The one-shot commands include a wait for customer demonstration command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, a model specification command, and the like. Then, when it is determined that MODE is in the range of single-shot commands (step C241;
In Y), one-shot command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is ended.

In addition, when it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of single-shot commands (
In step C241; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the pre-reading symbol system command (step C243). Then, if it is determined that MODE is the range of the symbol pattern command for pre-reading (step C243; Y), the symbol system command processing for pre-reading (step C244)
) And end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the prefetch variation system command (step C245). Then, if it is determined that MODE is in the range of the look-ahead change system command (step C245; Y), the read-ahead change system command processing (step C)
246) to complete the received command analysis process. Also, in step C245, the MO
If it is determined that the DE is not within the range of the prefetch change system command (step C245; N), the received command analysis process is ended.

The preread variation system command and the preread symbol system command are commands including information necessary to execute the preread effect. The pre-reading effect (also referred to as pre-reading notice or pre-reading notice effect) is whether or not the special figure variation display game corresponding to the start memory (pending) not executed is a big hit when it is subsequently executed In order to notify the player in advance (with what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) to the player with a predetermined reliability, performing the decoration special view start memory display etc. displayed on the display device 41 in a mode different from normal Effects such as effect display. And the pre-reading system command (pre-reading fluctuation system command and pre-reading symbol system command) is the command which notifies beforehand the fluctuation pattern and the stop design which corresponds to the starting memory which becomes the object of pre-reading effect, from starting game winning a prize 100 It is transmitted to the effect control device 300. In addition, the normal variation system command and symbol system command which are not pre-read are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the time of the variation display start.

[Big hit system command processing]
FIG. 93 shows the jackpot system command processing in the received command analysis processing described above (step C).
238). In this big hit system command processing, first, it is determined whether MODE is a fanfare (step C411). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a fanfare command corresponding to symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern).
Then, if MODE is fanfare (step C411; Y), fanfare effect setting processing is performed to set the fanfare effect corresponding to the fanfare command (step C414), and the P machine state is set in the fanfare (step C415)
), End the big hit system command processing.

If the MODE is not a fanfare (Step C411; N), it is determined whether the MODE is a round (Step C416). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game state.
And, when MODE is a round (step C416; Y), it executes the continuous announcement notification effect cancellation processing which performs the end setting of the continuous announcement information effect (step C412), round effect setting which renews the round number indication information and the like A process is performed (step C417), the state of machine P is set in a round (step C418), and the big hit system command processing is ended.

If MODE is not a round (Step C416; N), it is determined whether MODE is an interval (Step C419). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an interval command related to an interval between rounds.
Then, when MODE is an interval (step C419; Y), an interval effect setting process is performed to set effects during the interval (step C420), and the P machine state is set during the interval (step C421). End system command processing.

If MODE is not an interval (step C419; N), it is determined whether MODE is an ending (step C422). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an ending command related to ending after the final round.
And, when MODE is ending (step C422; Y), for example, when it becomes a high probability state after the end of the special game state, setting screen information to notify that the high probability state will be set, etc. Ending effect setting processing to set the screen information corresponding to the game state after the big hit end is performed (step C423), the P machine state is set during the ending (step C424), and the V prize flag is set Then, the V prize flag is cleared (step C413), and the big hit command processing ends.

If MODE is not ending (step C422; N), it is determined whether MODE is V winning (step C425). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a definite variation operation area passing command (see step A 223).
When the MODE is V prize winning (step C425; Y), the V prize flag is set (step C426), and V prize notification effect setting processing is performed to set V prize notification effect (step C427). The continuous notification generation setting process for setting the low notification effect is performed (step C428), and the big hit system command processing is ended.
When MODE is not V prize winning (step C425; N), the big hit system command processing ends.

[Running home notification effect setting process]
FIG. 94 (a) shows a series of notification information setting processing (step C428) in the above-mentioned big hit system command processing. In this series notification information setting process, the display mode of the corresponding decoration special view start memory display is first set to the normal display mode, which is unsaved hit hold (high probability hold, low probability hold). A notification target lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to make a notification target (target for continuous notification information effect) with respect to each of the hit storage reservations (step C441). In addition, the notification target lottery process is not performed in the continuous-state notification effect setting process, but precedes the continuous-state notification effect setting process (for example, at the start of the lever solenoid operation round or at the start of the special game state) You may go.
Then, if there is no suspension of winning the notification target lottery processing (step C442; N), that is, if there is no start storage of notification targets, the consecutive notification notification effect setting processing is ended.

On the other hand, when there is a hold for winning the notification target lottery process (step C442; Y), that is, when there is a start storage for the notification target, the decoration special view start storage display corresponding to the start storage
The display mode of the notification target reservation display is set to the continuous notification mode (step C443), and the continuous notification effect setting process is ended. Thus, “(1) High probability per hold” shown in FIG. 88 (b).
As in the above, immediately after the V winning a prize is successful, the display mode of the high-probability-on-retention display of the notification target changes to the continuous mode notification mode. Furthermore, the display mode of the low probability per-probability display of the notification target also changes to the continuous notification mode.

In addition, for example, immediately before or after the round effect setting process (step C417) for the predetermined round after the lever solenoid operation round, it is determined whether or not the V prize flag is set, and the V prize flag is set. If it is determined that it is determined to be continuous notification effect setting processing (
By performing step C 428), as in “(2) high probability hold” shown in FIG. 88 (b), V winning is successful, and then, when the predetermined round starts, high probability of notification target It is possible to change the display mode of the hit hold display (and the low probability hit display of the notification target) to the continuous alert mode.

Further, for example, it is determined whether or not the V prize flag is set immediately before or immediately after the ending effect setting process (step C423) (before at least the process of clearing the V prize flag (step C413)). When it is determined that is set, the consecutive prize notification effect setting process (step C 428) is performed, so that “V prize winning” is successful as in “(3) High probability per high probability” shown in FIG. 88 (b). Then, when the ending production starts,
It is possible to change the display mode of the high-probability hold display of the notification target (and the low-probability display of the notification target) to the continuous notification mode.

Also, for example, a round effect setting process (step immediately before or after an interval effect setting process (step C420) for setting an interval effect to be executed after the lever solenoid operation round, or for a predetermined round after the lever solenoid operation round (step C41
Whether or not the V prize flag is set immediately before or immediately after 7) or immediately before or immediately after the ending effect setting process (step C423) (at least before the process of clearing the V prize flag (step C413)) When it is determined that the V prize flag is not set, it is also possible to configure a process of setting the display mode of the low probability display for low probability of notification target to the continuous notification mode. By configuring in this manner, even when the V winning a prize fails, the display mode of the low probability hold display can be changed to the continuous mode notification mode.

[Ranso notification effect cancellation processing]
FIG. 94 (b) shows a series of notification effect cancellation processing (step C412) in the above-mentioned big hit system command processing. In this series of notification effect cancellation processing, first, based on the round command (see step A 854) from the game control apparatus 100, it is determined whether this round is a predetermined round after the lever solenoid operation round ( Step C451).
If it is determined in step C451 that the current round is not a predetermined round (step C451; N), the consecutive-station notification effect cancellation process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step C451 that the current round is the predetermined round (step C451; Y), it is determined whether the V winning flag is set (step C).
452). As shown in FIG. 93, in the present embodiment, the V prize flag is set before the start of the ending effect, and is cleared when the ending effect is started. Therefore, if the V prize flag is set, it is understood that the probability state after the end of the special gaming state currently occurring is high probability state, and if the V prize flag is not set, it is currently generated. It can be seen that the probability state after the end of the special gaming state being present is the low probability state.
When it is determined in step C452 that the V prize winning flag is set (step C4)
52; Y), that is, when the probability state after the end of the special gaming state currently occurring is high probability state, it is not necessary to return the display mode of the high-probability hold display to the normal display mode, The notification generation cancellation process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step C452 that the V prize flag is not set (step C452; N), that is, if the probability state after the end of the special gaming state currently generated is low, It is determined whether or not there is a high probability display pending display in which the display mode is set to the continuous notification mode (step C453).
If it is determined in step C453 that there is no high probability hold display in which the display mode is set to the continuous notification mode (step C453; N), the continuous notification effect cancellation process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step C453 that there is a high probability hold display with the display mode set to the continuous notice mode (step C453; Y), the display mode for the high probability hold display is normally displayed The mode is set (step C454), and the series notification effect cancellation process ends. As a result, as shown in FIG. 89 (b) as “(1) High probability per hold”, it fails in the V prize, and then, when a predetermined round after the lever solenoid operation round starts, the high probability per winning The display mode of the hold display returns to the normal display mode. On the other hand, when there is a low probability hold display where the display mode is set to the continuous notice mode, even if the V winning is unsuccessful, the display mode of the low probability hold display remains the continuous notice mode, It does not return to the normal display mode.
That is, in the consecutive villa notification effect cancellation process of the present embodiment (the consecutive villa notification effect cancellation process shown in FIG. 94B), the consecutive villa notification effect in which the display mode of the high-probability hold display is the consecutive villa notification mode is cancelled. However, the consecutive announcement effect that sets the display mode of the low probability hold display to the continuous notification mode is not canceled.

In the case where the V prize winning has failed, the display mode of the low probability per-hold indication may be configured to cancel the continuous-state notification effect in which the continuous-state notification mode is set.
Further, for example, it is determined whether or not the V prize flag is set immediately before or immediately after the ending effect setting process (step C423) (before at least the process of clearing the V prize flag (step C413)). If it is determined that the display mode is not set, it is determined whether there is a high probability hold display set as the display mode in the continuous alert mode, and the high probability hold in which the display mode is set as the continuous alert mode By performing the process (step C454) of setting the display mode of the high probability hold display to the normal display mode when it is determined that there is a display, “(2) high hold per high probability” shown in FIG. 89 (b) As described above, it is possible to return the display mode of the high probability hold display to the normal display mode when the V winning game fails and the ending effect is started thereafter.

Further, for example, as shown in FIGS. 95 (a) and 95 (b), it is also possible to configure to make a suggestion effect that suggests that continuous notification effect will be executed if the V prize is successful. Figure 95 (a),
In the example shown in (b), when the lever solenoid operation round starts (t121), the display mode of the suspension display per high probability of notification target is a suggestion mode (a polka dot pattern here)
Here, it changes to a diagonal stripe pattern, and then, immediately after the V prize winning is successful (t122)
The display mode is changed from the suggestion mode to the continuous mode (here, a lattice pattern).
The timing at which the display mode is changed to the indication mode is not limited to the start of the lever solenoid operation round, and can be appropriately changed before the start of the lever solenoid operation round.

In the case of performing the suggestion effect, specifically, the presentation control device 300 first, for example, holds the undivided start memory (hold per high probability, hold per low probability, hold off (predictive judgment result in low probability state is also high probability) For each of the starting memories) of which the determination result in the state is also "disappearance", a suggestion target lottery is performed to determine whether or not to make a suggestion target (target of suggestion effect). In addition, notification target lottery processing is performed to determine whether or not to make notification targets (targets for continuous notification effects) for each pending pending (high probability hold, low probability hold).
Then, the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the suggestion target is changed from the normal display mode to the suggestion mode at a predetermined first timing.

In addition, when the start memory in which the display mode is changed from the normal display mode to the suggestion mode is the start memory of the notification target, and the V winning is successful, the decoration feature corresponding to the start memory is further added The display mode of the figure start memory display is changed from the suggestion mode to the continuous mode.
In addition, when the start memory in which the display mode is changed from the normal display mode to the suggestion mode is not the start memory for notification, the start memory is supported even after it is determined whether the V winning is successful or unsuccessful. After the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display continues the state of being the suggestion mode or it is determined whether V winning or winning is successful or not, the decoration special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory The display mode is returned from the suggestion mode to the normal display mode.

Then, in the state where the display mode of the high probability hold display is the continuous notification mode, when the V winning a prize fails, a predetermined timing (for example, the start time of the predetermined round after the lever solenoid operation round (t131 When it becomes)), it cancels the consecutive announcement information production which makes the display mode of the high probability display per one hold notification mode. At that time, for example, as indicated by a solid line in FIG. 95 (c), the display mode may be returned to the suggestion mode, or as shown by an alternate long and short dash line in FIG. You may return it.

Further, the display device 41 may be configured by a device having a display screen such as, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (Brown tube). When configured in this manner, when V winning is successful, for example, as shown in FIG. 96A, an effect of displaying a character image “V” as the V winning notification effect on the display device 41 may be performed. it can. Further, it is possible to perform an effect related to the winning notification effect as a continuous notification effect.
Specifically, for example, in the unstarted starting memory, the hit target of the notification target is held (high probability per hold,
If there is one low probability per low probability, for example, as shown in FIG. 96 (c) after the V prize notification effect (for example, FIG. 96 (a)), the character image “V” is reduced while responding Then, as shown in FIG. 96 (d), for example, the display mode of the corresponding decoration special view start storage display is displayed as a normal display mode (here, as shown in FIG. 96D). Then, it is possible to perform an effect such as changing from a polka-dot pattern) to a continuous-reporting mode (here, a lattice pattern).

In addition, for example, when there are two hit hold (high probability hold, low probability hold) of the notification target in the unfinished start-up memory, after V prize announcement effect (for example, FIG. 96 (a)) For example, as shown in FIG. 96 (e), two character images "V" are displayed, and each character image is reduced and moved toward the corresponding decorative special drawing start memory display, and then, for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in 96 (g), it is possible to perform an effect such as changing the display mode of the corresponding decorative special drawing start memory display from the normal display mode to the continuous mode notification mode as the continuous mode notification effect. Alternatively, after the V prize notification effect (for example, FIG. 96 (a)), as shown in FIG. 96 (f), for example, a divided image obtained by dividing the character image "V" into two is displayed to display each divided image Move toward the corresponding decoration special view starting memory display while reducing the size, and then, as shown in FIG. 96 (g), for example, as a linked home notification effect, the display mode of the corresponding decoration special figure starting memory display It is possible to perform effects such as changing from the normal display mode to the continuous information mode.
On the other hand, when there is no hit of notification target in undivided starting memory (when there is no hit in undivided starting memory or there is hit in undivided starting memory, the corresponding hit is suspended In the case where V is not the notification target), for example, after the V winning notification effect (for example, FIG. 96 (a)), for example, FIG.
As shown in), the display mode of the decoration special view start memory display does not change to the continuous mode notification mode.

In addition, for example, when the display device 41 is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display), a CRT (braun tube), etc. Alternatively (or in addition), it is possible to perform a series of notification effects using the display device 41.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment provides the gaming value to the player when the result of the variation display game (special view variation display game) in which the plurality of identification information is variably displayed is a special result. In a gaming machine that generates a state, the special game state can be converted into a closed state in which the gaming ball can not win a prize and an open state in which the gaming ball can win a prize.
A special variation winning device (first special variation winning device 38) having a probability variation operation area 38h), a probability state where a special result occurs, a normal probability state (low probability state), and a high probability higher than the normal probability state Probability control means (game control apparatus 100) which is set to any one of the states, and the right to execute the variable display game can be stored as a start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number, and a special result for each start memory Start-up memory means (game control apparatus 100) for extracting and storing a random number for determining whether or not to be changed, and a random number corresponding to the start-up memory stored in the start-up memory means And the effect control means (effect control device 300) for performing the execution control of the effect related to the variable display game. To have. The probability control means sets the probability state after the end of the special gaming state to the normal probability state, when the gaming ball that has won the special variation winning device does not flow into the specific area during the occurrence of the special gaming state In addition, when the game ball which has won the special variation winning device during the occurrence of the special game state flows into the specific area, the probability state after the end of the special game state is set to the high probability state, the effect control means On the basis of the determination result of the prior determination means, during occurrence of the special game state, it is possible to execute continuous big hit notification effect (continuously notified information effect) to notify that the result of the variable display game based on start memory will be a special result In the case where there is a starting memory (high probability hold) which is determined to be a special result by the prior judgment means, continuous jackpot notification effect (in this embodiment, high probability per The effect) to extended game notification manner a display mode of the display, and the game ball that is finished in a special variation winning device is configured to run after flowing into the specific region (e.g., see FIG. 88).

Therefore, after it is determined that the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is the high probability state, the continuous big hit notification effect (remembering notification effect) for the start memory (hold for high probability) determined to be the special result In order to perform, reliable continuous big hit staging can be performed.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the prior determination means (game control apparatus 100) copes with the normal probability state when determining whether or not the result of the variable display game based on the start memory is a special result. The effect control means (effect control device 300) is configured to perform the determination based on the determination value to be determined and the determination based on the determination value corresponding to the high probability state. If there is a start memory determined to be a result (high probability per hold), continuous big hit notification effect for the start memory (in the case of the present embodiment, a effect that makes the display mode of the high probability hold display mode a continuous notification mode It is possible to configure to execute after the game ball that has won the special variation winning device flows into the specific area.

By configuring in this way, after the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is determined to be the high probability state, about the starting memory (high probability per hold) determined to be the special result in the high probability state Since it is possible to execute the continuous big hit notification effect (in-line notification effect), it is possible to execute a highly reliable continuous big hit effect.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is configured such that the game ball that has won the special fluctuation winning device (first special fluctuation winning device 38) When it flows in, it is possible to execute an inflow notification effect (V prize notification effect) to notify the inflow, and the effect mode of the inflow notification effect is from the normal effect mode (for example, see FIG. 96A) to the specific effect mode (for example, By changing to FIG. 96 (c), (e) and (f)),
It is comprised so that execution of a continuous big hit alerting | rendering production | presentation (continuous relief alerting | rendering) can be suggested.

With such a configuration, it is possible to effectively improve the sense of expectation for the continuous big hit notification effect (in-line notification effect) being performed.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is a start memory determined to be a special result in the high probability state by the advance determination means (game control device 100). The special fluctuation winning device (first special fluctuation) in the special gaming state after the special gaming state that occurred at the start of the execution of the continuous big hit notification effect for continuous big hit notification effect (continuous sock notification effect) for the hit hold) If the gaming ball that has won the winning device 38) does not flow into the specific area (probable change operation area 38h), it can be configured to cancel (see, for example, FIG. 89).

By configuring in this way, during execution of the continuous big hit notification effect (Ranso notification effect),
When it is determined that the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is not the high probability state, the execution of the continuous big hit notification effect is ended, so it is possible to execute the continuous big hit effect with high reliability.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is based on the start memory during the generation of the special game state based on the determination result of the prior determination means (game control device 100). It is possible to execute a continuous big hit indication effect (indication effect) that suggests that the result of the fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation display game) may be a special result, and the special fluctuation winning device (first special fluctuation winning device) Regarding the starting memory (pending per high probability) which is determined to be a special result in the high probability state by the predetermination means based on the fact that the game ball won in 38) has flowed into the specific area (probability change operating area 38h) It is possible to configure so as to be able to change the continuous big hit suggestion effect of the to the continuous big hit notification effect (continuous notification information effect) for the start memory (for example, see FIG. 95).

With such a configuration, it is possible to effectively improve the sense of expectation for the continuous big hit notification effect (in-line notification effect) being performed.
In addition, the gaming machine 10 has a sorting device for sorting the gaming balls that have won in the special fluctuation winning device (first special fluctuation winning device 38) into either a specific area (probability changing operation area 38h) or a non-specific area. It may be one. In this case, in particular, the interest can be enhanced by executing the continuous jackpot suggestion (suggestion).

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a special gaming state in which the gaming value is given to the player when the result of the variable display game (special view fluctuation display game) in which the plurality of identification information is variably displayed is a special result. In the special game state, the game ball can be converted to a closed state where the game ball can not win a prize and an open state where the game ball can win a prize, and a specific area (probable change operation area 38h) into which the game ball can flow ), The second special variation winning device 39 capable of converting the closed state where the gaming ball can not win in the special gaming state and the open state where the gaming ball can win in the special gaming state, and the special result Probability control means (game control device 100) for setting the probability state of occurrence to either a normal probability state (low probability state) or a high probability state higher than the normal probability state
A start-up memory that can store the right to execute the variable display game up to a predetermined upper limit number as a start-up memory, and extracts and stores a random number for determining whether a special result is obtained for each start-up memory. Prior determination means (game control apparatus 100) for determining the random number corresponding to the means (the game control device 100) and the start memory stored in the start memory means before the variable display game based on the start memory is executed And effect control means (effect control device 300) for performing execution control of effects related to the variable display game. And, the probability control means, when the game ball which has won the first special variation winning device 38 during the occurrence of the special gaming state does not flow into the specific area, the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is usually probability If the game ball that has won the first special variation winning device 38 flows into the specific area while the special gaming state is occurring while setting the state, the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is set to the high probability state , The effect control means, based on the determination result of the prior determination means, during the occurrence of the special gaming state, the continuous jackpot notification effect (Renzo In the case where it is possible to execute notification presentation and there is a start memory (high probability hold per high probability) determined to be a special result by the prior determination means, continuous big hit notification effect (a place of this embodiment of the present embodiment) The second special variation prize is performed after the game ball that has won the first special variation prize device 38 has flowed into the specific area, the execution of the effect of making the display mode of the high probability per-display indication a continuous alert mode. It is configured to start during a period (round) in which the device 39 converts to the closed state and the open state (see, for example, “(2) high probability hold” in FIG. 88).

Therefore, after it is determined that the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is the high probability state, the continuous big hit notification effect (remembering notification effect) for the start memory (hold for high probability) determined to be the special result In order to perform, reliable continuous big hit staging can be performed.

In “(2) High probability hold” shown in FIG. 88, at the start of a period (round) in which the second special variation winning device 39 converts to a closed state and an open state, a continuous alert notification effect (continuous big hit notification effect) )
The execution start of the second special variation winning prize device 39 is not limited to this, but it is from the start of the period (round) in which the second special variation winning device 39 converts to the closed state and the open state. It may be a predetermined time until the end, or it may be the end of a period (round) in which the second special variable winning prize device 39 converts to the closed state and the open state.
In addition, in “(2) High probability hold” in FIG. 88, immediately after the lever solenoid operation round in a plurality of periods (a plurality of rounds) in which the second special variation winning device 39 converts to the closed state and the open state. In the round of, the execution of consecutive villa notification effect (continuous big hit notification effect) is started, but it is not limited to this, the second special fluctuation winning a prize device 39 is the round which starts execution of consecutive villa notification effect It is a period (round) which changes to a closed state and an open state, and if it is a round after a lever solenoid operation round, it can change suitably.
Also, if the final round is a lever solenoid operation round, as shown in FIG.
As shown in the high probability hold ", the ending is in progress (" (3) high probability hold "in Fig. 88).
In the case of (1), at the start of the ending effect), the execution of the continuous notification effect (continuous big hit notification effect) may be started.

Variation pattern
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the period of the high probability state is shortened in order to shorten the period of the high probability state (period in which the probability state of the special feature fluctuation display game is the high probability state) from the viewpoint of time efficiency improvement etc. As a variation pattern of the special view variation display game to be executed, a variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected.
Among the variation group tables in the present embodiment, an example of a variation group table that can be selected in the high probability state (probability variation state) is shown in FIGS. 97 (a) and (b).
FIG. 97 (a) is a change group table in the case where the result is a drop. This variation group table is a variation group table that can be selected by the variation group selection pointer (variation group selection pointer after update) acquired in step A454 in the special map information setting process.

There are no reach short system, N reach short system, no reach system, N reach system, SP1 reach system, SP2 reach system and SP3 reach system as the change group (variation pattern selection table) selectable by this change group table The distribution rates are set respectively.
The variation group (variation pattern selection table) is selected by the selected variation group table and the variation pattern random number 1 (steps A462 to A464).
reference). The fluctuation pattern random number 1 takes a value of 0 to 65535, and in the case of the present embodiment, for example, 40000 values are assigned to the reach-less short system. In other words, the reach-less short variation group is selected with a probability of 40000/65536.

The variation pattern (variation pattern number) is selected by the selected variation group (variation pattern selection table) and the variation pattern random number 2 (step A46).
5 to A 467). In the case of the present embodiment, for example, when the fluctuation group of no reach short system is selected, the fluctuation pattern of no reach short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is selected, and the fluctuation group of no reach system is selected. A variation pattern of no reach variation with a variation time of 8 seconds or a no reach variation variation with a variation time of 12 seconds is selected.

FIG. 97 (b) is a fluctuation group table when the result is a big hit. This variation group table is a variation group table that can be selected by the variation group selection pointer acquired in step A452 in the special map information setting process.
The N reach short system, the N reach system, the SP1 reach system, the SP2 reach system, the S reach system can be selected as the change group (the change pattern selection table) selectable by the change group table
There is a P3 reach system, and the distribution rate is set for each.

As shown in FIGS. 97 (a) and 97 (b), in the present embodiment, as the fluctuation pattern of the special view fluctuation display game, the period of the high probability state is more easily selected as the fluctuation pattern having a shorter fluctuation time.
The longer the fluctuation time, the harder it is to select a fluctuation pattern.
As described above, since a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is easily selected as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed during the period of the high probability state, for example, as shown in FIG. It is possible to shorten the period of the probability state, that is, to increase the number of occurrences of the special game state per unit time.

Here, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation group of the Premier Reach system can not be selected by the fluctuation group table that can be selected in the high probability state, and can be selected only by the fluctuation group table (not shown) that can be selected in the low probability state. is there. That is, in the period of high probability state,
The fluctuation pattern of Premier reach fluctuation, which is the fluctuation pattern with the longest fluctuation time, is configured not to be selected.
Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation group of the Premier Reach system can not be selected by the fluctuation group table when the result is out, and can be selected only by the fluctuation group table when the result is the big hit. Therefore, in the present embodiment (also in the modification described later), it can be said that the fluctuation pattern of the premier reach fluctuation is a big hit determined fluctuation pattern.

The fluctuation pattern of the Premier reach fluctuation is not limited to the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is the longest, but may be a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is relatively long.
The fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time is, for example, the longest fluctuation time (105 seconds in the example shown in FIGS. 97 (a) and (b)) among fluctuation fluctuation of reach fluctuation other than Premier reach fluctuation. A variation pattern of variation time longer than an intermediate time with a short variation time (10 seconds in the example shown in FIGS. 97 (a) and (b)) may be used.
The time between the longest fluctuation time (105 seconds in the example shown in FIGS. 97 (a) and (b)) and the shortest fluctuation time (30 seconds in the example shown in FIGS. 97 (a) and (b)) It may be a fluctuation pattern of a longer fluctuation time.

<Modification 1>
When the high probability state occurs continuously, it is also possible to reduce the number of occurrences of the special game state per unit time. This makes it possible to prevent the irritability from becoming too high.
As a method of reducing the number of occurrences of the special game state per unit time, for example, there is a method of extending the period of the high probability state.
As a method of lengthening the period of the high probability state, for example, the special view fluctuation display game in which the result is a big hit not only in the period of the low probability state (normal probability state) but also in the period of the high probability state
It is called "big hit fluctuation" below. There is a method of making it possible to select the fluctuation pattern of Premier reach fluctuation as the fluctuation pattern of.

<Modification 1-1>
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (a), a predetermined timing (in the case of this modification,
At the end of the special gaming state), if the special gaming state this time is based on the hit in the low probability, save the flag in the low probability, the current special gaming state is hit in the high probability If it is based, save the high probability medium flag.
Then, when the low probability middle flag is saved, the change pattern of the Premier reach change can not be selected as the change pattern of the big hit change to be executed during the high probability state period. On the other hand, when the high probability flag is saved, it is possible to be configured to be able to select the fluctuation pattern of the Premier Reach fluctuation as the fluctuation pattern of the big hit fluctuation to be executed during the high probability state.

[Big hit end processing]
In order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 98 (a), the game control device 1 of the present modification example
In the case of 00, the big hit end process shown in FIG. 99 is executed instead of the big hit end process shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 99, in the big hit end processing of this modification, first, a flag is loaded from the special view game mode flag save area (step A1001), and the special game state of this time has a high probability &
It is determined whether the time base is based on a hit or not (step A1002).

If the special gaming state of this time is not based on hitting with high probability & short time (step A 1002; N), that is, the special gaming state this time is based on hitting with low probability & short time, low If it is one of probability & time based on hit, save the low probability middle flag in the previous time probability state flag area (step A 1031), and whether the big hit symbol is V easy symbol Is determined (step A1003).
If the big hit symbol is not a V easy symbol (step A1003; N), prepare information of the time saving mode B start as an effect mode after the end of the special game state (step A1004), and shift to step A1006.
Also, when the jackpot symbol is a V easy symbol (step A1003; Y), prepare information of the start of time reduction mode A as an effect mode after the end of the special gaming state (step A1005)
, A1006.

On the other hand, when the special game state this time is based on the high probability & time reduction hit (step A1002; Y), save the high probability medium flag in the previous hit probability state flag area (step A1032 Information on the start of the short time mode A is prepared as an effect mode after the end of the special gaming state (step A1005), and the process proceeds to step A1006.
Since the processes after step A1006 (steps A1006 to A1030) are the same as the big hit end process shown in FIG. 62, the description of the processes after step A1006 will be omitted.

[Special map information setting process]
In order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 98 (a), the game control device 1 of the present modification example
In 00, in place of the special figure information setting process shown in FIG. 47, the special figure information setting process shown in FIG. 100 is executed.
As shown in FIG. 100, in the special view information setting process of this modification, first, the fluctuation group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and the fluctuation state and the fluctuation group selection pointer corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number (Step A452). Note that the probability states are the low probability state and the non-short time state (low probability & no time reduction), the high probability state and the short time state (
One of three states: high probability & short time), low probability state and short time state (low probability & short time). Further, the stop symbol pattern number is any one of 0 to 5 corresponding to each of the off symbol, 12R positive variation symbol, 5R positive variation symbol, 5R normal symbol, 4R positive variation symbol, and 4R normal symbol.

Next, it is determined whether the stop symbol pattern is an out symbol (step A 453). If it is an out symbol (step A 453; Y), it corresponds to the total number of the special figure 1 reserve number and the special figure 2 reserve number The variation group selection pointer is updated to a value (step A454), the pointer is saved in the variation group selection pointer area (step A455), and the special figure information setting process is ended.
In addition, if it is not the off design (step A453; N), that is, it is the big hit design, it decides whether or not the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is high probability state (step A45)
6).

When the probability state of the special view fluctuation display game is not the high probability state (step A456; N), that is, the state where the current probability state is the low probability state and not the short time state (low probability & time short not present),
If the state is either the low probability state or the short time state (low probability & time short), the pointer is saved in the variable group selection pointer area (step A455), and the special figure information setting process is ended.
On the other hand, when the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is the high probability state (step A456; Y
), That is, if the current probability state is a high probability state and a short time state (high probability & time short), whether the flag saved in the previous hit probability state flag area is a high probability middle flag It determines (step A457).

If the flag saved in the previous hit probability state flag area is not the high probability middle flag (step A 457; N), that is, if the flag saved in the last hit time probability flag area is the low probability middle flag Saves the pointer in the variation group selection pointer area (step A455), and ends the special figure information setting process.
On the other hand, if the previous hit probability state flag is the high probability middle flag (step A 457; Y
) Updates the fluctuation group selection pointer to a value for linkage (step A458), saves the pointer in the fluctuation group selection pointer area (step A455), and ends the special view information setting process.

Here, among the variation group tables in this modification, an example of the variation group table in the case where it is possible to select in the high probability state (probability state) and the result is a big hit is shown in FIG. 101 (a).
, (B).
In the variation group table in the present modification, the variation group table in the case where the selection is possible in the high probability state and the result is out is selectable in the high probability state among the variation group table in the above embodiment. This is the same as the fluctuation group table (see FIG. 97A) in the case where the result is out.

FIG. 101 (a) is a fluctuation group table when the low probability in-progress flag is saved. This variation group table is a variation group table that can be selected by the variation group selection pointer acquired in step A452 in the special map information setting process shown in FIG. The variation group table shown in FIG. 101 (a) is the same as the variation group table (see FIG. 97 (b)) in the case where the selection is possible in the high probability state and the result is a big hit among the variation group tables in the above embodiment. It is.

FIG. 101 (b) is a fluctuation group table when the high probability middle flag is saved. This variation group table is a variation group selection pointer (variation group selection pointer after update) acquired in step A458 in the special drawing information setting process shown in FIG. 100.
Is a variable group table selectable by
The N reach short system, the N reach system, the SP1 reach system, the SP2 reach system, the S reach system can be selected as the change group (the change pattern selection table) selectable by the change group table
There are P3 reach type and Premier reach type, and the distribution rate is set respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 101 (a) and 101 (b), in this modification, the period of the high probability state is a period when the low probability flag is saved as the variation pattern that is easy to be selected as the variation pattern of the big hit variation. This is different from when the high probability medium flag is saved. Specifically, when the low probability flag is saved, the fluctuation pattern with a shorter fluctuation time is more easily selected as the fluctuation pattern of the big hit fluctuation to be executed during the high probability state period, and the fluctuation time is longer It is harder to select the pattern. On the other hand, when the high probability flag is saved, as the fluctuation pattern of the big hit fluctuation to be executed during the high probability state period, the fluctuation pattern with shorter fluctuation time is more difficult to be selected, and the fluctuation pattern with longer fluctuation time is selected It is easy to do.

Thereby, after the end of the special gaming state based on the hit in the high probability state period (period of the first high probability state) occurring after the end of the special gaming state based on the hit in the low probability The period of high probability state that occurs (period of high probability state after the second time) and the period of high probability state of the second time or later may be longer than that of the first high probability state Since it becomes high, the popping-out rate in a short time can be reduced, and it can prevent that euphoria becomes high too much.
Here, in the timing chart shown in FIG. 98 (a), for example, the variation pattern of N reach short variation is selected as the variation pattern of the big hit variation to be executed during the first high probability state, and the second and third variation patterns are selected. It is a timing chart which shows an example when a change pattern of Premier reach change is chosen as a change pattern of big hit change performed during a period of the second high probability state.

In this modification, when the low probability middle flag is saved, the change pattern of the Premier reach change can not be selected as the change pattern of the big hit change executed during the high probability state period, but There is no limitation to this. That is, even when the low probability in-progress flag is saved, the change pattern of the Premier Reach change may be selected as the change pattern of the jackpot change to be executed during the high probability state period. Also, in this configuration, if the high reach probability flag is saved is higher than 1 when the low reach probability flag is saved, 1 It is possible to increase the possibility that the period of the second and subsequent high probability states is longer than the period of the second high probability state.

Specifically, among the variation group tables that can be selected in the high probability state and the result is a big hit, not only the variation group table when the high probability middle flag is saved, but the low probability middle flag is saved In the case of the fluctuation group table in the case where the high reach probability flag is saved rather than the change group table in which the low reach probability in progress flag is saved, it is possible to select the Premier reach change group. If the group table is configured such that the distribution ratio of the variable group of Premier reach type is higher, the period of the second and subsequent high probability states may be longer than the period of the first high probability state. Can be enhanced.

Moreover, if the configuration of the present modification is applied, it is also possible to extend the time saving state.
Specifically, for example, at a predetermined timing, if the current special game state is based on a hit other than the special figure time short, save the time reduction no middle flag, and the special game state this special figure If it is based on a hit in time saving, save the time saving flag.
Then, when the time saving none middle flag is saved, it is configured not to select the change pattern of the Premier reach change as the change pattern of the big hit change executed during the time reduction state. On the other hand, when the time saving / medium flag is saved, it is possible to be configured to be able to select the change pattern of the Premier reach fluctuation as the fluctuation pattern of the big hit fluctuation to be executed during the time-shortened period.

In this way, the time reduction state period (the first time reduction period period) occurring after the end of the special gaming state based on the hit other than the special figure time short and the end of the special game state based on the hit in the special figure time short The possibility of the second and subsequent time-shortened periods becoming longer than the first time-shortened period and the subsequent time-shortened period (period of the second and subsequent time shortened states) increases. The expulsion rate in a short time can be reduced, and it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

<Modification 1-2>
Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), when the special gaming state this time is based on hitting in a low probability at a predetermined timing (at the end of the special gaming state in the case of this modification) The high probability medium frequency is cleared to 0, and the high probability medium frequency is updated by +1 if the current special gaming state is based on hitting in the high probability condition.
Then, when the number of times of high probability middle is 0 times, it is configured not to select the fluctuation pattern of Premier reach fluctuation as the fluctuation pattern of the big hit fluctuation executed during the period of the high probability state. On the other hand, when the high probability medium number is one or more, as the fluctuation pattern of the premier reach fluctuation can be selected as the fluctuation pattern of the big hit fluctuation to be executed during the high probability state period, the high probability medium number increases It is also possible to configure to increase the selectivity of the fluctuation pattern of Premier reach fluctuation.

[Big hit end processing]
In order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 98 (b), the game control device 1 of the present modification example
In the case of 00, the big hit end process shown in FIG. 102 is executed instead of the big hit end process shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 102, in the big hit end processing of this modification, first, the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1001), and the special game state of this time is a hit in high probability & time reduction It is determined whether it is based on (step A1002).

If the special gaming state of this time is not based on hitting with high probability & short time (step A 1002; N), that is, the special gaming state this time is based on hitting with low probability & short time, low If it is either based on probability & time-based hit, the high probability medium number area to manage the high probability medium number is cleared to 0 (step A1033), and the big hit design is V easy design It is determined (step A1003).
If the big hit symbol is not a V easy symbol (step A1003; N), prepare information of the time saving mode B start as an effect mode after the end of the special game state (step A1004), and shift to step A1006.
Also, when the jackpot symbol is a V easy symbol (step A1003; Y), prepare information of the start of time reduction mode A as an effect mode after the end of the special gaming state (step A1005)
, A1006.

On the other hand, if the special gaming state this time is based on hitting with high probability & short time (step A 1002; Y), the value of the high probability medium number area (high probability medium number) is updated by +1 ( Step A1034) Prepare information on the start of the time saving mode A as an effect mode after the end of the special game state (step A1005), and shift to step A1006.
Since the processes after step A1006 (steps A1006 to A1030) are the same as the big hit end process shown in FIG. 62, the description of the processes after step A1006 will be omitted.

[Special map information setting process]
In order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 98 (b), the game control device 1 of the present modification example
In 00, the special figure information setting process shown in FIG. 103 is executed instead of the special figure information setting process shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 103, in the special view information setting process of this modification, first, the fluctuation group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and the probability state and the fluctuation group selection pointer corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number are acquired. (Step A452). Note that the probability states are the low probability state and the non-short time state (low probability & no time reduction), the high probability state and the short time state (
One of three states: high probability & short time), low probability state and short time state (low probability & short time). Further, the stop symbol pattern number is any one of 0 to 5 corresponding to each of the off symbol, 12R positive variation symbol, 5R positive variation symbol, 5R normal symbol, 4R positive variation symbol, and 4R normal symbol.

Next, it is determined whether the stop symbol pattern is an out symbol (step A 453). If it is an out symbol (step A 453; Y), it corresponds to the total number of the special figure 1 reserve number and the special figure 2 reserve number The variation group selection pointer is updated to a value (step A454), the pointer is saved in the variation group selection pointer area (step A455), and the special figure information setting process is ended.
In addition, if it is not the off design (step A453; N), that is, it is the big hit design, it decides whether or not the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is high probability state (step A45)
6).

When the probability state of the special view fluctuation display game is not the high probability state (step A456; N), that is, the state where the current probability state is the low probability state and not the short time state (low probability & time short not present),
If the state is either the low probability state or the short time state (low probability & time short), the pointer is saved in the variable group selection pointer area (step A455), and the special figure information setting process is ended.
On the other hand, when the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is the high probability state (step A456; Y
), That is, when the current probability state is a high probability state and a short time state (high probability & time short), the variation group selection pointer is a value corresponding to the value of the high probability medium number region (high probability medium number) Is updated (step A459), the pointer is saved in the variable group selection pointer area (step A455), and the special figure information setting process is ended.

Here, among the variation group tables in this modification, an example of the variation group table in the case where it is possible to select in the high probability state (probability state) and the result is a big hit is shown in FIG.
To (d).
In the variation group table in the present modification, the variation group table in the case where the selection is possible in the high probability state and the result is out is selectable in the high probability state among the variation group table in the above embodiment. This is the same as the fluctuation group table (see FIG. 97A) in the case where the result is out.

FIGS. 104 (a), (b), (c), and (d) are respectively the case where the number of times of high probability is 0, the case of once, the case of twice, and the case of three or more It is a change group table of cases. These variation group tables are variation group tables that can be selected by the variation group selection pointer (variation group selection pointer after update) acquired in step A459 in the special drawing information setting process shown in FIG.
There are N reach short type, N reach type, SP1 reach type, SP2 reach type, SP3 reach type and Premier reach type as fluctuation groups (variation pattern selection table) that can be selected by these fluctuation group tables. Is set. The variation group table shown in FIG. 104 (a) is the same as the variation group table (see FIG. 97 (b)) in the case where the selection is possible in the high probability state and the result is the big hit among the variation group table in the above embodiment. It is.

As shown in FIGS. 104 (a) to 104 (d), in this modification, in the period of the high probability state, the variation pattern which is easy to be selected as the variation pattern of the big hit variation differs depending on the high probability middle number. Specifically, when the number of times of high probability middle is 0, as the fluctuation pattern of the big hit fluctuation which is executed during high probability state period, fluctuation pattern whose fluctuation time is short is easy to be selected, fluctuation is long fluctuation time It is harder to select the pattern. On the other hand, when the number of times of high probability middle is 1 or more, as the fluctuation pattern of the big hit fluctuation which is executed during high probability state period, fluctuation pattern whose fluctuation time is short is difficult to be selected, fluctuation pattern whose fluctuation time is long As well as being easy to select, as the number of times of high probability increases, a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time becomes easy to be selected.

Thereby, after the end of the special gaming state based on the hit in the high probability state period (period of the first high probability state) occurring after the end of the special gaming state based on the hit in the low probability The period of high probability state that occurs (period of high probability state after the second time) and the period of high probability state of the second time or later may be longer than that of the first high probability state Since it becomes high, the popping-out rate in a short time can be reduced, and it can prevent that euphoria becomes high too much.

Furthermore, as the number of times the high probability state occurs continuously increases, the possibility that the period of the high probability state will be long increases (in the case of the present modification, the second time than the period of the first high probability state) The period of high probability state is likely to be long-term, and 3 more than the period of the second high probability state
Since the second high probability state period is likely to take a long time), it is possible to effectively prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.
Here, in the timing chart shown in FIG. 98 (b), for example, the fluctuation pattern of N reach short fluctuation is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot fluctuation to be executed during the first high probability state period, and the second high As a fluctuation pattern of the big hit fluctuation which executes during the period of probability state,
When the variation pattern of SP reach variation (SP1, SP2, or SP3 reach variation) is selected and the variation pattern of Premier Reach variation is selected as the variation pattern of the big hit variation to be executed during the third high probability state 7 is a timing chart showing an example of the above.

In this modification, when the high probability medium number is 0, it is configured not to be able to select the fluctuation pattern of the Premier reach fluctuation as the fluctuation pattern of the big hit fluctuation to be executed during the high probability state period, There is no limitation to this. That is, even when the number of times of high probability is 0,
A variation pattern of Premier Reach variation may be selected as the variation pattern of the jackpot variation to be executed during the high probability state. Further, in this configuration, if the selection rate of the variation pattern of the Premier reach change is higher when the number of high probability is 1 or more than when the number of high probability is 0, The possibility that the period of the second and subsequent high probability states is longer than the period of the first high probability state can be increased.

Specifically, among the variation group tables that can be selected in the high probability state and the result is a big hit, the variation group table in the case where the number of times of high probability is not zero (in the case of this modification)
Not only the fluctuation group table when the high probability middle number is 1 time, the fluctuation group table when the high probability middle number is 2 times, and the fluctuation group table when the high probability middle number is 3 times or more) Also in the variation group table when the high probability medium frequency is 0 times, the high reach probability medium frequency is higher than the fluctuation group table when the high reach probability medium frequency is 0, enabling selection of the premium reach type fluctuation group. If the variation group table in the case of not being 0 times is configured so that the distribution ratio of the variation group of Premier reach system is higher, the period of the second and subsequent high probability states is longer than the period of the first high probability state. Can increase the possibility of becoming a long-term.

Further, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 104 (d), the same variation group table is selected when the number of times of high probability is three or more, but it is limited to this. Absent. That is, even when the high probability medium number is three or more, different fluctuation group tables may be selected according to the high probability medium number. Furthermore, even when the high probability middle number is 3 or more, different fluctuation group tables are selected according to the high probability middle number, and the fluctuation pattern has a long fluctuation time as the high probability middle number increases. It is also possible to make it easy to be selected.
Moreover, in this modification, as the high probability medium frequency increases, a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time tends to be selected, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The selectivity of the pattern should be increased. That is, it is only necessary to increase the distribution ratio of the variable group of the Premier Reach system as the number of times of high probability and medium increases.

Moreover, if the configuration of the present modification is applied, it is also possible to extend the time saving state.
Specifically, for example, if the special game state of this time is based on a hit other than special time, the time count of the short time is cleared to 0, and the special game state of this time is special. If it is based on a hit in the chart time, then the number of times is shortened by +1.
Then, when the number of times of time saving and medium is 0, it is configured such that the pattern of changing the Premier Reach change can not be selected as the pattern of changing the big hit change performed during the time reduction state. On the other hand, when the number of times of time reduction is 1 or more, the fluctuation pattern of Premier Reach fluctuation can be selected as the fluctuation pattern of the big hit change to be executed during the time reduction state. It is also possible to configure to increase the selectivity of the variation pattern of reach variation.

In this way, the time reduction state period (the first time reduction period period) occurring after the end of the special gaming state based on the hit other than the special figure time short and the end of the special game state based on the hit in the special figure time short The possibility of the second and subsequent time-shortened periods becoming longer than the first time-shortened period and the subsequent time-shortened period (period of the second and subsequent time shortened states) increases. The expulsion rate in a short time can be reduced, and it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

As described above, the effect control device 300 displays the decorative special figure fluctuation display according to the determined fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation pattern selected by the game control apparatus 100) based on the reception of the information on the start of the special drawing fluctuation display game. Set the detailed effect contents in the game.
In the modified example 1-1 and the modified example 1-2, the effect control device 300 counts the high probability medium number (or the number of consecutive units), and as the high probability medium number (or the number of consecutive units) increases, You may make it increase the presentation content which can be set as the presentation content (the presentation content (the presentation aspect of a premier reach presentation)) according to the change pattern of the premier reach change. Thereby, for example, a rendering based on a series of stories across a plurality of special view variable display games (i.e., a rendering such that a story progresses as the number of times of high probability (or the number of consecutive runs increases)) It is possible to enhance interest as it is possible to Here, the continuous number of times is the number of continuation occurrences of the special gaming state that generates the high probability state after the end of the special gaming state. In addition, the number of consecutive units may be the number of occurrences of the special game state in the period of the time saving state (power support state).

In addition, in the modification 1-1 and the modification 1-2, the fluctuation group of the Premier Reach system can not be selected by the fluctuation group table when the result is out, and only by the fluctuation group table when the result is the big hit Although it was configured to be selectable (the change pattern of the Premier reach change was regarded as the big hit determined change pattern), it is not limited thereto.
That is, the variation group of the Premier Reach system may be configured to be selectable not only by the variation group table when the result is a big hit but also by the variation group table when the result is an omission.

Further, in the modification 1-1, the second high probability state period and the subsequent high probability state period may be shorter than the first high probability state period. Specifically, for example, when the low probability in-progress flag is saved, it is configured to be able to select the change pattern of the Premier Reach change as the change pattern of the jackpot change to be executed during the high probability state period.
On the other hand, when the high probability middle flag is saved, it may be configured such that the change pattern of the premier reach change can not be selected as the change pattern of the big hit change executed during the high probability state. Also when comprised in this way, it can prevent that euphoria becomes high too much.

Further, in the modification 1-2, as the number of times the high probability state occurs continuously increases, the possibility that the period of the high probability state becomes a short period may increase. Specifically, for example, regardless of the high probability medium frequency, as the fluctuation pattern of the big hit fluctuation to be executed during the high probability state period, it is configured to be able to select the fluctuation pattern of Premier reach fluctuation, and The selection rate of the variation pattern of Premier reach variation may be configured to decrease as the number increases. Also when comprised in this way, it can prevent that euphoria becomes high too much.

In the modification 1-1, regardless of whether the saved per-time probability state flag is the low probability medium flag or the high probability medium flag, the big hit fluctuation performed during the high probability state period As the fluctuation pattern, it is configured to be able to select the fluctuation pattern of Premier reach fluctuation, and when the low probability in-progress flag is saved, the fluctuation pattern of the first fluctuation time is selected as the fluctuation pattern of Premier Reach fluctuation On the other hand, when the high probability in-progress flag is saved, it is also possible to configure as the change pattern of the premier reach change, the change pattern of the second change time longer than the first change time.
Furthermore, when configured in this way, the effect control device 300 performs the change display effect before the reach effect when the change pattern of the first change time is selected and when the change pattern of the second change time is selected. The period of (including reach effect) is the same, and the period of the temporary stop display effect which temporarily displays all of the left, middle and right symbols is different (the variation pattern of the second fluctuation time is temporary stop display effect) You may perform a Premier Reach production for a long period of time. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player from consuming the game ball unnecessarily. Moreover, about the fluctuation display production before reach production, the same production can be performed when the fluctuation pattern of the first fluctuation time is selected and when the fluctuation pattern of the second fluctuation time is selected.

Further, in the modification 1-2, regardless of the high probability medium frequency, the fluctuation pattern of the premium reach fluctuation can be selected as the fluctuation pattern of the big hit fluctuation to be executed during the high probability state period, and When the number of times is 0, the variation pattern of the first variation time is selected as the variation pattern of premier reach variation, and when the number of medium times of high probability is 1 or more, the variation of premier reach variation As a pattern, it is possible to select a fluctuation pattern of fluctuation time longer than the first fluctuation time, and configure the fluctuation time of Premier reach fluctuation to be longer as the number of times of high probability increases.
Furthermore, when configured in this way, the effect control device 300 can achieve reach effects at the time when the variation pattern of the first variation time is selected and when the variation pattern of the variation time that is longer than the first variation time is selected. The period of the previous variable display effect (including reach effect) is the same, and the period of the temporary stop display effect of temporarily displaying all of the left, middle and right symbols may be different. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player from consuming the game ball unnecessarily. Moreover, about the fluctuation display production before reach production, the same production is performed when the fluctuation pattern of the first fluctuation time is selected and when the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time longer than the first fluctuation time is selected. be able to.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the modification 1-1 and the modification 1-2 is a player when the result of the variation display game (special figure variation display game) in which the plurality of identification information is variably displayed is a special result. After the end of the special game state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (in the case of this modification, that the probability change operation area switch 38d has detected the game ball). Generates a specific state (high probability state in the case of this modification) in which there is a high possibility that the timing of occurrence of the special gaming state is earlier than that in the normal state (in the case of this modification, the low probability state (normal probability state)) Specific state generation means (game control apparatus 100), and fluctuation patterns for executing the fluctuation display game fluctuation pattern table (in the case of this modification, fluctuation group table and fluctuation pattern selection table A change pattern setting means for setting, based on (a game controller 100), and a. And it is a change display game performed during a specific state (the first high probability state) generated after the end of the special gaming state based on the change display game performed in the normal state, and the change display in which the result is a special result The game is a variable display game, and it is a variable display game executed during a specific state (high probability state after the second time) generated after the end of the special gaming state based on the variable display game executed during the specific state, In the case where the variable display game for which the special result is the special result is the specific variable display game, the fluctuation pattern setting means sets the fluctuation pattern of the specific fluctuation display game to the fluctuation pattern table set in the normal fluctuation display game (for example, FIG. )) Can be set based on the fluctuation pattern table (for example, FIG. 101 (b)) in which a fluctuation time longer than that is easily selected That.

Therefore, the special game state based on the variable display game performed during the specific state and the period of the specific state (period of the first specific state) occurring after the end of the special game state based on the variable display game performed during the normal state And the period of the specific state which occurs after the end of the second period (the period of the second and subsequent specific states), and the period of the second specific period is likely to be longer than the period of the first specific state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 of the modification 1-2 is specified during the first specific state (for example, the second high probability state) to be executed during the first specific state (for example, the second high probability state). The second specific fluctuation display game to be executed during the second specific state (for example, the third high probability state) in which the fluctuation display game is a first specific fluctuation display game and the number of consecutive occurrences is greater than the first number In the case of the specific variation display game, the variation pattern setting unit (game control device 100) sets the variation pattern of the second specific variation display game to a variation pattern table set in the first specific variation display game (for example, FIG. b) It is possible to set based on the fluctuation pattern table (for example, FIG. 104 (c)) in which a fluctuation time longer than that is easy to be selected.

Therefore, since the possibility that the period of a specific state will be long-term becomes high as the number of times which a specific state generate | occur | produces continuously increases, it can prevent effectively that euphoria becomes high too much.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the modified example 1-1 and the modified example 1-2, in the specific state, the probability that the result of the variation display game (special figure variation display game) is a special result is the normal state (low probability state)
It is a high probability change state (high probability state) compared to.

Therefore, since the possibility that the period of the second and subsequent probability change states (high probability state) is longer than the period of the first probability change state (high probability state) is high, the euphoria becomes too high. Can be prevented.
The specific state may be a power support state (time saving state) in which the gaming ball is likely to win a prize for the ordinary electric winning combination (normal variation winning device 37). That is, the specific state may be a definite change state but not a power supply state, or may not be a definite change state but a power supply state, or both a positive change state and a charge support state It may be in the state.

<Modification 2>
In addition, as a method of extending the period of the high probability state, for example, any of the fluctuation patterns of the special figure fluctuation display game (hereinafter referred to as “the fluctuation of the fall”) in which the result is lost in the period of the high probability state There is a method of extending the fluctuation time of (in the case of this modification, fluctuation pattern of no reach short fluctuation).

<Modification 2-1>
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (a), a predetermined timing (in the case of this modification,
At the end of the special gaming state), if the special gaming state this time is based on the hit in the low probability, save the flag in the low probability, the current special gaming state is hit in the high probability If it is based, save the high probability medium flag.
Then, when the low probability middle flag is saved, the first fluctuation time (2.0 seconds in the case of this modification) is fluctuated as a fluctuation pattern of no reach short fluctuation executed during the high probability state period. Configure the pattern to be selected. On the other hand, when the high probability middle flag is saved, as a fluctuation pattern of no reach short fluctuation executed during the high probability state period,
It is also possible to configure such that a fluctuation pattern of a second fluctuation time (2.1 seconds in this modification) longer than the first fluctuation time is selected.

[Big hit end processing]
The big hit end process of this modification is the same as the big hit end process (see FIG. 99) of the above modification example 1-1.
That is, in order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 98 (a), the gaming control apparatus 100 of this modification executes the big hit end process shown in FIG. 99 instead of the big hit end process shown in FIG.

[Special map information setting process]
In order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 98 (a), the game control device 1 of the present modification example
In 00, in place of the special figure information setting process shown in FIG. 47, the special figure information setting process shown in FIG. 105 is executed.
As shown in FIG. 105, in the special view information setting process of this modification, first, the change group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and the change state selection pointer corresponding to the probability state and the stop symbol pattern number is acquired. (Step A452). Note that the probability states are the low probability state and the non-short time state (low probability & no time reduction), the high probability state and the short time state (
One of three states: high probability & short time), low probability state and short time state (low probability & short time). Further, the stop symbol pattern number is any one of 0 to 5 corresponding to each of the off symbol, 12R positive variation symbol, 5R positive variation symbol, 5R normal symbol, 4R positive variation symbol, and 4R normal symbol.

Next, it is determined whether the stop symbol pattern is an out symbol (step A453), and if it is not an out symbol (step A453; N), that is, a big hit symbol, the pointer is saved in the variation group selection pointer area ( Step A455) The special drawing information setting process is ended.
If the symbol is an out symbol (step A453; Y), it is determined whether the probability state of the special view fluctuation display game is a high probability state (step A456).

When the probability state of the special view fluctuation display game is not the high probability state (step A456; N), that is, the state where the current probability state is the low probability state and not the short time state (low probability & time short not present),
If it is either the low probability state or the short time state (low probability & time short), the special figure 1 number of reservations,
The variation group selection pointer is updated to a value corresponding to the total value of the special figure 2 pending number (step A4)
54) Save the pointer in the variation group selection pointer area (step A455),
The special drawing information setting process is ended.
On the other hand, when the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is the high probability state (step A456; Y
), That is, if the current probability state is a high probability state and a short time state (high probability & time short), whether the flag saved in the previous hit probability state flag area is a high probability middle flag It determines (step A457).

If the flag saved in the previous hit probability state flag area is not the high probability middle flag (step A 457; N), that is, if the flag saved in the last hit time probability flag area is the low probability middle flag Updates the variation group selection pointer to a value corresponding to the total number of the special figure 1 pending count and the special figure 2 pending number (step A454), saves the pointer in the variation group select pointer area (step A455), The figure information setting process is ended.
On the other hand, if the previous hit probability state flag is the high probability middle flag (step A 457; Y
) Updates the fluctuation group selection pointer to a value for linkage (step A458), saves the pointer in the fluctuation group selection pointer area (step A455), and ends the special view information setting process.

Here, among the variation group tables in the present modification, an example of the variation group table in the case where the selection is possible in the high probability state (probability state) and the result is an off state is shown in FIG.
, (B).
In the variation group table in the present modification, the variation group table in the case where selection is possible in the high probability state and the result is a big hit is selectable in the high probability state among the variation group table in the above embodiment. This is the same as the fluctuation group table (see FIG. 97 (b)) when the result is a big hit.

FIG. 106 (a) is a fluctuation group table when the low probability in-progress flag is saved. This variation group table is a variation group selection pointer (variation group selection pointer after update) acquired in step A454 in the special map information setting process shown in FIG. 105.
Is a variable group table selectable by
The first non-reach short system, N reach short system, non-reach system, N reach system, SP1 reach system, SP2 reach system, SP3 reach system as the change group (the change pattern selection table) selectable by this fluctuation group table There is a system, and the distribution rate is set respectively. Then, for example, when the first reach-less short variation group is selected, the variation pattern of the no-reach short variation of the first variation time (2.0 seconds in this modification) is selected. .

FIG. 106 (b) is a fluctuation group table when the high probability middle flag is saved. This variation group table is a variation group selection pointer (variation group selection pointer after update) acquired in step A458 in the special figure information setting process shown in FIG. 105.
Is a variable group table selectable by
The second non-reach short system, N reach short system, non-reach system, N reach system, SP1 reach system, SP2 reach system, SP3 reach system as the variable group (the change pattern selection table) that can be selected by this fluctuation group table There is a system, and the distribution rate is set respectively. Then, for example, when the second reach-less short fluctuation group is selected, the reach-less short fluctuation of the second fluctuation time (2.1 seconds in the present modification) longer than the first fluctuation time. The variation pattern of is selected.

As shown in FIGS. 106 (a) and 106 (b), in this modification, in the high probability state period, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected as the fluctuation pattern of no reach short fluctuation has the low probability flag saved. It differs from when it is being done and when the high probability flag is being saved. Specifically, when the low probability middle flag is saved, a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is used as the fluctuation pattern of no reach short fluctuation executed during the high probability state period (in the case of this modification, the fluctuation pattern A variation pattern of time 2.0 seconds is to be selected. On the other hand, when the high probability in-progress flag is saved, a variation pattern in which the variation time is long as the variation pattern of no reach short variation executed during the high probability state period (in the case of this modification, variation time 2. A variation pattern of 1 second is to be selected.

Thereby, after the end of the special gaming state based on the hit in the high probability state period (period of the first high probability state) occurring after the end of the special gaming state based on the hit in the low probability The period of high probability state that occurs (period of high probability state after the second time) and the period of high probability state of the second time or later may be longer than that of the first high probability state Since it becomes high, the popping-out rate in a short time can be reduced, and it can prevent that euphoria becomes high too much.
Here, in the timing chart shown in FIG. 98A, for example, as the fluctuation pattern of the outlier fluctuation to be executed during the first high probability state period, the first fluctuation pattern of the no reach short circuit fluctuation is selected, 2 It is a timing chart which shows an example at the time of a change pattern of the 2nd non-reaching short change being chosen as a change pattern of out-of-out change performed during a period of time of the 3rd and 3rd high probability state.

If the configuration of this modification is applied, it is also possible to lengthen the time saving state.
Specifically, for example, at a predetermined timing, if the current special game state is based on a hit other than the special figure time short, save the time reduction no middle flag, and the special game state this special figure If it is based on a hit in time saving, save the time saving flag.
Then, when the time saving no / medium flag is saved, the variation pattern of the first fluctuation time is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the reach none short fluctuation to be executed during the time shortening state. On the other hand, if the time saving flag is saved, the second variation time fluctuation pattern longer than the first variation time is selected as the fluctuation pattern of no reach short fluctuation to be executed during the time reduction state. It is also possible to configure.

In this way, the time reduction state period (the first time reduction period period) occurring after the end of the special gaming state based on the hit other than the special figure time short and the end of the special game state based on the hit in the special figure time short The possibility of the second and subsequent time-shortened periods becoming longer than the first time-shortened period and the subsequent time-shortened period (period of the second and subsequent time shortened states) increases. The expulsion rate in a short time can be reduced, and it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

<Modification 2-2>
Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), when the special gaming state this time is based on hitting in a low probability at a predetermined timing (at the end of the special gaming state in the case of this modification) The high probability medium frequency is cleared to 0, and the high probability medium frequency is updated by +1 if the current special gaming state is based on hitting in the high probability condition.
And when the number of times of high probability middle is 0 times, fluctuation of 1st fluctuation time (2.0 seconds in this modification) as fluctuation pattern of no reach short fluctuation executed during high probability state period Configure the pattern to be selected. On the other hand, when the number of times of high probability middle is 1 or more, as the fluctuation pattern of no reach short fluctuation executed during the period of high probability state, the fluctuation time longer than the first fluctuation time (2 in this modification) It is also possible to configure such that the variation time of the no reach short variation becomes longer as the variation pattern of (more than 1 second) is selected and the number of times of high probability increase.

[Big hit end processing]
The big hit end processing of this modification is the same as the big hit end processing (see FIG. 102) of the above-described modification 1-2.
That is, in order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 98 (b), the gaming control apparatus 100 of this modification executes the big hit end process shown in FIG. 102 instead of the big hit end process shown in FIG.

[Special map information setting process]
In order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 98 (b), the game control device 1 of the present modification example
In 00, in place of the special figure information setting process shown in FIG. 47, the special figure information setting process shown in FIG. 107 is executed.
As shown in FIG. 107, in the special view information setting process of this modification, first, the fluctuation group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and the probability state and the fluctuation group selection pointer corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number are acquired. (Step A452). Note that the probability states are the low probability state and the non-short time state (low probability & no time reduction), the high probability state and the short time state (
One of three states: high probability & short time), low probability state and short time state (low probability & short time). Further, the stop symbol pattern number is any one of 0 to 5 corresponding to each of the off symbol, 12R positive variation symbol, 5R positive variation symbol, 5R normal symbol, 4R positive variation symbol, and 4R normal symbol.

Next, it is determined whether the stop symbol pattern is an out symbol (step A453), and if it is not an out symbol (step A453; N), that is, a big hit symbol, the pointer is saved in the variation group selection pointer area ( Step A455) The special drawing information setting process is ended.
If the symbol is an out symbol (step A453; Y), it is determined whether the probability state of the special view fluctuation display game is a high probability state (step A456).

When the probability state of the special view fluctuation display game is not the high probability state (step A456; N), that is, the state where the current probability state is the low probability state and not the short time state (low probability & time short not present),
If it is either the low probability state or the short time state (low probability & time short), the special figure 1 number of reservations,
The variation group selection pointer is updated to a value corresponding to the total value of the special figure 2 pending number (step A4)
54) Save the pointer in the variation group selection pointer area (step A455),
The special drawing information setting process is ended.
On the other hand, when the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is the high probability state (step A456; Y
), That is, when the current probability state is a high probability state and a short time state (high probability & time short), the variation group selection pointer is a value corresponding to the value of the high probability medium number region (high probability medium number) Is updated (step A459), the pointer is saved in the variable group selection pointer area (step A455), and the special figure information setting process is ended.

Here, among the variation group tables in the present modification, an example of the variation group table in the case where the selection is possible in the high probability state (probability state) and the result is an off state is shown in FIG.
To (d).
In the variation group table in the present modification, the variation group table in the case where selection is possible in the high probability state and the result is a big hit is selectable in the high probability state among the variation group table in the above embodiment. This is the same as the fluctuation group table (see FIG. 97 (b)) when the result is a big hit.

FIGS. 108 (a), (b), (c), and (d) are respectively the case where the number of times of high probability is 0, the case of once, the case of twice, and the case of three or more It is a change group table of cases. These variation group tables are variation group tables that can be selected by the variation group selection pointer (variation group selection pointer after update) acquired in step A459 in the special view information setting process shown in FIG.
The first reach-less short system, the N reach short system, the reach-less system, the N reach system, and the like can be selected as a change group (change pattern selection table) that can be selected by the change group table when the number of times of high probability is 0 times. There are SP1 reach type, SP2 reach type and SP3 reach type, and the distribution rate is set respectively. Then, for example, when the first reach-less short fluctuation group is selected, the first fluctuation time (2.0 seconds in the case of this modification)
Variation pattern of no reach short variation is selected.

Also, as a variation group (variation pattern selection table) that can be selected by the variation group table when the number of times of high probability is 1 time, the second no reach short system, N reach short system, no reach system, N reach There is a system, an SP1 reach system, an SP2 reach system, and an SP3 reach system, and distribution rates are set respectively. Then, for example, when the second reach-less short fluctuation group is selected, the reach-less short fluctuation of the second fluctuation time (2.1 seconds in the present modification) longer than the first fluctuation time. The variation pattern of is selected.

In addition, as the fluctuation group (variation pattern selection table) selectable by the fluctuation group table in the case where the number of times in the high probability is 2 times, the third reach-less short system, N reach short system, reach-less system, N reach There is a system, an SP1 reach system, an SP2 reach system, and an SP3 reach system, and distribution rates are set respectively. Then, for example, when the third reach-less short fluctuation group is selected, the reach-less short fluctuation of the third fluctuation time (2.2 seconds in the present modification) longer than the second fluctuation time. The variation pattern of is selected.

In addition, as a variation group (variation pattern selection table) that can be selected by the variation group table when the number of times of high probability is 3 or more, the fourth system with no reach short circuit, N
Reach short system, no reach system, N reach system, SP1 reach system, SP2 reach system, SP
There are 3 reach systems, and the distribution rate is set for each. Then, for example, when the fourth reach-less short fluctuation group is selected, the reach-less short fluctuation of the fourth fluctuation time (2.3 seconds in the present modification) longer than the third fluctuation time. The variation pattern of is selected.

As shown in FIGS. 108 (a) to 108 (d), in this modification, in the high probability state period, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected as the fluctuation pattern of no reach short fluctuation corresponds to the number of times of high probability It is different. Specifically, when the number of times of high probability middle is 0 times, as the fluctuation pattern of no reach short fluctuation executed during the period of high probability state, the fluctuation pattern whose fluctuation time is short (in the case of this modification, fluctuation) A variation pattern of time 2.0 seconds is to be selected. On the other hand, when the number of times of high probability middle is 1 or more, the fluctuation pattern of the reachless short fluctuation executed during the period of high probability state is a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time (in the case of this modification, fluctuation time 2 The variation pattern of reach non-short variation becomes longer as the number of times of high probability increase is increased while the variation pattern of 1 second or more is selected.

Thereby, after the end of the special gaming state based on the hit in the high probability state period (period of the first high probability state) occurring after the end of the special gaming state based on the hit in the low probability The period of high probability state that occurs (period of high probability state after the second time) and the period of high probability state of the second time or later may be longer than that of the first high probability state Since it becomes high, the popping-out rate in a short time can be reduced, and it can prevent that euphoria becomes high too much.

Furthermore, as the number of times the high probability state occurs continuously increases, the possibility that the period of the high probability state will be long increases (in the case of the present modification, the second time than the period of the first high probability state) The period of high probability state is likely to be long-term, and 3 more than the period of the second high probability state
Since the second high probability state period is likely to take a long time), it is possible to effectively prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.
Here, in the timing chart shown in FIG. 98 (b), for example, as the fluctuation pattern of the outlier fluctuation to be executed during the first high probability state period, the fluctuation pattern of the first reach-less short fluctuation is selected, 2 The second reach-less short variation fluctuation pattern is selected as the outlier fluctuation variation pattern to be executed during the second high probability state period, and is executed as the outlier variation fluctuation pattern to be executed during the third high probability state period. 11 is a timing chart showing an example when the third reach non-short change fluctuation pattern is selected.

In this modification, as shown in FIG. 108 (d), the same variation group table is selected when the number of times of high probability is three or more, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. That is, even when the high probability medium number is three or more, different fluctuation group tables may be selected according to the high probability medium number. Furthermore, even when the high probability medium frequency is three or more, different fluctuation group tables are selected according to the high probability medium frequency, and the fluctuation of reach-less short fluctuation is increased as the high frequency medium frequency increases. It is also possible to configure to increase the time.

Moreover, if the configuration of the present modification is applied, it is also possible to extend the time saving state.
Specifically, for example, if the special game state of this time is based on a hit other than special time, the time count of the short time is cleared to 0, and the special game state of this time is special. If it is based on a hit in the chart time, then the number of times is shortened by +1.
Then, when the number of times of time saving and the number of times of middle are 0 times, the variation pattern of the first variation time is selected as the variation pattern of the no reach short variation to be executed during the period of the time saving state. On the other hand, if the number of short and medium times is one or more, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time longer than the first fluctuation time is selected as the fluctuation pattern of no reach short fluctuation executed during the time-shortened state period, It is also possible to configure so that the variation time of the no reach short variation becomes longer as the number of times is shorter and the number of times is greater.

In this way, the time reduction state period (the first time reduction period period) occurring after the end of the special gaming state based on the hit other than the special figure time short and the end of the special game state based on the hit in the special figure time short The possibility of the second and subsequent time-shortened periods becoming longer than the first time-shortened period and the subsequent time-shortened period (period of the second and subsequent time shortened states) increases. The expulsion rate in a short time can be reduced, and it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Further, in the modification 2-1, the first variation time is set to 2.0 seconds and the second variation time is set to 2.1 seconds, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first variation time and the second variation The time can be changed as appropriate. When the difference between the first fluctuation time and the second fluctuation time is small as in this modification,
It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the fluctuation time of the no reach short change has increased.
The same applies to modification 2-2. That is, the first variation time, the second variation time, the third variation time, and the fourth variation time can be changed as appropriate. When the difference between the first fluctuation time and the second fluctuation time, the difference between the second fluctuation time and the third fluctuation time, and the difference between the third fluctuation time and the fourth fluctuation time as in this modification It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the fluctuation time of the no-reach short change has increased.

Here, in the modification 2-1, the effect control device 300 starts the fluctuation time and when the fluctuation pattern of the first fluctuation time is selected and when the fluctuation pattern of the second fluctuation time is selected. The state of the effect at the end (for example, the decoration by the frame decoration device 18 or the panel decoration device 44 (
Only the tempo of the effect is changed so that the state of light emission) and the state of the output sound from the speakers 19a and 19b match (specifically, when the fluctuation pattern of the second fluctuation time is selected, the effect of The tempo may be delayed). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the fluctuation time of the no reach short change has increased.

For example, when the tempo of the effect is the same when the variation pattern of the first variation time is selected and when the variation pattern of the second variation time is selected, the end time of the first variation time and the first variation time are selected. 2 At the end of the fluctuation time, the light emission mode of the decoration LED may be different, or the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b may be different. Such a difference (difference in the state of presentation at the end of the fluctuation time) may cause the player to notice that the fluctuation time of the no-reach short fluctuation has been extended. On the other hand, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the fluctuation time of the no-reach short fluctuation is extended by changing only the tempo of the effect so that such a difference does not occur.
The same applies to modification 2-2. That is, in the modification 2-2, the effect control device 300 selects the fluctuation pattern of the first fluctuation time, the fluctuation pattern of the second fluctuation time, and the fluctuation pattern of the third fluctuation time. Only the tempo of the effect is changed so that the state of the effect at the start and the end of the change time will coincide when the is selected and when the change pattern of the fourth change time is selected. It is also good. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the fluctuation time of the no reach short change has increased.

Further, in the modification 2-1, the second high probability state period and the subsequent high probability state period may be more likely to be shorter than the first high probability state period. Specifically, for example, when the low probability flag is saved, the fluctuation pattern of the first fluctuation time is selected as the fluctuation pattern of no reach short fluctuation to be executed during the high probability state period. Do. On the other hand, when the high probability flag is saved, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time shorter than the first fluctuation time is selected as the fluctuation pattern of no reach short fluctuation executed during the high probability state. You may Also when comprised in this way, it can prevent that euphoria becomes high too much.

Further, in the modification 2-2, as the number of times the high probability state occurs continuously increases, the possibility that the period of the high probability state becomes short may increase. Specifically, for example, when the number of times of high probability middle is 0 times, the fluctuation pattern of the first fluctuation time is selected as the fluctuation pattern of no reach short fluctuation executed during the high probability state period. Do.
On the other hand, when the number of times of high probability middle is one or more, the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation time shorter than the first fluctuation time is selected as the fluctuation pattern of no reach short fluctuation executed during the high probability state period. The variation time of the no reach short variation may be configured to decrease as the number of times of high probability increases. Also when comprised in this way, it can prevent that euphoria becomes high too much.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the modified example 2-1 and the modified example 2-2 is a player when the result of the variation display game (special figure variation display game) in which the plurality of identification information is variably displayed is a special result. After the end of the special game state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (in the case of this modification, that the probability change operation area switch 38d has detected the game ball). Generates a specific state (high probability state in the case of this modification) in which there is a high possibility that the timing of occurrence of the special gaming state is earlier than that in the normal state (in the case of this modification, the low probability state (normal probability state)) The specific state generation means (game control device 100), the change pattern selection means (game control device 100) for selecting the change pattern of the change display game, and the change pattern selected by the change pattern selection means Presentation control means for executing the corresponding effect (the effect control device 3
00) and. And it is a change display game performed during a specific state (the first high probability state) generated after the end of the special game state based on the change display game performed in the normal state, and the result is a change display that does not become a special result The game is a variable display game, and it is a variable display game executed during a specific state (high probability state after the second time) generated after the end of the special gaming state based on the variable display game executed during the specific state, If the variation display game that does not produce a special result is the specific variation display game, the variation pattern for selection of the particular variation display game having the highest selection rate (for example, the variation pattern of the second non-reach short variation) is The normal variation pattern having the highest selection rate among the variation patterns of the normal variation display game (for example, the first reach non-short variation variation The variation time is longer than the pattern), and the effect control means changes only the tempo (in the case of this modification) in the case where the variation pattern for specification is selected and the case where the variation pattern for normal use is selected. Can be performed.

Therefore, the special game state based on the variable display game performed during the specific state and the period of the specific state (period of the first specific state) occurring after the end of the special game state based on the variable display game performed during the normal state And the period of the specific state which occurs after the end of the second period (the period of the second and subsequent specific states), and the period of the second specific period is likely to be longer than the period of the first specific state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.
In addition, the fluctuation pattern for identification (for example, fluctuation pattern of the second non-reach short fluctuation)
However, it can be made difficult for the player to notice that the fluctuation time is longer than the normal fluctuation pattern (for example, the fluctuation pattern of the first no-reach short fluctuation).

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 of the modification 2-2 is specified during the first specific state (for example, the second high probability state) to be executed during the first specific state (for example, the second high probability state). The second specific fluctuation display game to be executed during the second specific state (for example, the third high probability state) in which the fluctuation display game is a first specific fluctuation display game and the number of consecutive occurrences is greater than the first number When it is set as a specific variation display game, the second variation pattern for selection having the highest selection rate among variation patterns of the second specific variation display game (for example, a variation pattern of the third non-reach short variation)
The variation time is longer than the first identification variation pattern (for example, the second reach non-short variation variation pattern) having the highest selectivity among the variation patterns of the first identification variation display game.
The effect control means (effect control device 300) performs the same effect (in the case of this modification, only the tempo) when the second variation pattern for identification is selected and when the first variation pattern for identification is selected. It is possible to execute the changed presentation).

Therefore, since the possibility that the period of a specific state will be long-term becomes high as the number of times which a specific state generate | occur | produces continuously increases, it can prevent effectively that euphoria becomes high too much.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the modified example 2-1 and the modified example 2-2, in the specific state, the probability that the result of the variation display game (special figure variation display game) becomes the special result is the normal state (low probability state)
It is a high probability change state (high probability state) compared to.

Therefore, since the possibility that the period of the second and subsequent probability change states (high probability state) is longer than the period of the first probability change state (high probability state) is high, the euphoria becomes too high. Can be prevented.
The specific state may be a power support state (time saving state) in which the gaming ball is likely to win a prize for the ordinary electric winning combination (normal variation winning device 37). That is, the specific state may be a definite change state but not a power supply state, or may not be a definite change state but a power supply state, or both a positive change state and a charge support state It may be in the state.

<Modification 3>
Moreover, as a method of extending the period of the high probability state, for example, there is a method of providing a preparation time between one special figure fluctuation display game and the next special figure fluctuation display game in the high probability state period.
For example, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 98 (c), when the preparation time is not provided between the one special figure variation display game and the next special figure variation display game, the one special figure variation display game When the fluctuation time ends (t141) and the stop display time (display time set in step A603) for displaying the result of the one special drawing fluctuation display game elapses (t142), the next special drawing fluctuation display game It is started.

On the other hand, in the case where a preparation time is provided between one special figure fluctuation display game and the next special figure fluctuation display game, for example, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 98 (c), the one special figure fluctuation display game When the fluctuation time ends (t151) and the stop display time (display time set in step A603) for displaying the result of the one special figure fluctuation display game elapses (t152), the preparation time is started. And if the said preparation time passes (t153), the following special figure fluctuation display game will be started. In the preparation time, as in the case of the stop display time, the special symbol is stopped, so by providing the preparation time, the stop display time (pattern stop time) is apparently extended.

<Modification 3-1>
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (a), a predetermined timing (in the case of this modification,
At the end of the special gaming state), if the special gaming state this time is based on the hit in the low probability, save the flag in the low probability, the current special gaming state is hit in the high probability If it is based, save the high probability medium flag.
Then, when the low probability middle flag is saved, the preparation time is not provided between the one special figure fluctuation display game and the next special figure fluctuation display game to be executed during the high probability state period. . On the other hand, when the high probability middle flag is saved, the preparation time (for example, 400 ms) between the first special figure fluctuation display game and the next special figure fluctuation display game executed during the high probability state period.
It is also possible to configure to provide

Thereby, after the end of the special gaming state based on the hit in the high probability state period (period of the first high probability state) occurring after the end of the special gaming state based on the hit in the low probability The period of the high probability state that occurs (the period of the second and subsequent high probability states) and the period of the second and subsequent high probability states are longer than the period of the first high probability state. It is possible to reduce the rate of popping out of time and to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

In this modification, when the low probability middle flag is saved, the preparation time is performed between one special figure fluctuation display game and the next special figure fluctuation display game executed during the high probability state period. Although it has been configured not to provide, it is not limited to this. That is, even when the low probability flag is saved, the preparation time may be provided. Also, in this configuration, if the length of preparation time is longer when the high probability middle flag is saved than when the low probability middle flag is saved, the first high probability The period of the second and subsequent high probability states is longer than the period of the state.

Moreover, if the configuration of the present modification is applied, it is also possible to extend the time saving state.
Specifically, for example, at a predetermined timing, if the current special game state is based on a hit other than the special figure time short, save the time reduction no middle flag, and the special game state this special figure If it is based on a hit in time saving, save the time saving flag.
Then, when the time saving no / medium flag is saved, the preparation time is not provided between the first special figure changing display game and the next special figure changing display game executed during the time reduction state. On the other hand, when the time saving / medium flag is saved, it is also possible to provide a preparation time between one special figure fluctuation display game and the next special figure fluctuation display game to be executed during the time reduction state. It is possible.

In this way, the time reduction state period (the first time reduction period period) occurring after the end of the special gaming state based on the hit other than the special figure time short and the end of the special game state based on the hit in the special figure time short Since the second and subsequent time-shortened periods are longer than the first time-shortened period and the first time-shortened period and the short-timed period, the short time period appears. It is possible to reduce the ball ratio and to prevent the irritability from becoming too high.

<Modification 3-2>
Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), when the special gaming state this time is based on hitting in a low probability at a predetermined timing (at the end of the special gaming state in the case of this modification) The high probability medium frequency is cleared to 0, and the high probability medium frequency is updated by +1 if the current special gaming state is based on hitting in the high probability condition.
Then, when the number of times of high probability middle is 0 times, it is configured not to provide a preparation time between one special figure fluctuation display game and the next special figure fluctuation display game to be executed during the high probability state period. . On the other hand, when the high probability medium number of times is one or more, while providing a preparation time between the one special figure fluctuation display game and the next special figure fluctuation display game executed during the high probability state period, It is also possible to configure so that the preparation time becomes longer as the number of probability increases. In particular,
For example, if the number of high probability middle is 1 time, the first preparation time (for example, 200 ms) is set, and if the number of high probability middle is 2 times, the second preparation time longer than the first preparation time (Eg 40
0 ms), and if the number of times of high probability is 3 or more, the third is longer than the second preparation time
Set the preparation time (for example, 600 ms).

Thereby, after the end of the special gaming state based on the hit in the high probability state period (period of the first high probability state) occurring after the end of the special gaming state based on the hit in the low probability The period of the high probability state that occurs (the period of the second and subsequent high probability states) and the period of the second and subsequent high probability states are longer than the period of the first high probability state. It is possible to reduce the rate of popping out of time and to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.
Furthermore, as the number of times the high probability state occurs continuously increases, the period of the high probability state becomes longer (in the case of this modification, the second high probability state is higher than the period of the first high probability state). Since the period is longer and the third high probability period is longer than the second high probability period), it is effectively prevented that the euphoria becomes too high. Can.

In addition, in this modification, when the number of times of high probability middle is 0 times, preparation time between the one special figure fluctuation display game and the next special figure fluctuation display game executed during the high probability state period. Although it has been configured not to provide, it is not limited to this. That is, even when the number of times of high probability is 0, the preparation time may be provided. Also, in this configuration, if the length of preparation time is one or more of the high probability medium is longer than when the number of the high probability medium is zero, 1
The period of the second and subsequent high probability states is longer than the period of the second high probability state.

Further, in the present modification, the same preparation time (specifically, the third preparation time) is set when the high probability medium number is three or more, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, even when the high probability middle number is three or more, different preparation times may be set according to the high probability middle number. Furthermore, even when the high probability medium number is three or more, different preparation time is set according to the high probability medium number, and the preparation time to be set becomes longer as the high probability medium number increases. It is also possible to configure.

Moreover, if the configuration of the present modification is applied, it is also possible to extend the time saving state.
Specifically, for example, if the special game state of this time is based on a hit other than special time, the time count of the short time is cleared to 0, and the special game state of this time is special. If it is based on a hit in the chart time, then the number of times is shortened by +1.
When the number of times of time saving and medium is 0, it is configured not to provide a preparation time between one special figure changing display game and the next special figure changing display game executed during the time reduction state. On the other hand, if the number of times is short or medium, the preparation time is provided between one special figure variation display game and the next special figure variation display game to be executed during the short time period, and time is short. It is also possible to configure so that the preparation time becomes longer as the number of intermediate times increases.

In this way, the time reduction state period (the first time reduction period period) occurring after the end of the special gaming state based on the hit other than the special figure time short and the end of the special game state based on the hit in the special figure time short Since the second and subsequent time-shortened periods are longer than the first time-shortened period and the first time-shortened period and the short-timed period, the short time period appears. It is possible to reduce the ball ratio and to prevent the irritability from becoming too high.

In the modification 3-1, the second and subsequent high probability states may be shorter than the first high probability state. Specifically, for example, when the low probability middle flag is saved, the preparation time is set between one special figure fluctuation display game and the next special figure fluctuation display game executed during the high probability state period. Configure to provide. On the other hand, when the high probability middle flag is saved, the preparation time is not provided between the first special figure fluctuation display game and the next special figure fluctuation display game executed during the high probability state period. May be Also when comprised in this way, it can prevent that euphoria becomes high too much.

In the modification 3-2, the period of the high probability state may be shortened as the number of times the high probability state occurs continuously increases. Specifically, for example, regardless of the number of times of high probability, it is configured to provide a preparation time between one special figure fluctuation display game and the next special figure fluctuation display game to be executed during the high probability state period In addition, the preparation time may be configured to be shortened as the number of times of high probability increases. Also when comprised in this way, it can prevent that euphoria becomes high too much.

<Modification 4>
Also, as a method for reducing the number of occurrences of the special gaming state per unit time, for example,
There is a method of lengthening the period of the special gaming state.
As a method of lengthening the period of the special game state, there is a method of extending at least one of fanfare time, interval time, and ending time, for example.

<Modification 4-1>
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 109 (a), at a predetermined timing (in the case of this modification, at the start of the special gaming state), the special gaming state this time is based on hitting in a low probability If so, the low probability middle flag is saved, and if the special game state this time is based on the high probability hit, the high probability middle flag is saved.
And when the low probability flag is saved, neither fanfare time, interval time nor ending time is extended (no additional time is added to any)
To configure. On the other hand, if the high probability flag is saved, the fanfare time,
It is also possible to configure to extend at least one of the interval time and the ending time (add an additional time to at least one).

[Process while displaying special map]
In order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 109 (a), the gaming control apparatus 100 of this modification executes the processing during the special view display shown in FIG. 110 in place of the processing during the special view display shown in FIG. .
As shown in FIG. 110, in the special figure display processing of this modification, processing for setting the current-time probability state flag (step A725 to A727) is performed between step A 715 and step A 716.
) Is different from the processing during special image display of the above embodiment (see FIG. 52).

In the hit time probability state flag setting process, first, it is determined whether the current special game state is based on the high probability & the hit in the short time (step A725).
If the special game state of this time is based on the high probability & the hit in the short time (step A 725; Y), save the high probability middle flag in the current time probability state flag area (step A 726), It transfers to the process of step A716.
On the other hand, when the special game state this time is not based on the high probability & time reduction hit (step A 725; N), save the low probability medium flag in the current time probability state flag area (step A 727) , Shift to the process of step A716.

In the present modification, the per-time probability state flag setting process (steps A725 to A727) is executed between step A 715 and step A 716, but the present invention is not limited to this. The per-time probability state flag setting process (steps A725 to A727) is, for example,
After execution of the processing (step A705, A706) to save the test signal about the big hit start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the test signal output data area, the big hit fanfare time corresponding to the stop design pattern to the special figure game processing timer area Processing to Save (Step A 71
The execution may be performed at any timing before the execution of 8).

And, in order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 109 (a), in the case of extending the fan fare time, the game control apparatus 100 of the present modification is in the stop symbol pattern in the special figure display processing shown in FIG. Instead of saving the corresponding big hit fanfare time in the special figure game processing timer area (step A 718), the big hit fanfare time corresponding to the flag saved in the current time probability state flag area and the stop symbol pattern is specially drawn A process (step A718a) of saving in the game processing timer area is executed.

In step A 718a, for example, when the flag saved in the per-time probability state flag area is a low probability middle flag, the big hit fanfare time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (here 100 ms, 2500 ms, or 500 m ) Is saved in the special figure game processing timer area.
On the other hand, when the flag saved in the hit time probability state flag area is the high probability medium flag, the big hit fanfare time (100 m here) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern.
A time value obtained by adding a predetermined additional time (for example, 600 ms) to any one of seconds, 2500 ms, and 500 ms) is saved in the special-purpose game processing timer area.

[Big winning opening open processing]
In order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 109 (a), in the case of extending the interval time, the game control apparatus 100 of this modification is replaced with the processing during the big winning opening open shown in FIG. Execute the processing during the special winning opening open shown.
As shown in FIG. 111, in the special winning opening open processing of this modification, the processing for saving the special winning opening opening data and the interval time corresponding to the number of rounds in the special view game processing timer area (step A 907) The point that the processing (step A 907a) of saving the interval time corresponding to the flag, the special winning opening open data, and the number of rounds saved in the current hit time probability state flag area in the special figure game processing timer area is It differs from the processing during the special winning opening of the embodiment (see FIG. 59).

In step A 907 a, for example, when the flag saved in the per-time probability state flag area is a low probability in-progress flag, an interval time corresponding to the big winning opening open data and the number of rounds (here, 300 ms, 900 m). (Seconds or 1300 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area.
On the other hand, when the flag saved in the per-time probability state flag area is the high-probability-in-progress flag, the special winning opening open data and the interval time corresponding to the number of rounds (here, 3)
Predetermined additional time (eg 60) at 00 ms, 900 ms or 1300 ms)
The time value obtained by adding 0 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area.

[Big win mouth remaining ball processing]
In order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 109 (a), when extending the ending time, the game control apparatus 100 of this modification is replaced with the special winning opening residual ball processing shown in FIG. Execute the big winning opening remaining ball processing shown.
As shown in FIG. 112, in the special winning opening remaining ball processing of the present modification, processing for saving the ending time corresponding to the special winning opening opening data in the special view game processing timer area (step A95)
In place of 4), the processing (step A954a) is executed to save the ending time corresponding to the flag saved in the hit time probability state flag area and the special winning opening open data in the special view game processing timer area. This is different from the special winning opening residual ball processing (see FIG. 61) of the above embodiment.

In step A 954a, for example, when the flag saved in the current-time probability state flag area is a low-probability-in-progress flag, the ending time corresponding to the special winning opening data (here, 100 ms, 2300 ms, or Save any of 2700 ms) in the special figure game processing timer area.
On the other hand, if the flag saved in the hit time probability state flag area is the high probability medium flag, the ending time (100 ms, 2 here) corresponding to the large winning opening opening data.
A time value obtained by adding a predetermined additional time (e.g., 600 ms) to either 300 ms or 2700 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area.

Thereby, the period of the special gaming state based on the hit in the low probability (period of the first special gaming state), and the period of the special gaming state based on the hit in the high probability (of the second or later special gaming state The period of the special gaming state after the second is longer than the period of the special gaming state with the first period, so that the payout rate in a short time can be reduced, and the proviso is high. It can prevent becoming too much.

In this modification, when the low probability medium flag is saved, the fanfare time, the interval time, and the ending time are not extended (the additional time is not added). It is not limited to That is, even when the low probability flag is saved, at least one of fanfare time, interval time, and ending time may be extended (additional time is added to at least one). In addition, when configured in this way, if the length of the additional time is longer when the high probability flag is saved than when the low probability flag is saved, the first special game The period of the second or later special game state is longer than the state period.

Further, in this modification, for example, when the special game state at this time is based on the hit at a time other than the special figure time short at a predetermined timing, the time saving no-middle flag is saved, and the special game state this time If is based on the hit in Toku-shi time saving, save the time saving and medium flag.
Then, when the time saving no / medium flag is saved, none of the fanfare time, interval time, and ending time is extended (no additional time is added to any of them). On the other hand, when the time saving / medium flag is saved, at least one of fanfare time, interval time, and ending time can be extended (additional time is added to at least one).

In this way, the special gaming state period (period of the first special gaming state) based on hitting except during special figure time short and the special gaming state period based on hitting during special figure time short (second time or later special Since the period of the special gaming state after the second is longer than the period of the first special gaming state, and the period of the gaming state), the payout rate in a short time can be reduced, It is possible to prevent the sex from becoming too high.

<Modification 4-2>
Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 109 (b), in the case where the current special gaming state is based on hitting in a low probability at a predetermined timing (at the start of the special gaming state in the case of this modification). The high probability medium frequency is cleared to 0, and the high probability medium frequency is updated by +1 if the current special gaming state is based on hitting in the high probability condition.
And if the number of times of high probability is 0, fanfare time, interval time,
And neither ending time is extended (no additional time is added to either). On the other hand, when the number of high probability medium is one or more, at least one of fanfare time, interval time, and ending time is extended (additional time is added to at least one), and the number of high probability medium is many It is also possible to configure so that the additional time to be added becomes longer as it becomes.

[Process while displaying special map]
In order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 109 (b), the gaming control apparatus 100 of this modification executes the processing during the special view display shown in FIG. 113 instead of the processing during the special view display shown in FIG. .
As shown in FIG. 113, in the special figure display process of this modification, the high-probability medium number setting process (steps A728 to A730) is executed between step A 715 and step A 716 in the above-described embodiment. This is different from the processing (see FIG. 52) in displaying the special view of.

In the high probability medium number setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the special game state of this time is based on hitting with high probability & time reduction (step A 728).
If the special gaming state of this time is based on the high probability & the hit in the short time (step A 728; Y), the value of the high probability middle number area (high probability middle number) is updated by +1 (step A)
729), and proceeds to processing of step A716.
On the other hand, when the special game state this time is not based on the high probability & the time in the middle (step A 728; N), the high probability medium number area is cleared to 0 (step A 730), and the process of step A 716 is performed. Transition.

In the present modification, the high-probability middle number setting process (steps A728 to A730) is executed between step A715 and step A716, but the present invention is not limited to this. The high probability medium number setting process (steps A728 to A730) is, for example, a process of saving a test signal related to the start of the big hit of the special view fluctuation display game in the test signal output data area (step A70).
5, A706), before the execution of processing (step A 718) to save the big hit fanfare time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern in the special figure game processing timer area, it may be executed at any timing Good.

And, in order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 109 (b), in the case of extending the fan fare time, the game control apparatus 100 of the present modification is in the stop symbol pattern in the special figure display processing shown in FIG. Processing to save the big hit fanfare time corresponding to the high probability medium number and stop symbol pattern in the special figure game processing timer area (step A 718) instead of saving the corresponding big hit fanfare time in the special figure game processing timer area (step A718) Execute step A 718 b).

In step A 718 b, for example, when the high probability middle number is 0 times, the big hit fanfare time (here 100 ms, 2500 ms, or 500 ms) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern to the special view game processing timer Save to area.
On the other hand, when the number of times of high probability is 1 time, a predetermined first additional time (for example, one of 100 ms, 2500 ms or 500 ms) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (for example, 100 ms, 2500 ms or 500 ms) A time value obtained by adding 400 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area.

In addition, when the high probability medium frequency is 2 times, in the big hit fanfare time which corresponds to the stop design pattern (here either 100msec, 2500msec, or 500msec), predetermined 2nd addition time (for example, The time value obtained by adding 600 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area.
In addition, when the number of times during the high probability is 3 times or more, the predetermined third additional time (in any of 100 ms, 2500 ms, or 500 ms) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (here, 100 ms, 2500 ms, or 500 ms) For example, a time value obtained by adding 800 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area.

[Big winning opening open processing]
In order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 109 (b), in the case where the interval time is extended, the game control apparatus 100 of this modification is replaced with the processing during the big winning opening open shown in FIG. Execute the processing during the special winning opening open shown.
As shown in FIG. 114, in the special winning opening open processing of this modification, processing for saving the special winning opening opening data and the interval time corresponding to the number of rounds in the special view game processing timer area (step A 907) A process of saving the interval time corresponding to the high probability medium number, the large winning opening opening data and the round number in the special figure game processing timer area (step A 907 b)
Is different from the processing during the special winning opening open in the above embodiment (see FIG. 59).

In step A 907 b, for example, when the high probability medium number is 0 times, the special winning opening open data and the interval time corresponding to the number of rounds (here, 300 ms, 900 ms, or 1300 ms) are selected. Save to the game processing timer area.
On the other hand, when the high probability medium number of times is one, the interval time corresponding to the big winning opening opening data and the number of rounds (here, 300 ms, 900 ms, or 1300 ms)
A time value obtained by adding a predetermined first additional time (for example, 400 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area.

Moreover, when the number of times of high probability is 2 times, the interval time corresponding to the big winning opening opening data and the number of rounds (here, 300 ms, 900 ms, or 1300 ms)
A time value obtained by adding a predetermined second addition time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area.
In addition, when the number of times of high probability middle is 3 times or more, predetermined winning a prize opening opening data and the interval time which corresponds to the round number (here either 300msec, 900msec, or 1300msec) 3) Save the time value obtained by adding the additional time (for example, 800 ms) in the special figure game processing timer area.

[Big win mouth remaining ball processing]
In order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 109 (b), when extending the ending time, the game control apparatus 100 of this modification is replaced with the special winning opening remaining ball processing shown in FIG. Execute the big winning opening remaining ball processing shown.
As shown in FIG. 115, in the special winning opening remaining ball processing of this modification, processing for saving the ending time corresponding to the special winning opening opening data in the special view game processing timer area (step A95)
Instead of 4), the process of saving the ending time corresponding to the high probability medium number and the big winning opening open data in the special figure game processing timer area (step A954b) is the big winning opening remaining in the above embodiment. Different from sphere processing (see FIG. 61).

In step A 954 b, for example, when the high probability middle number is 0 times, the ending time corresponding to the large winning opening opening data (here, 100 ms, 2300 ms, or 270).
Save 0 ms) in the special figure game processing timer area.
On the other hand, when the number of times of high probability is 1 time, the predetermined first additional time (here, 100 ms, 2300 ms, or 2700 ms) corresponding to the big winning opening open data is determined. For example, a time value obtained by adding 400 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area.

In addition, when the number of times during the high probability is 2 times, a predetermined second additional time (here, 100 ms, 2300 ms, or 2700 ms) corresponding to the large winning opening opening data For example, a time value obtained by adding 600 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area.
In addition, when the high probability medium frequency is 3 times or more, predetermined ending time (here 100 ms, 2300 ms, or 2700 ms) corresponding to the big winning opening opening data, the predetermined third additional time A time value obtained by adding (for example, 800 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area.

Thereby, the period of the special gaming state based on the hit in the low probability (period of the first special gaming state), and the period of the special gaming state based on the hit in the high probability (of the second or later special gaming state The period of the special gaming state after the second is longer than the period of the special gaming state with the first period, so that the payout rate in a short time can be reduced, and the proviso is high. It can prevent becoming too much.
Furthermore, as the number of times the high probability state occurs continuously (that is, the number of times the special gaming state occurs continuously) increases, the period of the special gaming state becomes longer (in the case of this modification, the first special Because the second special gaming state period is longer than the gaming state period, and the third special gaming state period is longer than the second special gaming state period), It can be effectively prevented that the sex becomes too high.

In this modification, when the high probability medium number is 0, none of the fanfare time, interval time, and ending time is extended (no additional time is added). It is not limited to That is, even when the number of times of high probability and middle is zero, at least one of the fanfare time, interval time, and ending time may be extended (additional time is added to at least one). In addition, in this configuration, if the length of the additional time is longer when the number of middle times of high probability is 1 or more than when the number of middle times of high probability is 0, the first special The period of the second or later special gaming state is longer than the period of the gaming state.

Further, in the present modification, the same additional time (specifically, the third additional time) is added when the high probability medium number is three or more, but the present invention is not limited thereto. That is, even when the high probability medium number is three or more, different additional times may be added according to the high probability medium number. Furthermore, even when the high probability middle number is three or more, while it is configured to add different additional time according to the high probability middle number, the additional time to be added becomes longer as the high probability middle number increases. It is also possible to configure.

Also, for example, when the high probability medium number is the first number (for example, once), one of the fanfare time, the interval time, and the ending time is extended, and the high probability medium number is greater than the first number. When it is the second many times (for example, twice), fanfare time,
If any two of the interval time and the ending time are extended and the high probability medium frequency is the third number of times (for example, 3 times) more than the second number, the fanfare time, the interval time, and the ending time It is also possible to configure to extend the whole.

Further, in this modification, for example, if the special game state of this time is based on a hit other than special time, the time count is cleared to 0, and the special game of this time is performed at a predetermined timing. If the state is based on the hit in Toku-shi time, time is short + medium number +
1 Update.
Then, when the number of times of time saving and medium is 0, none of the fanfare time, the interval time, and the ending time is extended (no additional time is added to any of them). On the other hand, when the number of times is short or medium, at least one of the fanfare time, the interval time, and the ending time is extended (additional time is added to at least one), and the number of times is short. It is also possible to configure so that the additional time to be added becomes longer as it becomes.

In this way, the special gaming state period (period of the first special gaming state) based on hitting except during special figure time short and the special gaming state period based on hitting during special figure time short (second time or later special Since the period of the special gaming state after the second is longer than the period of the first special gaming state, and the period of the gaming state), the payout rate in a short time can be reduced, It is possible to prevent the sex from becoming too high.

Further, in the modified example 4-1 and the modified example 4-2, it is also possible to extend the remaining ball processing time in order to extend the period of the special gaming state.
In addition, in the modified example 4-1 and the modified example 4-2, the effect control device 300 counts the number of medium times during high probability (or the number of consecutive rooms), and the number of times during high probability (or the number of consecutive rooms) increases. Along with this, the selection rate of a predetermined effect to be executed during the special game state (for example, a promotion effect to be executed during an interval) may be increased.

In addition, in the modification examples 4-1 and 4-2, for example, in the case of extending the ending time, the effect control device 300 determines the ending time (here, 100 ms, 2300 ms, etc.) corresponding to the big winning opening opening data. Or, the ending effect is performed in any of 2700 ms, and after the ending effect is completed, the additional effect of displaying the game history or displaying the company logo in the extended time (additional time) is performed. It is possible to configure. Furthermore, when configured in this way, a display device 4 comprising three 7-segment displays
A liquid crystal display device may be provided separately from 1 and the additional effect may be performed using the liquid crystal display device.

Further, in the modification 4-1, the second special game state period may be shorter than the first special game state period. Specifically, for example, when the low probability flag is saved, at least one of the fanfare time, the interval time, and the ending time is extended. On the other hand, when the high probability flag is saved, the fanfare time, the interval time, and the ending time may not be extended. Also when comprised in this way, it can prevent that euphoria becomes high too much.

In the modification 4-2, the period of the special game state may be shortened as the number of times the high probability state occurs continuously increases. Specifically, for example, at least one of the fanfare time, the interval time, and the ending time is extended regardless of the high probability medium frequency, and the additional time to be added is shortened as the high probability medium frequency increases. It may be configured to be Also when comprised in this way, it can prevent that euphoria becomes high too much.

<Modification 5>
In addition, as a method of preventing the number of prize balls paid out per unit time from becoming too large and preventing the prosperity from becoming too high, the larger the size of the gaming value provided in the special gaming state, There is a method of lengthening the time to set in.

<Modification 5-1>
As a method of lengthening the time set in the game, there is a method of lengthening the period of the special game state. As a method of lengthening the period of the special game state, there is a method of extending at least one of fanfare time, interval time, and ending time, for example.

In this modification, the number of winning balls that can be obtained by the player in the special game state is set as the size of the game value, and the fanfare time, interval time, and ending time are set accordingly. FIG. 116 shows the fanfare time, interval time and ending time set for each special result. The opening mode of the special variation winning device in the special game state based on each special result is as shown in FIG. 7 and FIG. 8, but in this modification, it is shown in FIG. 116 as fanfare time, interval time and ending time. Use time

From the opening mode of the special variation winning device shown in FIG. 7 and FIG. 8, the special gaming state based on the 12R probability variation is the special gaming state with the largest number of award balls obtainable. That is, it is a special gaming state where the gaming value to be awarded is the largest. In addition, the special gaming state based on 5R, 5R normal and 4R randomness is a special gaming state that can obtain approximately the same level of prize balls, and the number of obtainable prize balls is smaller than that of the special gaming state based on 12R randomness . That is, it is a special gaming state in which the gaming value to be awarded is smaller than the special gaming state based on 12R probability variation. And, the special game state based on the 4R normal is the special game state in which the number of award balls obtainable is the smallest. That is, it is a special game state where the game value to be awarded is the smallest.

As described above, the game value that can be provided in the special game state includes at least the first game value and the second game value having a smaller game value to be provided than the first game value. That is, if the special gaming state based on the 12R probability variation is made the first special gaming status capable of giving the first gaming value as the gaming value, the special gaming status based on the 5R probability variation, 5R normal, 4R probability variation and 4R normal is said first It becomes a second special game state where a second game value smaller than the game value is provided. In addition, the special gaming state based on 5R positive variation, 5R normal and 4R positive variation is considered to be the first game value
If the first special gaming state for giving a gaming value is set, the special gaming state based on 4R normal is a second special gaming state for giving a second gaming value smaller than the first gaming value.

In this modification, as shown in FIG. 116, the fanfare time, the interval time, and the ending time become longer as the game value to be awarded is larger. That is,
Each of the fanfare, interval, and ending or a combination of these is set as a specific period, and the length of the specific period is made longer as the gaming value given is larger. That is, the length of the specific period to be selected is made longer in the case where the first game value is selected than in the case where the second game value is selected.

In this way, in the special game state based on the 12R probability variation in which the number of prize balls to be paid out is large, the time taken for the special gaming state to progress becomes long, the number of prize balls per unit time is suppressed, and the provability is high. It can prevent becoming too much. In addition, by reducing the fanfare time, interval time and ending time as the number of prize balls to be paid out in the special game state is reduced, the special game state is digested or not to the extent that the provivity does not become too high. A sense of speed can be given, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

With regard to setting of such a specific period, in step A 718 in the special figure display process shown in FIG. 52, the time figure shown in FIG. 116 corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number is used as the big hit fanfare time. Save to Further, in step A 907 in the special winning opening open process shown in FIG. 59, the time value shown in FIG. 116 is saved as an interval time in the special view game processing timer area corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number. Also, step A 911 in the process of opening the special winning opening shown in FIG.
And the step A in the big winning opening residual ball processing shown in FIG. 61.
The time obtained by combining it with the ending time set at 954 is set to be the ending time shown in FIG. 116 corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number.

Although the fanfare time, interval time, and ending time are all set corresponding to the size of the game value that can be acquired here, the game value of only one or two of them can be acquired. It may be set according to the size. Also, although an interval occurs a plurality of times in one special game state, it may be set according to the size of the game value that can be obtained for all of these, or a part of the intervals among a plurality of times The value may be set corresponding to the size of the game value that can be acquired.

In addition, fanfare time or interval time can be set according to the size of the game value, so that fanfare time or interval time can be extended without explicitly notifying the type of special result in the decorative special feature variation display game. There is also another effect that the kind of special result can be suggested or informed. For example, in a gaming machine which performs promotion promotion whether or not subsequent rounds continue in a predetermined round, it is possible to guess whether the round continues from the execution mode of the special gaming state before the execution of the promotion promotion. And can have new interests.

<Modification 5-2>
As a method of lengthening the time set in the game, there is a method of lengthening the execution time of the special view variation display game before the occurrence of the special gaming state. As a method of lengthening the execution time of the special view variation display game, for example, there is a method of extending at least one of the variation time and the stop time.

In this modification, the number of winning balls that can be obtained by the player in the special game state is set as the size of the game value, and the variation time and stop time of the special figure change display game to be the special result are set according to the game value. ing. FIG. 117 shows fluctuation time and stop time set corresponding to each special result.

As shown in FIG. 117 (a), in the special figure fluctuation display game in which 12R probability changes, only the SP3 reach system with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds or 105 seconds and the Premier reach system with a fluctuation time of 120 seconds can be selected as a fluctuation pattern. . Further, as shown in FIG. 117 (b), in the special figure variation display game in which 5R probability variation, 5R normal variation or 4R probability variation occurs, the variation time is 30 seconds or 4 as a variation pattern.
Only SP1 reach system with 5 seconds and SP2 reach system with fluctuation time of 60 seconds or 75 seconds can be selected. Also, as shown in FIG. 117 (c), in the special pattern variation display game in which 4R is normal, as a variation pattern, an N reach short system with a variation time of 10 seconds and an N with a variation time of 15 seconds or 20 seconds.
Only reach systems can be selected. Thus, the fluctuation time is made longer as the game value to be awarded is larger. Further, as shown in FIG. 117 (d), the larger the game value to be awarded, the longer the stop time.

That is, each of the fluctuation time and the stop time or a period obtained by combining them is set as a specific period, and the length of the specific period is made longer as the gaming value provided is larger. That is, the length of the specific period to be selected is made longer in the case where the first game value is selected than in the case where the second game value is selected.

In this way, when a special gaming state based on a 12R probability variation occurs with a large number of prize balls to be paid out, it takes a long time to generate a special gaming state, especially when the previous special gaming state is near The number of winning balls per unit time can be suppressed to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high. In addition, the fluctuation time and the stop time become shorter as the number of prize balls to be paid out in the special gaming state decreases, so that it is possible to give the feeling of speed of the consecutive villas within a range where the irritability does not become too high, It is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

With regard to setting of such fluctuation time and stop time, in step A 452 in the special view information setting process shown in FIG. 47, when the result is a special result, corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number, FIGS. One of the tables in c) is selected, and in the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 48, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the selected table. Further, in step A603 in the special figure changing process shown in FIG. 51, the stop time shown in FIG. 117 (d) is selected corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number.

Here, both the fluctuation time and the stop time are set corresponding to the size of the game value that can be obtained, but it is possible to correspond to the size of the game value that can be obtained for only one of these. You may set it.

Also, although the variation time or stop time of the special figure variation display game to be the special result is set according to the gaming value provided in the special gaming state, the special figure prior to the special figure variation display game to be the special result Also for the variable display game, the fluctuation time or the stop time may be set according to the game value to be awarded. The fact that a special result is derived is known by prior determination at the time of occurrence of start-up storage, so that the fluctuation time and stop time set thereafter can be set in accordance with the special result. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the irritability from becoming too high, and also to make it possible to set the advance notice effect by the fluctuation time and the stop time, and to improve the interest of the game.

Also, in FIGS. 117 (a) to (c), the selectable variation patterns are made different according to the game value to be awarded, but by doing this, the reach state in the special figure variation display game is obtained. This makes it possible to provide an unprecedented rendering effect that makes it possible to infer special results that may be derived at a time when the game is being played, thus improving the interest of the game. Also,
As an execution mode of the reach production, first the production of the N reach system is started, and it develops from this and S
If the reach effect of the P reach system or the Premier reach system is made, the development of the reach effect can have an unprecedented effect of responding to the promotion of a special result, and the interest of the game can be improved. it can.

Further, in FIGS. 117 (a) to (c), the selectable variation patterns are made different according to the game value to be awarded, but the same variation pattern is possible even when the game value to be awarded is different. May be selected. For example, the expected value of the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern and the expected value of the fluctuation time obtained from the selection probability of the fluctuation pattern may be different according to the game value to be provided.

Further, in the above example, the second special game state occurs when the length of the specific period (fanfare, interval, ending, fluctuation time, and stop time) selected when the first special game state occurs Although the length of the specific period selected in this case is longer than this, the present invention is not limited to this, and when selecting the length of the specific period, a lottery is performed from among a plurality of time values, If the special gaming state occurs, the probability of selecting a specific period longer than the case where the second special gaming state occurs is high. In addition, the expected value obtained from the selection probability in each of the selectable time values and the selectable time value in this lottery, the second special gaming state occurs when the first special gaming state occurs It can be said that it is better if it is larger than the case.

From the above, it is possible to execute the game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, in the gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state for giving the player a gaming value A control means (game control device 100) for controlling is provided, and the control means is at least granted as a special gaming state, a first special gaming state capable of providing a first gaming value, or more than the first gaming value. A second special game state capable of giving a second game value having a small game value, and the length of a specific period set in the game can be selected according to the generated special game state, the first The length of the specific period selected when the special gaming state occurs is longer than the length of the specific period selected when the second special gaming state occurs.
Further, in the case where the first special gaming state occurs, the probability of selecting a longer specific period is higher than in the case where the second special gaming state occurs. Further, the control means is configured to set the execution time of the game as a specific period. Further, the control means is configured to set the execution time of the special gaming state as the specific period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the irritability from becoming too high.

Further, the control means can select one special result out of a plurality of types of special results as a special result, and can select a game value to be provided in the special game state based on the selected special result, and select The length of the specific period set in the game can be selected based on the game value to be played, and the second game is such that the game value has at least a first game value and a lower game value to be awarded than the first game value. In the case where the value is included and the first gaming value is selected, the length of the specific period to be selected is longer than in the case where the second gaming value is selected.

<Modification 5-3>
In addition, in the gaming machine in which the setting of the jackpot probability in the gaming machine can be selected from a plurality of stages by the operation of the setting switch provided on the back of the gaming machine, the length of the specific period is made different according to the setting of the jackpot probability. Also good. The setting switch is provided on the game control device 100,
The information set by the setting switch is input to the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100, and the gaming microcomputer 111 sets the big hit probability according to the setting switch.

For example, as shown in FIG. 118 (a), it is possible to select from setting 1 with probability 1/269, setting 2 with probability 1/289, and setting 3 with probability 1/308 as the setting of the jackpot probability. Do. That is, assuming that the probability value of setting 1 is the first probability value, the probability values of settings 2 and 3 are the first.
The second probability value is lower than the probability value. Also, assuming that the probability value of setting 2 is the first probability value, the probability value of setting 3 is the second probability value lower than the first probability value. The probability shown in FIG. 118A is the probability value in the normal probability state in each setting, and the probability value in the high probability state is 10 times the probability value in the normal probability state.

Then, according to the setting of the jackpot probability, fanfare time, interval time and ending time are selected as shown in FIGS. Here, the higher the jackpot probability, the higher the probability of selecting a longer time, so that the number of prize balls paid out per unit time is prevented from becoming too large, and the prosperity is prevented from becoming too high. It is like that.

Specifically, in step A 718 in the special figure display process shown in FIG. 52, a time value determined by lottery according to the probability shown in FIG. 118 (b) corresponding to the setting of the big hit probability is set as the big hit fanfare time. It is made to save in the special figure game processing timer area. For example,
In case of setting 1, 3000 ms is selected with 70% probability as fanfare time,
1000 ms is selected with a probability of 20%, and 500 ms is selected with a probability of 10%.

Further, in step A 907 in the big winning opening open process shown in FIG. 59, a time chart value determined by lottery according to the probability shown in FIG. Save in the processing timer area. For example, in the case of setting 1, 1300 ms is selected with a 70% probability, 900 ms is selected with a 20% probability, and 300 ms is selected with a 10% probability as an interval time. It should be noted that although the interval occurs a plurality of times in one special game state, it may be set corresponding to the setting of the big hit probability for all of these, or the big hit probability of some of the plurality of intervals may be set. It may be set according to the setting.

In addition, the remaining ball processing time set in step A911 in the special winning opening open processing shown in FIG. 59 and the ending time set in step A954 in the special winning opening remaining ball processing shown in FIG. For time, Figure 118 (corresponding to the setting of the big hit probability)
It is set to be a time value determined by lottery according to the probability shown in d). For example, setting 1
In this case, 5000 ms is selected with a probability of 70% and 3000 ms is 20% as an ending time which is the total of the remaining sphere processing time set in step A911 and the ending time set in step A954. Selected by probability, 2000 ms is 10
It is selected with a probability of%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 119, the selection probability of the variation pattern and the selection probability of the stop time may be made different according to the set big hit probability. As shown in FIGS. 119 (a) to (c), the probability of selecting a long time fluctuation pattern increases as the jackpot probability increases, and the number of prize balls paid out per unit time increases too much. I try to prevent things from becoming too addicting. In addition, as shown in FIG. 119 (d), the probability of selecting a long stop time increases as the jackpot probability increases, so that the number of prize balls paid out per unit time is prevented from becoming too large, We try to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

With regard to setting of such fluctuation time and stop time, step A 452 in the special view information setting process shown in FIG. 47 corresponds to the big hit probability when the result is a special result.
One of the tables 9 (a) to 9 (c) is selected, and in the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 48, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the selected table. Further, in step A603 in the special figure variation processing shown in FIG. 51, the processing in FIG. 119 (d) corresponds to the big hit probability.
Set the stop time determined by lottery according to the probability shown in.

In FIG. 118 and FIG. 119, the probability of selecting a longer time is higher as the jackpot probability is higher, but since it is selected from a plurality of time values, the set jackpot probability is early Can be prevented from being Also, it can be used as a clue for the player to guess the set jackpot probability, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Of course, a single time value or variation pattern may be selected according to the setting of the jackpot probability.

In FIGS. 118 and 119, although the fanfare time, interval time, ending time, fluctuation time, and stop time are set corresponding to the probability value, the time value is set regardless of the probability value. It may be. In addition, also for the special figure fluctuation display game in which the result is out, the fluctuation time or the stop time may be selected according to the probability value.

In addition, as the fanfare time, interval time, ending time, fluctuation time and stop time, there may be time values that can be selected only in the case of specific probability values. For example, if a time value that can be selected only by each probability value is provided for each of settings 1 to 3, the player can clearly grasp the probability value when the time value is selected. Also, setting 1
If it is possible to provide only selectable time values, it is possible to grasp that the setting is most advantageous to the player.

In FIGS. 118 and 119, the length of the specific period is set according to the probability value in the normal probability state shown in FIG. 118 (a), but according to the probability value in the high probability state. The length of the specific period may be set. In a high probability state, a big hit occurs more frequently than in a normal probability state, so by setting the length of a specific period according to the probability value in a high probability state, the number of prize balls paid out per unit time becomes too large The effect of preventing the euphorism from becoming too high becomes more pronounced. In the above example, since the probability value in the high probability state is set to 10 times the probability value in the normal probability state in any of the settings 1 to 3, the specific period is set according to the probability value in the high probability state. It can be said that it is setting.

From the above, it is possible to execute the game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, in the gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state for giving the player a gaming value Control means (game control apparatus 100) for controlling and setting means (game control apparatus 100) capable of selecting a probability value to be used for drawing a special result from a plurality of probability values by an operation of a setting switch. The control means can select the length of the specific period set in the game according to the probability value, and the second probability is lower than the first probability when the first probability value is set as the probability value. The probability of selecting a long specific period is higher than when the probability value is set. In addition, the control means sets the game execution time as the specific period. In addition, the control means sets the execution time of the special game state as a specific period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the irritability from becoming too high.

In the above fifth modification, the number of winning balls obtainable in the special gaming state is used as the gaming value to be awarded, but the number of rounds may be used as the gaming value without considering the number of winning balls obtainable. The fanfare time, interval time, ending time, fluctuation time, stop time, etc. is defined as the game value as to whether or not it becomes a definite change state after the end of the special game state, or whether it becomes a short time state after the end of the special game state. The lengths of the specific periods may be made different.

In the case of a definite change state, the probability of deriving the next special result is higher than in the case of no definite change state, and there is a high probability that the number of winning balls per unit time will be large, so the gaming value is large. Therefore,
In the case of a definite change state, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high by making the length of the specific period longer than the case of not being a definite change state. In addition, when time is short, the time until the next special result is derived is likely to be shorter than when time is not short, and there is a high possibility that the number of balls per unit time will increase. Is large. Therefore, when the time saving state is set, by setting the length of the specific period to be longer than the case where the time saving state is not set, it is possible to prevent the irritability from becoming too high.

In addition, by setting the length of a specific period corresponding to the size of the gaming value as the gaming value, whether or not it is a probable variation hit where the gaming ball is likely to flow into the probable variation operation area 38h, the decorative special figure There is also another effect that it is possible to suggest or notify the type of the special result from the length of the specific period without clearly notifying the type of the special result in the variable display game.

In addition, whether the game machine is in a definite change state or a short time state similarly whether it is determined whether the definite change state or the short time state is to be made only by the type of the special result regardless of the flow of the gaming ball into the positive change operation area 38h By setting the length of the specific period according to the size of the game value as the game value whether or not the length of the specific period without clearly notifying the type of the special result in the decorative special figure variation display game There is also another effect that the kind of special result can be suggested or informed. further,
Even in the case of a so-called latent state in which the probability state is not notified clearly as the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state, the probability state can be estimated from the length of the specific period.

Also, notification is given by display, sound, LED, etc. on the display device 41 so that the player can grasp the length of a specific period, such as fanfare time, interval time, ending time, fluctuation time, length of stop time, etc. You may do so. By doing this, it is possible to visually confirm the game value to be provided, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, from the viewpoint of preventing the gambling from becoming too high, it is necessary to lengthen the specific period as the game value to be granted is larger or the set big hit probability is higher. It is sufficient to set the length of the specific period according to the game value to be granted or according to the set jackpot probability, as long as it is only in view of improving the The length of the specific period may be made shorter as the jackpot probability is higher, or the size of the game value to be awarded or the set jackpot probability may not be proportional to the length of the specific period. In addition, the specific period may be set as the specific period in effect, and for example, a period in which a specific effect is executed may be set in accordance with the game value to be provided. For example, even if the variation time is the same, the period in which a specific effect is performed may be different.

In addition, the lengths of time of the specific periods corresponding to the special results may be set to be in an integral multiple relationship with each other. The fanfare time shown in FIG. 116 has such a relationship, and other interval time, ending time, fluctuation time, and length of stop time may be made in this way. By setting the length of time of the specific period corresponding to each special result to an integral multiple of each other, repeating the production of the shortest time value can also be used as production of other time values, and reduce data about the production be able to.

For example, with respect to fanfare time shown in FIG. 116, fanfare time in the special gaming state based on 12R probability variation is 6R of fanfare time in the special gaming state based on 4R normal.
It is doubled. In addition, the fanfare time in the special gaming state based on the 5R definite variation, the 5R normal variation and the 4R definite variation is twice the fanfare time in the special gaming condition based on the 4R normal. Therefore, the fanfare effect in the special game state based on the 12R probability change may be repeated 6 times in the special game state based on the 4R normal, the 5R probability change,
The fanfare effect in the special game state based on the 5R normal and 4R probability changes may be repeated twice the fanfare effect in the special game state based on the 4R normal.

In addition, while maintaining the relationship of the length of the specific period according to the game value to be granted, in combination with the above-described embodiment and each modification, whether or not it is a big hit in the normal probability state, The length of the specific period may be set in consideration of the number of times. For example, in the case of a big hit in the normal probability state, the time values in FIGS. 116 to 119 are used, and in the case of a big hit in the high probability state, FIG.
A time value obtained by multiplying the time from 16 to the time shown in FIG. 119 by a predetermined value may be used. In addition, a time value obtained by multiplying the time value in FIGS. 116 to 119 by a value that changes in accordance with the number of consecutive units may be used.

In addition, since the game value to be granted is different depending on the opening mode of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 in the hit state of the common drawing based on the derivation of the hit result, the fanfare time in the common state of the common drawing, interval The specific period may be set in accordance with the gaming value to be provided as a specific period, with a time, an ending time, and a fluctuation time or stop time of the common drawing fluctuation display game.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine shown in the above embodiment as a gaming machine, and, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, ball ball gaming machines, etc. The present invention is applicable to all gaming machines that use the game ball of. Also, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine. The slot machine is not limited to a slot machine using medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as slot machines using game balls. In addition, the configurations of the above-described modified examples can be combined appropriately and applied.

Further, it should be understood that the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is indicated not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include all the modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

100 game control device (control means, setting means)

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state for giving a player a gaming value when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result.
Control means for controlling the game;
Setting means for making it possible to select the probability value to be used for the drawing of the special result from a plurality of kinds of probability values by operating the setting switch,
The control means
The length of the specific period set in the game can be selected according to the probability value,
The case where the first probability value is set as the probability value and the case where the second probability value lower than the first probability is set are characterized in that the probability of selecting the long specific period is different. Gaming machine.

Images